2007 Cadillac CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual M

Seats and Restraint Systems ........................ 7 Instrument Panel ........................................ 155

Front Seats .............................................. 8 Instrument Panel Overview ................... 158
Rear Seats ............................................. 18 Climate Controls ................................... 180
Safety Belts ............................................ 20 Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators .... 188
Child Restraints ...................................... 42 Message Center ................................... 209
Airbag System ........................................ 68 Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 218
Restraint System Check ......................... 86 Audio System(s) ................................... 258
Features and Controls ................................. 89 Driving Your Vehicle .................................. 287
Keys ....................................................... 91 Your Driving, the Road, and
Doors and Locks .................................... 96 Your Vehicle ...................................... 288
Windows ............................................... 103 Towing ................................................. 326
Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 107 Service and Appearance Care ................... 329
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 111 Service ................................................. 332
Mirrors .................................................. 132 Fuel ...................................................... 334
OnStar® System ................................... 137 Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 340
Universal Home Remote System .......... 139 Rear Axle ............................................. 383
Storage Areas ...................................... 151 Headlamp Aiming ................................. 384
Sunroof ................................................ 153 Bulb Replacement ................................ 387

1
 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement .... 390 Maintenance Schedule ............................... 459
Tires ..................................................... 392 Maintenance Schedule .......................... 460
Appearance Care .................................. 435 Customer Assistance Information ............. 481
Vehicle Identification ............................. 445 Customer Assistance and Information ..... 482
Electrical System .................................. 446 Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 500
Capacities and Specifications ................ 457 Index ........................................................... 503

2
 This manual describes features that may be
available in this model, but your vehicle may not
be equipped with all of them. For example,
more than one entertainment system may be
offered or your vehicle may have been ordered
without a front passenger or rear seats.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
if it is needed while you are on the road. If the
CADILLAC, the CADILLAC Crest & Wreath,
vehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.
and the name CTS are registered trademarks
of General Motors Corporation.
Canadian Owners
This manual includes the latest information at
the time it was printed. We reserve the right A French language copy of this manual can be
to make changes after that time without notice. obtained from your dealer or from:
For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute Helm, Incorporated
the name “General Motors of Canada Limited” P.O. Box 07130
for Cadillac Motor Car Division whenever it Detroit, MI 48207
appears in this manual.

Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 15864562 A First Printing 2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from {CAUTION:
beginning to end when they first receive their
new vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learn These mean there is something that could
about the features and controls for the vehicle. hurt you or other people.
Pictures and words work together in the owner
manual to explain things.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard
is. Then we tell you what to do to help avoid
Index or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
A good place to quickly locate information about If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.
It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual You will also find a
and the page number where it can be found. circle with a slash
through it in this book.
This safety symbol
Safety Warnings and Symbols means “Do Not,”
There are a number of safety cautions in this “Do Not do this” or
book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to “Do Not let this happen.”
tell about things that could hurt you if you were
to ignore the warning.

4
Vehicle Damage Warnings Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices: The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown
Notice: These mean there is something along with the text describing the operation or
that could damage your vehicle. information relating to a specific component,
A notice tells about something that can damage control, message, gage, or indicator.
the vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
If you need help figuring out a specific name of
covered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could a component, gage, or indicator, reference
be costly. But the notice will tell what to do to help the following topics:
avoid the damage.
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors • Features and Controls in Section 2
or in different words. • Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They • Climate Controls in Section 3
use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE. • Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in
Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6
 Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ..................................................... 8 Child Restraint Systems .............................. 49
Manual Seats ................................................ 8 Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 54
Power Seats ................................................. 9 Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Power Lumbar ............................................. 10 Children (LATCH) .................................... 55
Heated Seats .............................................. 10 Securing a Child Restraint in a
Memory Seat and Mirrors ............................ 11 Rear Seat Position ................................... 61
Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 14 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Head Restraints .......................................... 17 Front Seat Position .................................. 63
Rear Seats .................................................... 18 Airbag System .............................................. 68
Split Folding Rear Seat ............................... 18 Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 71
Safety Belts .................................................. 20 When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 75
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 20 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 76
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts .... 25 How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 76
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 26 What Will You See After an Airbag
Driver Position ............................................. 26 Inflates? ................................................... 77
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 33 Passenger Sensing System ......................... 79
Right Front Passenger Position ................... 34 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 84
Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 34 Adding Equipment to Your
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 38 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 85
Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 41 Restraint System Check ............................... 86
Safety Belt Extender ................................... 41 Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 86
Child Restraints ............................................ 42 Replacing Restraint System Parts
Older Children ............................................. 42 After a Crash ........................................... 87
Infants and Young Children ......................... 45
7
Front Seats
Manual Seats

{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
Your vehicle may have manual seats. To adjust
the seat, lift the bar under the front of the
seat to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want
it and release the bar. Try to move the seat
back and forth with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.

8
Power Seats • Raise or lower the rear part of the seat
cushion by moving the rear of the horizontal
control up or down.
• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the
entire horizontal control up or down.
The vertical control is used for reclining your
seatback. See “Power Reclining Seatbacks” under
Reclining Seatbacks on page 14 for more
information.

If the vehicle has power seats, the controls used

to operate them are located on the outboard
side of the seats.
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding
the horizontal control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat
cushion by moving the front of the horizontal
control up or down.

9
Power Lumbar Heated Seats
Your vehicle may have If your vehicle has
this feature. The driver’s heated front seats, the
and passenger’s buttons are located
seatback lumbar support on the climate
can be adjusted by control panel.
moving the control
located on the outboard
side of the seat
cushions.

There is one button for the driver and one for the
front passenger. Each button has three settings,
To increase or decrease support, hold the control LO, HI and off. The active setting appears on
forward or rearward. Keep in mind that as your the climate control panel display. The LO setting
seating position changes, as it may during warms the seatback and cushion until the seat
long trips, so should the position of your lumbar approximates normal body temperature. The
support. Adjust the seat as needed. HI setting has a slightly higher temperature.

10
To turn on the heated seats, press the button The buttons for this
once. The seat will heat to the HI setting. Press the feature are located on
button again to switch to the LO setting. Pressing the driver’s door
the button a third time turns the system off. armrest.
The heated seats can only be used when the
ignition is turned on. When the vehicle is turned
off, the heated seats automatically turn off. If
you wish to have the heated seats on once the
vehicle is restarted, press the button again.

Memory Seat and Mirrors

Use the following steps to program the buttons:
If your vehicle has the memory feature, you can
program and recall memory settings for the driver’s 1. Adjust the driver’s seat including the seatback
seating and outside rearview mirror driving recliner and both outside mirrors.
positions. Different adjustments can be 2. Press and hold button 1 for at least
programmed for two drivers. three seconds.
Two beeps will sound to confirm that the seat
and mirror positions have been saved.
3. Repeat the procedure for a second driver
using button 2.

11
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the If you would like the stored driving positions to be
vehicle must be in PARK (P) to recall the stored recalled when unlocking your vehicle with the
driving positions. Remote Keyless Entry transmitter or after the key
If your vehicle has a manual transmission and the is placed in the ignition, see DIC Vehicle
engine is running, the parking brake must be Personalization on page 239.
set to recall the memory seat driving positions. The To stop recall movement of the memory feature at
stored driving positions can be recalled without any time, press one of the power seat or mirror
setting the parking brake if the vehicle is off. controls.
Press one of the numbered memory buttons to Two personalized exit positions can also be
recall the stored setting. Each time a memory programmed. Use the following steps to program
button is pressed, a single beep will sound. exit positions:
Three chimes will sound and the setting will not 1. Press memory seat button 1 or the unlock
be recalled if you press button 1 or 2 when button on the RKE transmitter, that has the
the vehicle is not in PARK (P) on an automatic number 1 on the back of it, to recall the driving
transmission or the parking brake is not set on a position.
manual transission. 2. Adjust the driver’s seat to the desired exit
position.

12
 3. Press and hold the exit button located above If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the
buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door armrest vehicle must be in PARK (P) to recall the exit
for at least three seconds. positions. If your vehicle has a manual transmission
Two beeps will sound to confirm that the exit and the engine is running, the parking brake must
position has been saved. be set to recall the stored exit positions.
4. Repeat the procedure for a second driver using Three chimes will sound and the exit setting will
memory seat button 2 or the RKE transmitter, not be recalled if you press the exit button
that has the number 2 on the back of it. when the vehicle is not in PARK (P) on an
automatic transmission or the parking brake is not
To recall the stored exit positions, press and set on a manual transmission.
release the exit button. One beep will sound, and
the seat will move to the stored exit position If you would like your stored exit position to be
for that driver. If an exit position has not been recalled when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE
stored for this driver, the seat will move all the way transmitter, or when the ignition is turned off
back. The position of the outside mirrors does and the driver’s door is opened, see DIC Vehicle
not change for the exit position. Personalization on page 239.

13
Reclining Seatbacks If your front passenger’s seat has a manual
reclining seatback, the lever used to operate it is
Manual Reclining Seatbacks located on the outboard side of the seat.

{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you
try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while
the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.

To recline the seatback, do the following:

{CAUTION:
1. Lift the recline lever.
If the seatback is not locked, it could 2. Move the seatback to the desired position,
move forward in a sudden stop or crash. then release the lever to lock the seatback
That could cause injury to the person in place.
sitting there. Always push and pull on the 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
seatback to be sure it is locked. is locked.

14
To return the seatback to an upright position, do Power Reclining Seatbacks
the following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to
the seatback and the seatback will return to
the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.

If your seats have power reclining seatbacks, use

the vertical power seat control located on the
outboard side of each seat.
• To recline the seatback, press the control
toward the rear of the vehicle.
• To raise the seatback, press the control
toward the front of the vehicle.

15
 {CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your
vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.
Even if you buckle up, your safety belts
cannot do their job when you are reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a
crash, you could go into it, receiving neck
or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at your pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is
in motion, have the seatback upright.
Then sit well back in the seat and wear
your safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is

moving.

16
Head Restraints Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. To lower
the head restraint,
press the button,
located on the top of the
seatback, and push
the head restraint down.

All the head restraints can tilt forward and

rearward.
The rear head restraints can be removed from the
seatback. To do this, press the button, located
on the top of the seatback, and pull the head
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint all the way out.
restraint is at the same height as the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a
neck injury in a crash.

17
Rear Seats 2. There is a tab
located on the
outboard sides of
Split Folding Rear Seat the seatback.
Your vehicle may have a split folding rear seat. Pull forward on the
A split folding rear seat allows you to carry tab to unlock the
long cargo by folding down part or all of the seatback.
rear seat.
Use the following steps to lower one or both of the
rear seatbacks:
1. Your vehicle may
have a detachable
anchor on the Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
center safety belt. belts still fastened may cause damage to the
Insert a tool seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
with a small tip into the safety belts and return them to their normal
the slot as shown stowed position before folding a rear seat.
to unlatch the safety
3. Fold the seatback down. This will allow you
belt buckle. Then
direct access to the trunk.
move the belt to the
side so it is not in
your way.

18
To return the seatback to the upright position,
do the following: CAUTION: (Continued)

rear seatback, always check to be sure

{CAUTION: that the safety belts are properly routed
and attached, and are not twisted.
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person 2. Reconnect the
center safety
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
belt latch plate to
seatback to be sure it is locked. the buckle.

1. Lift the seatback up and push it back into place.

{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed,
not properly attached, or twisted will
not provide the protection needed in a 3. Make sure the seatback is locked into place
crash.The person wearing the belt could by pushing and pulling on it.
be seriously injured. After raising the 4. Repeat Steps 1 and 3 for the other seatback.
CAUTION: (Continued) When the seatback is not in use, it should be
kept in the upright, locked position.

19
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
Do not let anyone ride where he or she
This part of the manual tells you how to use
cannot wear a safety belt properly. If you
safety belts properly. It also tells you some things
you should not do with safety belts. are in a crash and you are not wearing a
safety belt, your injuries can be much
worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same
crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety
belt, and check that your passengers’
belts are fastened properly too.

20
 In most states and in all Canadian provinces,
the law says to wear safety belts.
{CAUTION: Here is why: They work.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
do have a crash, you do not know if it will be
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. a bad one.
In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can
killed. Do not allow people to ride in any be so serious that even buckled up, a person
would not survive. But most crashes are in
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
between. In many of them, people who buckle up
with seats and safety belts. Be sure can survive and sometimes walk away. Without
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.
using a safety belt properly.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in
vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes
buckling up does matter... a lot!
Your vehicle has a
light that comes on
as a reminder to
buckle up. See Safety
Belt Reminder Light
on page 192.

21
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes.

Put someone on it.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a

seat on wheels.

22
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The person keeps going until stopped by
The rider does not stop. something. In a real vehicle, it could be the
windshield...

23
or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle
does. You get more time to stop. You stop
over more distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety belts
make such good sense.

24
Questions and Answers About Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far
Safety Belts from home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an in an accident — even one that is not your
accident if I am wearing a safety belt? fault — you and your passengers can be hurt.
Being a good driver does not protect you
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a from things beyond your control, such as
safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a
bad drivers.
safety belt, even if you are upside down.
And your chance of being conscious during Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
and after an accident, so you can unbuckle of home. And the greatest number of serious
and get out, is much greater if you are belted. injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less
than 40 mph (65 km/h).
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Safety belts are for everyone.
I have to wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be
in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work
with safety belts — not instead of them.
Every airbag system ever offered for sale
has required the use of safety belts. Even if
you are in a vehicle that has airbags, you still
have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.

25
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Driver Position
This part is only for people of adult size. Lap-Shoulder Belt
Be aware that there are special things to know The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how
about safety belts and children. And there to wear it properly.
are different rules for smaller children and babies.
If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see 1. Close and lock the door.
Older Children on page 42 or Infants and Young 2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
Children on page 45. Follow those rules for To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint
systems your vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across

you. Do not let it get twisted.

26
 The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let
the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull
the belt across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it
clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure. If the belt is not long enough,
see Safety Belt Extender on page 41.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the

shoulder belt.

27
 The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In
a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones. And you would be less likely to slide under
the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would
apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able
to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the
retractor.

28
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give

nearly as much protection this way.

29
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a
crash, the belt would go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at the pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries. Always buckle
your belt into the buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

30
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear
the shoulder belt under your arm. In a
crash, your body would move too far
forward, which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the belt
would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or spleen.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It

should be worn over the shoulder at all times.

31
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted
belt. In a crash, you would not have the full
width of the belt to spread impact forces. If
a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can
work properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the

buckle. The belt should go back out of the way.

32
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out
of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can
damage both the belt and your vehicle.

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy

Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely
to be seriously injured if they do not wear
safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder

belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding, throughout the
pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it
is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt
in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,
the key to making safety belts effective is wearing
them properly.

33
Right Front Passenger Position Rear Seat Passengers
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s It is very important for rear seat passengers to
safety belt properly, see Driver Position on buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted
page 26. people in the rear seat are hurt more often in
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
same way as the driver’s safety belt — except Rear passengers who are not safety belted
for one thing. can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And
they can strike others in the vehicle who are
wearing safety belts.

If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt

the latch plate and keep pulling until you can
buckle the belt.

34
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here is how to wear one properly.

If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle,

tilt the latch plate and keep pulling until
you can buckle it.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across secure.
you. Do not let it get twisted. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt Extender on page 41.
across you very quickly. If this happens, let Make sure the release button on the buckle is
the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the belt across you more slowly. the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it
clicks.

35
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the
buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the
shoulder part.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones. And you would be less likely to slide
under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.

36
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
a crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out
of the retractor.

{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
fit against your body.

37
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides There is one guide for each outboard passenger
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide a comfort guide to the safety belt:
added safety belt comfort for older children
who have outgrown booster seats and for some
adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the
comfort guide positions the belt away from
the neck and head.

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the

edge of the seatback and the interior body
to remove the guide from its storage clip.

38
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The 3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies
elastic cord must be under the belt. Then, place flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt
the guide over the belt and insert the two edges and the guide on top.
of the belt into the slots of the guide.

39
 {CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may
not provide the protection needed in a
crash. The person wearing the belt could
be seriously injured. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are
best able to take belt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt

as described in Rear Seat Passengers on
page 34. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze
the belt edges together so that you can take
them out of the guide. Pull the guide upward to
expose its storage clip, and then slide the
guide onto the clip. Turn the guide and clip inward
and slide them in between the seatback and
the interior body, leaving only the loop of
the elastic cord exposed.

40
Safety Belt Pretensioners Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
driver and right front passenger. Although you you should use it.
cannot see them, they are located on the buckle But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer
end of the safety belts. They help the safety will order you an extender. When you go in to
belts reduce a person’s forward movement in a order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crash. the extender will be long enough for you. To
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else
in a crash, you will need to get new ones, use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to
and probably other new parts for your safety belt fit. The extender has been designed for adults.
system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,
After a Crash on page 87. just attach it to the regular safety belt. For
more information see the instruction sheet that
comes with the extender.

41
Child Restraints Q: What is the proper way to wear safety
belts?
Older Children A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt
can provide. The shoulder belt should not
cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or
even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can
strike other people who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need
to use safety belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats
should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

42
 Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder
belt, but the child is so small that the
shoulder belt is very close to the child’s
face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a
window, move the child toward the center of
the vehicle. Also see Rear Safety Belt
Comfort Guides on page 38. If the child is
sitting in the center rear seat passenger
position, move the child toward the safety belt
buckle. In either case, be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so
that in a crash the child’s upper body would
have the restraint the belts provide.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same
belt. The belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children
can be crushed together and seriously
injured. A belt must be used by only
one person at a time.

43
 {CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the
belt in this way, in a crash the child might
slide under the belt. The belt’s force
would then be applied right on the child’s
abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt

should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force
to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

44
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This {CAUTION:
includes infants and all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and size of the Children can be seriously injured or
traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state around their neck and the safety belt
in the United States and in every Canadian continues to tighten. Never leave children
province says children up to some age must be unattended in a vehicle and never allow
restrained while in a vehicle.
children to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride in

vehicles, they should have the protection provided
by appropriate restraints. Young children should
not use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,
unless there is no other choice. Instead, they need
to use a child restraint.

45
 {CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby
does not weigh much — until a crash.
During a crash a baby will become so
heavy it is not possible to hold it. For
example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. A baby should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.

46
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.

47
Q: What are the different types of add-on
child restraints? {CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic Newborn infants need complete support,
types. Selection of a particular restraint should including support for the head and neck.
take into consideration not only the child’s This is necessary because a newborn
weight, height, and age but also whether or not infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs
the restraint will be compatible with the motor so much compared with the rest of its
vehicle in which it will be used. body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing
For most basic types of child restraints, there seat settles into the restraint, so the crash
are many different models available. When forces can be distributed across the
purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is strongest part of an infant’s body, the
designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is, back and shoulders. Infants always
the restraint will have a label saying that it should be secured in appropriate infant
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. restraints.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions
that come with the restraint state the weight
and height limitations for a particular child
restraint. In addition, there are many kinds
of restraints available for children with
special needs.

48
 Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is
quite unlike that of an adult or older child,
for whom the safety belts are designed. A
young child’s hip bones are still so small
that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may
not remain low on the hip bones, as it
should. Instead, it may settle up around
the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt
would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This
alone could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Young children always should be secured An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use
in appropriate child restraints. in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’s
head rests toward the center of the vehicle.

49
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint
the seating surface against the back of the for the child’s body with the harness and also
infant. The harness system holds the infant in sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped
place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant or shelf-like shields.
positioned in the restraint.

50
 Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed
for use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat,
or position children. A built-in child restraint
system is a permanent part of the motor
vehicle. An add-on child restraint system is a
portable one, which is purchased by the
vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, an
add-on child restraint must be secured in
the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child
restraints, the child has to be secured within
the child restraint.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed When choosing an add-on child restraint, be
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt sure the child restraint is designed to be
system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label
positioner, and some high-back booster seats saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
have a five-point harness. A booster seat can also safety standards. Then follow the instructions
help a child to see out the window. for the restraint. You may find these
instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both.

51
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
in the Vehicle (LATCH) on page 55 for more information.
A child can be endangered in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.
{CAUTION: When securing an add-on child restraint, refer
to the instructions that come with the restraint
which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,
A child can be seriously injured or killed
or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
in a crash if the child restraint is not instructions are important, so if they are not
properly secured in the vehicle. Make sure available, obtain a replacement copy from the
the child restraint is properly installed manufacturer.
in the vehicle using the vehicle’s safety
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
belt or LATCH system, following the
move around in a collision or sudden stop and
instructions that came with that restraint, injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
and also the instructions in this manual. secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the
child restraint must be secured in the vehicle.
Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system.

52
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint {CAUTION:
There are several systems for securing the child
within the child restraint. One system, the A child can be seriously injured or killed
three-point harness, has straps that come down in a crash if the child is not properly
over each of the infant’s shoulders and buckle secured in the child restraint. Make sure
together at the crotch. The five-point harness the child is properly secured, following the
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, and instructions that came with that restraint.
a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against Because there are different systems, it is important
the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has to refer to the instructions that come with the
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield restraint. A child can be endangered in a crash if
that swings up or to the side. the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.

53
Where to Put the Restraint
CAUTION: (Continued)
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
Even though the passenger sensing
seat. We recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in system is designed to turn off the
a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
in a booster seat. system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate under some unusual circumstance, even
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun though it is turned off. We recommend
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the front.” This is because the risk to the
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
{CAUTION: always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can the child restraint in a rear seat.
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
because the back of the rear-facing child secure the child restraint properly.
restraint would be very close to the Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
inflating airbag. move around in a collision or sudden stop and
CAUTION: (Continued) injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
54
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints
have lower anchors and attachments or top
Children (LATCH) tether anchors and attachments.
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during Lower Anchors
driving or in a crash. This system is designed
to make installation of a child restraint easier. The
LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and
attachments on the child restraint that are made for
use with the LATCH system
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use
the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with a top
tether, you must also use either the lower anchors
or the safety belts to properly secure the child
restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor. Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each
you need a child restraint that has LATCH LATCH seating position that will accommodate a
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will child restraint with lower attachments (B).
provide you with instructions on how to use
the child restraint and its attachments. The
following explains how to attach a child restraint
with these attachments in your vehicle.

55
Top Tether Anchor Some child restraints with top tethers are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether
be attached. In the United States, some child
restraints also have a top tether. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether,
one can be obtained, in kit form, for many child
restraints. Ask the child restraint manufacturer
whether or not a kit is available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child i (Top Tether Anchor):
restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built Seating positions with
into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) top tether anchors.
on the child restraint connects to the top tether
anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward j (Lower Anchor):
movement and rotation of the child restraint Seating positions with
during driving or in a crash. two lower anchors.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)
or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top tether to
the anchor. Rear Seat

56
 To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with
lower anchors has
two labels, near the
crease between the
seatback and the seat
cushion, showing where
the anchors are located.

To assist you in locating

the top tether anchors,
the top tether anchor
symbol is located on
the trim cover.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right front

passenger’s position if a national or local law
The top tether anchors are located under the requires that the top tether be attached, or if the
trim covers on the rear seatback filler panel. instructions that come with the child restraint
Be sure to use an anchor located on the same say that the top tether must be attached. There is
side of the vehicle as the seating position no place to attach the top tether in this position.
where the child restraint will be placed.
Accident statistics show that children are safer
if they are restrained in the rear rather than
the front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint on
page 54 for additional information.

57
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System {CAUTION:
{CAUTION: Each top tether anchor and lower anchor
in the vehicle is designed to hold only
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not one child restraint. Attaching more than
attached to anchors, the restraint will not one child restraint to a single anchor
be able to protect the child correctly. In a could cause the anchor or attachment to
crash, the child could be seriously injured come loose or even break during a crash.
or killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type A child or others could be injured if this
child restraint is properly installed using happens. To help prevent injury to people
the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety and damage to your vehicle, attach only
belts to secure the restraint, following the one child restraint per anchor.
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.

58
 Folding an empty rear seat with the safety
belts secured may cause damage to the safety
{CAUTION: belt or the seat. When removing the child
restraint, always remember to return the safety
Children can be seriously injured or belts to their normal, stowed position before
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped folding the rear seat.
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Secure any unused 1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to
the lower anchors. If the child restraint does
safety belts behind the child restraint so
not have lower attachments or the desired
children cannot reach them. Pull the seating position does not have lower anchors,
shoulder belt all the way out of the secure the child restraint with the top tether
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has and the safety belts. Refer to your child
one, after the child restraint has been restraint manufacturer instructions and the
installed. Be sure to follow the instructions instructions in this manual.
of the child restraint manufacturer. 1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint or 1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’s 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
safety belt assembly may cause damage to attachments on the child restraint to the
these parts. Make sure when securing unused lower anchors.
safety belts behind the child restraint that
there is no contact between the child restraint
or the LATCH attachment parts and the
vehicle’s safety belt assembly.

59
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends If the position you are
that the top tether be attached, attach and using does not have a
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor, head restraint and
if equipped. Refer to the child restraint you are using a dual
instructions and the following steps: tether, route the
2.1. Find the top tether anchor. tether over the
seatback.
2.2. Press the ribbed area of the trim cover
to open the cover and expose the
anchor.
2.3. If you have an adjustable head restraint,
raise the head restraint. If the position you are
2.4. Route, attach and tighten the top tether using has an adjustable
according to your child restraint head restraint and you
instructions and the following are using a dual tether,
instructions: route the tether under
If the position you are the head restraint and in
using does not have a between the head
head restraint and restraint posts.
you are using a single
tether, route the
tether over the
seatback.

60
 If the position you are Be sure to follow the instructions that came with
using has an adjustable the child restraint. Secure the child in the child
head restraint and you restraint when and as the instructions say.
are using a single tether, 1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
route the tether under
the head restraint and in 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
between the head shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
restraint posts. through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in different

directions to be sure it is secure.

Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 55.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.

61
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button 4. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. to tighten the lap portion of the belt and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt.

62
 5. If your child restraint has a top tether, Securing a Child Restraint in the
attach and tighten the top tether to the
top tether anchor. Refer to the instructions Right Front Seat Position
that came with the child restraint and to Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag.
step five under Lower Anchors and Tethers A rear seat is a safer place to secure a
for Children (LATCH) on page 55. forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different Put the Restraint on page 54.
directions to be sure it is secure. In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the system. The passenger sensing system is
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
The safety belt will move freely again and be frontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infant
ready to work for an adult or larger child seat or a small child in a forward-facing child
passenger. restraint or booster seat is detected. See
Passenger Sensing System on page 79 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 194
for more information on this including important
safety information.

63
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because CAUTION: (Continued)
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
airbag deploys.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
{CAUTION: passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can system is fail-safe, and no one can
be seriously injured or killed if the right guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is under some unusual circumstance, even
because the back of the rear-facing child though it is turned off. We recommend
restraint would be very close to the that rear-facing child restraints be secured
inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is off in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
before using a rear-facing child restraint
in the passenger’s position. If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat position, move the
CAUTION: (Continued)
seat as far back as it will go before securing
the forward-facing child restraint. See Manual
Seats on page 8 or Power Seats on page 9.

64
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow
(LATCH) on page 55. the instructions that came with the child restraint.
There is no top tether anchor in the right front Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
passenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat the instructions say.
in this position if a national or local law requires 1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
that the top tether be anchored, or if the frontal airbag. See Passenger Sensing
instructions that come with the child restraint System on page 79. We recommend that
say that the top tether must be anchored. rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear
See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children seat, even if the airbag is off. If your child
(LATCH) on page 55 if your child restraint has restraint is forward-facing, move the seat as
a top tether. far back as it will go before securing the
child restraint in this seat. See Manual Seats
on page 8 or Power Seats on page 9.
When the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, the off indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator should light and stay lit
when you turn the ignition to ON or START.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 194.

65
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button

is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.

66
 6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
7. If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the
rearview mirror will be lit and stay lit when
the key is turned to ON or START.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the
child restraint.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
5. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
belt while you push down on the child seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
restraint. You may find it helpful to use your Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
knee to push down on the child restraint under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
as you tighten the belt. adjust the head restraint.

67
A thick layer of additional material such as a Airbag System
blanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers heaters or massagers, located between the Your vehicle has six airbags:
seat cushion and the child restraint or small • A frontal airbag for the driver and another
occupant, can affect how the passenger sensing frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
system operates. Remove any additional material
from the seat cushion before reinstalling/securing • A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the
the child restraint or small occupant. driver and another for the right front
passenger.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in
the child restraint in a rear seat position in • A roof-mounted side impact airbag for the
the vehicle and check with your dealer. driver and passenger directly behind the driver.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the
• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for the right
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. front passenger and the person seated directly
The safety belt will move freely again and be behind that passenger.
ready to work for an adult or larger child Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce
passenger. the risk of injury from the force of an inflating
airbag. But these airbags must inflate very quickly
to do their job and comply with federal regulations.

68
Here are the most important things to know about
the airbag system: CAUTION: (Continued)

inflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in many

{CAUTION: side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal airbags may provide
You can be severely injured or killed in a less protection in frontal crashes than
crash if you are not wearing your safety more forceful airbags have provided in
belt — even if you have airbags. Wearing the past.
your safety belt during a crash helps
Seat-mounted side impact airbags and
reduce your chance of hitting things
roof-mounted side impact airbags are
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it.
designed to inflate in moderate to severe
Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to
crashes where something hits the side of
the safety belts. All airbags are designed
your vehicle. They are not designed to
to work with safety belts but do not
inflate in frontal, in rollover or in rear
replace them.
crashes. Everyone in your vehicle should
Frontal airbags for the driver and right wear a safety belt properly — whether or
front passenger are designed to deploy not there is an airbag for that person.
in moderate to severe frontal and near
frontal crashes. They are not designed to
CAUTION: (Continued)

69
 {CAUTION: {CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
with great force, faster than the blink of an any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
eye. If you are too close to an inflating injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
airbag, as you would be if you were leaning belts offer the best protection for adults,
forward, it could seriously injure you. but not for young children and infants.
Safety belts help keep you in position for Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor
airbag inflation before and during a crash. its airbag system is designed for them.
Always wear your safety belt even with Young children and infants need the
frontal airbags. The driver should sit as far protection that a child restraint system can
back as possible while still maintaining provide. Always secure children properly
control of the vehicle. Occupants should in your vehicle. To read how, see Older
not lean on or sleep against the door. Children on page 42 or Infants and Young
Children on page 45.

70
 There is an airbag Where Are the Airbags?
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the
airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system

for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is
an electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 192 for more information.

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the

steering wheel.

71
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the The driver’s seat-mounted side impact airbag is in
instrument panel on the passenger’s side. the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.

72
The right front passenger’s seat-mounted side The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driver
impact airbag is in the side of the passenger’s and the passenger directly behind the driver is
seatback closest to the door. in the ceiling above the side windows.

73
 {CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and
an airbag, the airbag might not inflate
properly or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury or even
death. The path of an inflating airbag
must be kept clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an airbag, and
do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering. Never secure
anything to the roof of your vehicle by
routing the rope or tie-down through any
The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the front door or window opening. If you do, the
passenger and the passenger directly behind
path of an inflating airbag will be blocked.
the front passenger is in the ceiling above the side
windows. Do not let seat covers block the inflation
path of a side impact airbag. The path of
an inflating airbag must be kept clear.

74
When Should an Airbag Inflate? If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall
that does not move or deform, the threshold
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal level for the reduced deployment is about 12 to
airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to 16 mph (19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they are a full deployment is about 18 to 24 mph (29 to
designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a 38.5 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however,
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment with specific vehicle design, so that it can be
thresholds take into account a variety of desired somewhat above or below this range.
deployment and non-deployment events and are
used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash
time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the speeds. For example:
occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will or • If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the
should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the than if the vehicle hits a moving object.
direction of the impact, and how quickly your • If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
vehicle slows down. airbags could inflate at a different crash
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal speed than if the vehicle hits an object that
airbags, which adjust the restraint according does not deform.
to crash severity. Your vehicle has an electronic • If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),
frontal sensor, which helps the sensing system the airbags could inflate at a different crash
distinguish between a moderate frontal impact speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object
and a more severe frontal impact. For moderate (like a wall).
frontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a level
less than full deployment. For more severe
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,
frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle goes straight into
the object.

75
Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts. In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag
sensing system detects that the vehicle is
The side impact airbags are intended to inflate in a crash. The sensing system triggers a release
in moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact of gas from the inflator, which inflates the
airbag will inflate if the crash severity is above airbag. The inflator, airbag, and related hardware
the system’s designed “threshold level.” The are all part of the airbag modules inside the
threshold level can vary with specific vehicle steering wheel, instrument panel, the side of the
design. Side impact airbags are not intended to front seatbacks closest to the door, and the ceiling
inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers, of the vehicle, near the side windows.
or rear impacts. A side impact airbag is intended
to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In any particular crash, no one can say whether
an airbag should have inflated simply because of In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal
the damage to a vehicle or because of what collisions, even belted occupants can contact the
the repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation steering wheel or the instrument panel. In
is determined by what the vehicle hits, the moderate to severe side collisions, even belted
angle of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.
slows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts. The airbag supplements the protection provided by
For side impact airbags, inflation is determined by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of the
the location and severity of the impact. impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually.

76
But the frontal airbags would not help you in many What Will You See After an Airbag
types of collisions, including rollovers, rear
impacts, and many side impacts, primarily because Inflates?
an occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag. After the frontal and seat-mounted side impact
Side impact airbags would not help you in many airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that
types of collisions, including many frontal or some people may not even realize the airbags
near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts, inflated. Roof-mounted side impact airbags
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not are designed to deflate more slowly and may still
toward those airbags. be partially inflated minutes after the vehicle
Airbags should never be regarded as anything comes to rest. Some components of the airbag
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then module — the steering wheel hub for the driver’s
only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal airbag, the instrument panel for the right front
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s airbag, the side of the seatback
passenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderate closest to the door for seat-mounted side impact
to severe side collisions for side impact airbags. airbags, and the area along the ceiling of your
vehicle near the side windows for roof-mounted
side impact airbags — may be hot for a short time.

77
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on when
There may be some smoke and dust coming from the airbags inflate and turn on the hazard warning
the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation flashers. You can lock the doors, turn the interior
does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the lamps off, and turn the hazard warning flashers on
windshield or being able to steer the vehicle, by using the controls for those features.
nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle. In many crashes severe enough to inflate the
airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle
deformation. Additional windshield breakage may
{CAUTION: also occur from the right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.
When an airbag inflates, there may be After an airbag inflates, you will need some new
dust in the air. This dust could cause parts for the airbag system. If you do not get
breathing problems for people with a them, the airbag system will not be there to help
history of asthma or other breathing protect you in another crash. A new system will
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the include airbag modules and possibly other
vehicle should get out as soon as it is parts. The service manual for your vehicle
safe to do so. If you have breathing covers the need to replace other parts.
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle • Your vehicle has a crash sensing and
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air diagnostic module which records information
by opening a window or a door. If you after a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection
experience breathing problems following and Event Data Recorders on page 494.
an airbag deployment, you should seek • Let only qualified technicians work on the
medical attention. airbag system. Improper service can mean
that an airbag system will not work properly.
See your dealer for service.
78
Passenger Sensing System The passenger sensing system will turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for conditions. The driver’s airbags are not part of
the right front passenger position. The passenger the passenger sensing system.
airbag status indicator will be visible when you
turn your ignition key to ON or START. The words The passenger sensing system works with
ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off, will sensors that are part of the right front passenger’s
be visible on the rearview mirror during the system seat. The sensors are designed to detect the
check. When the system check is complete, presence of a properly-seated occupant and
either the word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol determine if the passenger’s frontal airbag should
for on or the symbol for off will be visible. See be enabled (may inflate) or not.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 194. Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. We recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in
a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding
in a booster seat.
United States

Canada

79
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun CAUTION: (Continued)
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
{CAUTION: detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
be seriously injured or killed if the right under some unusual circumstance, even
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is though it is turned off. We recommend
because the back of the rear-facing child that rear-facing child restraints be secured
restraint would be very close to the in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
inflating airbag. If you need to secure a forward-facing
CAUTION: (Continued) child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.

80
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn If a child restraint has been installed and the on
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if: indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied. the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the
child restraint following the child restraint
• The system determines that an infant is manufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing a
present in a rear-facing infant seat. Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position
• The system determines that a small child is on page 63.
present in a forward-facing child restraint. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
• The system determines that a small child is the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
present in a booster seat. make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
of the seat for a period of time. If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
a smaller person, such as a child who has under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
outgrown child restraints. adjust the head restraint.
• There is a critical problem with the airbag If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
system or the passenger sensing system. child restraint in a rear seat position in the
When the passenger sensing system has turned vehicle and check with your dealer.
off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator The passenger sensing system is designed to
in the rearview mirror will light and stay lit to enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s
remind you that the airbag is off. See Passenger frontal airbag anytime the system senses
Airbag Status Indicator on page 194. that a person of adult size is sitting properly
in the right front passenger’s seat. When the

81
passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag
to be enabled, the on indicator will light and
stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child
restraints and for very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag, depending upon
the person’s seating posture and body build.
Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown
child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it
could be because that person is not sitting properly
in the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle off
and ask the person to place the seatback in
the fully upright position, then sit upright in the
seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the
vehicle and have the person remain in this position
for about two minutes. This will allow the system
to detect that person and then enable the
passenger’s airbag.

82
 A thick layer of additional material such as a
blanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
{CAUTION: covers, seat heaters and seat massagers
can affect how well the passenger sensing
If the airbag readiness light in the system operates. Remove any additional material
instrument panel cluster ever comes on from the seat cushion before reinstalling or
and stays on, it means that something securing the child restraint or small occupant.
may be wrong with the airbag system. You may want to consider not using seat covers
If this ever happens, have the vehicle or other aftermarket equipment if your vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size has the passenger sensing system. See Adding
person sitting in the right front Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
on page 85 for more information about
passenger’s seat may not have the
modifications that can affect how the system
protection of the frontal airbag. See operates.
Airbag Readiness Light on page 192 for
more on this, including important safety
information.

83
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle {CAUTION:
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be
serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in For up to 10 seconds after the ignition
several places around your vehicle. You do key is turned off and the battery is
not want the system to inflate while someone is disconnected, an airbag can still inflate
working on your vehicle. Your dealer and the during improper service. You can be
service manual have information about servicing injured if you are close to an airbag when
your vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They
service manual, see Service Publications are probably part of the airbag system. Be
Ordering Information on page 501. sure to follow proper service procedures,
and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regular

maintenance.

84
Adding Equipment to Your Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle my vehicle modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my airbag system?

Q: Is there anything I might add to the front A: Changing or moving any parts of the
or sides of the vehicle that could keep the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
airbags from working properly? and diagnostic module, the inside rearview
mirror, steering wheel, ceiling headliner, ceiling
A: Yes. If you add things that change your and pillar garnish trim, or airbag wiring can
vehicle’s frame, bumper system, front affect the operation of the airbag system.
end or side sheet metal or height, they may If you have questions, call Customer
keep the airbag system from working properly. Assistance. The phone numbers and
Also, the airbag system may not work addresses for Customer Assistance are in
properly if you relocate any of the airbag Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
sensors. If you have any questions about this, Procedure in this manual. See Customer
you should contact Customer Assistance Satisfaction Procedure on page 482.
before you modify your vehicle. The phone
numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on
page 482.

85
Restraint System Check Notice: If you damage the covering for the
driver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,
or the airbag covering on the driver’s and
Checking the Restraint Systems right front passenger’s seatback, or the side
impact airbag covering on the ceiling near the
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder
side windows, the bag may not work properly.
light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,
You may have to replace the airbag module
retractors and anchorages are working properly.
in the steering wheel, both the airbag module
Look for any other loose or damaged safety
and the instrument panel for the right front
belt system parts. If you see anything that might
passenger’s airbag, the airbag module
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have
and seatback for the driver’s and right front
it repaired. Keep safety belts clean and dry.
passenger’s seat-mounted side impact airbags,
See Care of Safety Belts on page 439 for more
or side impact airbag module and ceiling
information.
covering for the roof-mounted side impact
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in airbag. Do not open or break the airbag
a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. coverings.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag
covers, and have them repaired or replaced. The
airbag system does not need regular maintenance.

86
Replacing Restraint System Parts If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.
Collision damage also may mean you will need to
After a Crash have LATCH system, safety belt or seat parts
repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may
be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system
{CAUTION: was not being used at the time of the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
A crash can damage the restraint systems system parts. See the part on the airbag system
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint earlier in this section.
system may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in serious injury If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need to
or even death in a crash. To help make replace the driver’s and right front passenger’s
sure your restraint systems are working safety belt buckle assembly. Be sure to do
properly after a crash, have them so. Then the new buckle assembly will be there to
inspected and any necessary help protect you in a collision.
replacements made as soon as possible. After a crash you may need to replace the driver
and front passenger’s safety belt buckle
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or assemblies, even if the frontal airbags have not
LATCH system parts? deployed. The driver and front passenger’s safety
belt buckle assemblies contain the safety belt
After a very minor collision, nothing may be pretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensioners
necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they checked if your vehicle has been in a collision,
would be if worn during a more severe crash, or if your airbag readiness light stays on after you
then you need new parts. start your vehicle or while you are driving. See
If the LATCH system was being used during a Airbag Readiness Light on page 192.
more severe crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.

87
✍ NOTES

88
 Section 2 Features and Controls
Keys .............................................................. 91 Starting the Engine .................................... 114
Remote Keyless Entry System .................... 92 Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 116
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation .... 93 Automatic Transmission Operation ............. 118
Doors and Locks .......................................... 96 Manual Transmission Operation ................. 122
Door Locks ................................................. 96 Parking Brake ........................................... 124
Central Door Unlocking System ................... 97 Shifting Into Park (P)
Power Door Locks ....................................... 97 (Automatic Transmission) ....................... 126
Delayed Locking .......................................... 98 Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 128
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 98 Parking Your Vehicle
Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 99 (Manual Transmission) ........................... 128
Lockout Protection ..................................... 100 Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 129
Trunk ........................................................ 100 Engine Exhaust ......................................... 130
Running the Engine While Parked ............. 131
Windows ...................................................... 103
Power Windows ........................................ 104 Mirrors ......................................................... 132
Sun Visors ................................................ 106 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® .......................................... 132
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 107 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
Theft-Deterrent System .............................. 107 with OnStar® and Compass ................... 133
Immobilizer ................................................ 109 Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 135
Immobilizer Operation ................................ 109 Outside Curb View Assist Mirror ................ 136
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 111 Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 137
New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 111 Outside Heated Mirrors ............................. 137
Ignition Positions ....................................... 112
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 114

89
 Section 2 Features and Controls
OnStar® System .......................................... 137 Storage Areas ............................................. 151
Universal Home Remote System ................ 139 Glove Box ................................................. 151
Universal Home Remote System Cupholder(s) .............................................. 151
(With Three Round LED) ....................... 139 Center Console Storage
Universal Home Remote System Area (CTS Only) .................................... 151
(With One Triangular LED) ..................... 140 Map Pocket ............................................... 151
Universal Home Remote System Roof Rack ................................................. 152
Operation (With Three Round LED) ....... 141 Convenience Net ....................................... 152
Universal Home Remote System Operation Sunroof ....................................................... 153
(With One Triangular LED) ...................... 147

90
Keys

{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many
reasons. They could operate the power
windows or other controls or even make
the vehicle move. The children or others
could be badly injured or even killed.
Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with
children.

91
 One key works all of the Remote Keyless Entry System
lock cylinders on the
vehicle. Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry
Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
Your vehicle has an Immobilizer Vehicle cause undesired operation of the device.
Theft-Deterrent System. The key has a
transponder in the key head that matches a This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
decoder in the vehicle’s steering column. If a Canada. Operation is subject to the following
replacement key or any additional key is needed, two conditions:
you must purchase it from your dealer. The 1. This device may not cause interference.
key will have PK3+ stamped on it. Keep the bar
2. This device must accept any interference
code tag that came with the original keys. Give this
received, including interference that may
tag to your dealer if you need a new key made.
cause undesired operation of the device.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your Changes or modifications to this system by other
vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle than an authorized service facility could void
to get in. Be sure you have spare keys. authorization to use this equipment.
In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside
Service®. See Roadside Service on page 488.
92
At times you may notice a decrease in operating Remote Keyless Entry System
range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry
system. If the transmitter does not work or if you Operation
have to stand closer to your vehicle for the With this feature, you can lock and unlock the
transmitter to work, try this: doors or the trunk and turn on your vehicle’s
• Check the distance. You may be too far from interior lamps from about 10 feet (3 m) away using
your vehicle. You may need to stand closer the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
during rainy or snowy weather. supplied with your vehicle.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects
may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps
Q (Lock): Press this
to the left or right, hold the transmitter symbol on the RKE
higher, and try again. transmitter to lock the
doors. This also
• Check to determine if battery replacement is arms the theft-deterrent
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” system.
under Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation on page 93.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer
or a qualified technician for service.

You can program your vehicle so that the exterior

lamps will flash and/or the horn will sound
when you lock the doors with the RKE transmitter.
See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 239
for more information on programming this feature.

93
W (Unlock): Press this symbol on the RKE Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
transmitter to unlock the driver’s door. This also Vehicle
disarms the theft-deterrent system. Press the
button again to unlock the other doors. Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a
You can program your vehicle so that the exterior transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
lamps will flash when you unlock the doors purchased through your dealer. Remember to
with the RKE transmitter. See DIC Vehicle bring any remaining transmitters with you when
Personalization on page 239 for more information you go to your dealer. When the dealer matches
on programming this feature. the replacement transmitter to your vehicle,
any remaining transmitters must also be matched.
L (Panic Alarm): The RKE transmitter has an Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter,
instant panic alarm. Press this button when the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle.
the ignition is turned off. The horn will sound and Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
the exterior lamps will flash for up to 30 seconds. transmitters matched to it.
To stop the instant panic alarm, press this
button again or turn the ignition to ON.
V (Trunk): Press and hold this button for
approximately one second to open the trunk.
The RKE transmitter can be used to recall
the memory settings for up to two drivers. For
more information, see DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 239 and Memory Seat and Mirrors on
page 11.

94
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in the RKE
transmitter should last about four years.
The battery is weak if the transmitter will not work
at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter
works, it is probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use
care not to touch any of the circuitry. Static
from your body transferred to these surfaces
may damage the transmitter.
1. Use a flat thin object to pry open the
transmitter. 3. Insert the new battery as the instructions
2. Remove the old battery, but do not use a under the cover indicate.
metal object. 4. Snap the front and the back of the transmitter
together. Make sure the cover is on tightly, so
water will not get in.
5. Press any button on the RKE transmitter to
resynchronize the transmitter.
6. Test the operation of the transmitter with the
vehicle.

95
Doors and Locks
CAUTION: (Continued)
Door Locks • Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out.
A child can be overcome by extreme
{CAUTION: heat and can suffer permanent injuries
or even death from heat stroke.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous. Always lock your vehicle whenever
• Passengers, especially children, can you leave it.
easily open the doors and fall out of a • Outsiders can easily enter through an
moving vehicle. When a door is unlocked door when you slow down
locked, the handle will not open it. or stop your vehicle. Locking your
You increase the chance of being doors can help prevent this from
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if happening.
the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the There are several ways to lock and unlock your
doors whenever you drive. vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued) Because your vehicle has the theft-deterrent
system, you must unlock the doors from the
outside with the key or Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to avoid setting off the alarm.
If the windows are down and the doors are locked,
do not reach in to manually unlock the vehicle
because you will set off the alarm.

96
 From the inside, use the Power Door Locks
manual lock levers
located on the door The power door lock
panels near the switches are located on
windows. the front doors.

Push down on the manual lock lever to lock the

door. To unlock the door, pull up on the lever.

Central Door Unlocking System

Press the bottom part of the power door lock
Your vehicle has a central door unlocking feature. switch to lock or the top of the switch to unlock all
When unlocking the driver’s door, you can the doors at once.
unlock the other doors by holding the key in the
turned position for a few seconds or by quickly The rear doors do not have power door lock
turning the key twice in the lock cylinder. switches. You must use the manual levers to lock
and unlock the rear doors when riding in the
rear seat.

97
Delayed Locking Programmable Automatic
With this feature, you can delay the actual locking Door Locks
of the doors. If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the
When the power door lock switch or the lock vehicle is programmed so that the doors will
button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) lock automatically when all doors are closed, the
transmitter is pressed when the key is not in the ignition is on, and the shift lever is moved out
ignition and the driver’s door is opened, a of PARK (P). The doors will automatically unlock
chime will sound three times indicating that when you stop the vehicle and move the shift lever
delayed locking is active. back into PARK (P).
If your vehicle has a manual transmission, the
When all the doors are closed, the doors will lock vehicle is programmed so that the doors will lock
automatically after five seconds. If a door is automatically after the vehicle speed reaches
reopened before five seconds have elapsed, the 5 mph (8 km). The doors will automatically unlock
five second timer will reset itself once all the doors when the ignition is turned off and the key is
are closed again. removed from the ignition.
You can press the door lock switch or the lock If someone needs to exit the vehicle once the doors
button on the RKE transmitter again to override are locked, have that person use the manual lever
this feature and lock the doors immediately. or power door lock switch. When the door is closed
You can turn this feature off using the Driver again, it will not lock automatically. Use the manual
Information Center (DIC). When delayed locking is lever or the power door lock switch to lock the door.
off, the doors will lock immediately when you The power door locks can be programmed
press the power door lock switch or the lock button through prompts displayed on the Driver
on the RKE transmitter. See DIC Vehicle Information Center (DIC). These prompts allow
Personalization on page 239 for more information. you to choose various lock and unlock settings.
For more information on programming, see
DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 239.

98
Rear Door Security Locks The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened
from the inside when this feature is in use.
Your vehicle has rear door security locks that
prevent passengers from opening the rear doors When you want to open a rear door when the
on your vehicle from the inside. security lock is on, do the following:
1. Unlock the door using the Remote Keyless
The rear door security Entry (RKE) transmitter, the front door power
locks are located on the lock switch or by lifting the rear door
inside edge of each manual lock.
rear door. You
2. Then open the door from the outside.
must open the rear
doors to access them. To cancel the rear door security lock, do the
following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert your key into the slot next to the
rear door security lock label and turn it
to disengage the lock.
3. Repeat the steps for the other lock.
To use these locks, do the following: The rear door locks will now work normally.
1. Insert your key into the slot next to the rear
door security lock label and turn it to engage
the lock.
2. Close the door.
3. Repeat the steps for the other rear door.

99
Lockout Protection Trunk
If you press the power door lock switch when the
key is in the ignition and any door is open, all
the doors will lock and only the driver’s door will {CAUTION:
unlock. If you close the doors, you can lock
them using the remote keyless entry transmitter. It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk
Be sure to remove the key from the ignition lid open because carbon monoxide (CO)
when locking your vehicle. gas can come into your vehicle. You
This feature can be overridden by pressing cannot see or smell CO. It can cause
the lock button on the remote keyless entry unconsciousness and even death. If you
transmitter or by pressing the power lock switch a must drive with the trunk lid open or if
second time. electrical wiring or other cable connections
must pass through the seal between the
body and the trunk lid:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select
the control setting that will force
outside air into your vehicle.
See Climate Control System.
• If you have air outlets on or under
the instrument panel, open them all
the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 130.

100
Trunk Lock Release If your vehicle has the rear seat pass-through
door, do the following:
The remote trunk
release button is located 1. Fold the rear armrest down and open the
on the lower portion pass-through door. See “Rear-Seat Pass
of the driver’s door. Through” following for more information.
2. Reach upward through the opening to locate
the emergency trunk release handle. See
“Emergency Trunk Release Handle” for more
information.
3. Pull forward on the trunk release handle to
open the trunk lid.
If your vehicle has the split folding rear seat, do
To use the remote trunk release, the shift lever
the following:
must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) for a
vehicle with an automatic transmission. The shift 1. Fold down the rear seatback. See Split
lever must be in NEUTRAL, with the parking brake Folding Rear Seat on page 18 for more
set for a vehicle with a manual transmission. information.
Press the button to open the trunk. You can also 2. Reach upward through the opening to locate
press the button with the trunk symbol on the the trunk release handle.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to open 3. Pull forward on the trunk release handle to
the trunk. open the trunk lid.
If your vehicle is ever without power, you can still
access the trunk area. Use one of the following
procedures to manually open the trunk.

101
Rear-Seat Pass Through Emergency Trunk Release Handle
If your vehicle has the rear seat-pass through
door, you can access the trunk without opening the
trunk lid. This is especially useful when
transporting long items.
To open the door, pull down the rear seat armrest.
Then pull the lever all the way down to release
the door.
To close the door, push it up and back into place.
Then try to open the door without pulling up on
the lever to make sure it is locked into place.

Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk

release handle as a tie-down or anchor point
when securing items in the trunk as it
could damage the handle. The emergency
trunk release handle is only intended to aid a
person trapped in a latched trunk, enabling
them to open the trunk from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk
release handle located on the back wall of the
trunk. This handle will glow following exposure to
light. Pull the release handle toward the front
of the vehicle to open the trunk from the inside.
102
Windows

{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets
in a vehicle with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the
windows closed in warm or hot weather.

103
Power Windows Express-Down Window
Press the down arrow on the switch to the second
The power window position to activate the express-down feature.
switches are located on To stop the window as it is lowering, press
the armrest near the down arrow on the switch again.
each window.
Express-Up Window
This feature is only on front power windows. Press
the up arrow on the switch to the second position
to activate the express-up feature. To stop the
window as it is raising, press the up arrow again.
Programming the Power Windows
If the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,
Press the up or down arrows on the switches to disconnected, or is not working, you will need
raise or lower the windows. to reprogram each front power window for
the express-up feature to work. Before
Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
reprogramming, replace or recharge your
that allows you to use the power windows for up
vehicle’s battery.
to 10 minutes once the ignition has been
turned off. For more information, see Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 114.

104
To program each window, follow these steps: Express Window Anti-Pinch Override
1. With the ignition in ACCESSORY, ON or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active,
press and hold the down arrow on the {CAUTION:
power window switch until the window has
fully opened. If express override is activated, the
2. Press the up arrow on the power window window will not reverse automatically.
switch until the window is fully closed. You or others could be injured and the
3. Continue holding the up arrow on the switch window could be damaged. Before you
for approximately two seconds after the use express override, make sure that all
window is completely closed. people and obstructions are clear of the
The window is now reprogrammed. Repeat the window path.
process for the other front window.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window
If any object is in the path of the window when the switch all the way down in the express position.
express-up is active, the window will stop at the The window will rise for as long as the switch
obstruction and automatically reverse to a is held. Once the switch is released, the express
preset factory position. Weather conditions such mode is re-activated.
as severe icing may also cause the window
In this mode, the window can still close on an
to automatically reverse. The window will return to
object in its path. Use care when using the
normal operation once the obstruction or
override mode.
condition is removed.

105
Window Lockout Sun Visors
This feature allows you to disable the passenger Swing down the primary visor to block out glare.
window switches. It can also be detached from the center mount and
moved to the side to block glare from that
The passenger window
direction.
lockout button is located
below the power The driver’s visor may also have buttons for a
window switches on the built-in garage door opener. See Universal Home
driver’s door armrest. Remote System (With Three Round LED) on
page 139 or Universal Home Remote System
(With One Triangular LED) on page 140 for more
information.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull the visor down and lift the cover to access the
Press the button to disable the passenger window mirror. A light comes on when the cover is lifted
controls. The light on the button will illuminate, and goes out when it is closed.
indicating that the feature is in use. The passenger
windows still can be raised or lowered using the
driver’s window switches when the lockout feature
is active.
To restore power to the passenger windows, press
the button again. The light on the button will go out.
You can program this feature to disable all
passenger windows or only the rear passenger
windows. See DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 239 for more information.
106
Theft-Deterrent Systems To arm the system, do the following:
1. Lock the door using the Remote Keyless
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some Entry (RKE) transmitter or the power door
cities. Although your vehicle has a number of lock switch.
theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we
put on it can make it impossible to steal. 2. Close all the doors. The security light will
come on. It should go off within approximately
30 seconds. Your security system is now
Theft-Deterrent System armed.
If your vehicle has this If a door or a trunk is opened without a key or a
feature, the security RKE transmitter, the horn will sound and the lamps
light is located on will flash for up to 30 seconds.
the instrument panel The theft-deterrent system will not arm if you lock
cluster. the doors with a key or use the manual door
lock. It activates only if you use the RKE
transmitter or the power lock on the door.
If the ignition is off and a door is open, the
security light will flash, reminding you to arm the
theft-deterrent system.

107
To avoid activating the alarm by accident do the Testing the Alarm
following:
1. Roll down the window, then get out of the
• Lock the door with the key or the manual door vehicle, keeping the door open.
lock after the doors are closed if you do not
want to arm the theft-deterrent system. 2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door
open, lock the vehicle using the power door
• Always unlock a door with a key or use the lock switch or the RKE transmitter and
RKE transmitter. Pressing the unlock button close the door. Wait approximately 30 seconds
on the RKE transmitter disables the until the security light goes off.
theft-deterrent system.
3. Reach in and unlock the door using the
Unlocking a door any other way will activate manual lock and open the door. The horn
the alarm when a door or the trunk is opened. will sound and the exterior lamps will flash.
If you activate the alarm by accident, unlock the The alarm can be turned off by unlocking the
driver’s door with your key. You can also turn driver’s door with the key, using the unlock button
off the alarm by using the unlock button on on the RKE transmitter or by starting the car
the RKE transmitter, or by starting the vehicle with with a valid key.
a valid key.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, check
to see if the horn works. The horn fuse may be
blown. To replace the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 447. If the fuse does not
need to be replaced, you may need to have your
vehicle serviced.
To reduce the possibility of theft, always arm the
theft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.

108
Immobilizer Immobilizer Operation
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Your vehicle has a
Rules. Operation is subject to the following passive theft-deterrent
two conditions: system.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
The system works when the key is turned to ON.
received, including interference that may
The key uses a transponder that matches an
cause undesired operation of the device.
immobilizer control unit in your vehicle. Only the
Changes or modifications to this system by other correct key will start the vehicle. If the key is ever
than an authorized service facility could void damaged, you may not be able to start your
authorization to use this equipment. vehicle.

109
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does To program a new key do the following:
not start and the security light comes on, the 1. Verify that the new key has PK3+
key may have a damaged transponder. Turn the stamped on it.
ignition off and try again. 2. Insert the current driver’s key in the ignition
If the engine still does not start, and the key and start the engine. If the engine will not
appears to be undamaged, try another ignition start see your dealer for service.
key. At this time, you may also want to check the 3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on OFF, and remove the key.
page 447. If the engine still does not start with the 4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to
other key, your vehicle needs service. If your ON within ten seconds of removing the
vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See previous key.
your dealer who can service the theft-deterrent
5. The security light will turn off once the key
system and have a new key made.
has been programmed. It may not be
It is possible for the theft-deterrent system decoder apparent that the security light went on due to
to learn the transponder value of a new or how quickly the key is programmed.
replacement key. Up to 10 additional keys may be
6. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 if additional
programmed for the vehicle. The following
keys are to be programmed.
procedure is for programming additional keys only.
If the security light comes on and stays on while
Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage your driving, you will be able to restart the engine if you
keys, only a GM dealer can service the turn it off. The theft-deterrent system, however,
theft-deterrent system to have new keys made. is not working properly and must be serviced
To program additional keys you will require two by your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by
current driver’s keys. You must add a step to the the theft-deterrent system at this time.
following procedure. After Step 2, repeat Steps 1
and 2 with the second current driver’s key. Then In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside
continue with Step 3. Service®. See Roadside Service on page 488.

110
Starting and Operating Your If these procedures are not followed, your
engine, axle, or other parts could be damaged.
Vehicle Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time your
New Vehicle Break-In new brake linings are not yet broken in.
Hard stops with new linings can mean
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow
elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in this break-in guideline every time you get
the long run if you follow these guidelines new linings.
for the first 500 miles (805 km):
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, Towing a Trailer on page 328 for the trailer
fast or slow. towing capabilities of your vehicle and more
• Do not exceed 70 mph (113 km/h). information.
• Do not make full-throttle starts; also refrain Following break-in, engine speed and load can
from using the full throttle while driving. be gradually increased.
Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,
the vehicle.

111
Ignition Positions A (OFF): This is the only position in which the
key can be inserted or removed. This position
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn locks the ignition and shifter on automatic
the key to four different positions. transmission vehicles, and the ignition and steering
wheel on manual transmission vehicles.
B (ACCESSORY): This position allows you to use
things like the radio and the windshield wipers
when the engine is off. This position will allow you
to turn off the engine.
C (ON): This position is for driving. If your vehicle
has an automatic transmission and you turn off
the engine, the transmission will lock. If you need
to shift the transmission out of PARK (P), the
ignition key has to be in ACCESSORY or ON.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key
in the ACCESSORY or ON position with the
engine off. You may not be able to start your
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from its vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for
cylinder could cause damage or break the an extended period of time.
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only
with your hand. Make sure the key is all the D (START): This position starts the engine.
way in. If it is and you have a manual
transmission vehicle, turn the steering wheel
left and right while you turn the key hard.
If none of this works, then your vehicle needs
service.
112
Key In the Ignition Key Release Button (Manual
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it Transmission)
is an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you
leave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle, The key cannot be
a chime will sound, when you open the driver’s removed from the
door. Always remember to remove the key ignition of a manual
from the ignition and take it with you. This will lock transmission vehicle,
the ignition and transmission. Also, always unless the key release
remember to lock the doors. button is used.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key
in the ignition while your vehicle is parked.
You may not be able to start your vehicle after it
has been parked for an extended period of time.
To remove the key, do the following:
1. Turn the key to ACCESSORY.
2. Press and release the button and then turn
the key to OFF.
Do not hold the button in while turning the key
to OFF.
3. Pull the key straight out of the ignition switch.

113
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Starting the Engine
The following accessories on your vehicle may be Automatic Transmission
used for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key
is turned from ON to OFF: Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start
• Radio
in any other position — that is a safety feature.
• Power Windows To restart when you are already moving, use
• Audio Steering Wheel Controls NEUTRAL (N) only.
(CTS, if programmed) Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if
• Sunroof your vehicle is moving. If you do, you could
damage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P)
Power to these accessories stops after 10 minutes
only when your vehicle is stopped.
or if a door is opened. If an additional 10 minutes
of power is needed, close all the doors and
turn the ignition key to ON and then back to OFF.

114
Manual Transmission prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent
starter-motor gear damage, this system
The shift lever should be in NEUTRAL and the also prevents cranking if the engine is already
parking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the running. The engine cranking can be
floor and start the engine. Your vehicle will not start stopped by turning the ignition switch to the
if the clutch pedal is not all the way down — that is ACCESSORY or OFF position.
a safety feature.
2. If your engine will not start, or starts but then
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn stops, it could be flooded with too much
your ignition key to START. Then, let go of gasoline. Try pushing your accelerator pedal
the key; the engine will start automatically. all the way to the floor and holding it there
The idle speed will go down as your engine as you turn the key to START. If the vehicle
gets warm. Do not race the engine starts briefly but then stops again, do the
immediately after starting it. Operate the same thing.
engine and transmission gently until the oil
warms up and lubricates all moving parts. Notice: Your engine is designed to work with
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled the electronics in your vehicle. If you add
Cranking System. This feature assists in electrical parts or accessories, you could
starting the engine and protects the electrical change the way the engine operates. Before
system. If the ignition key is turned to the adding electrical equipment, check with
START position, and then released when the your dealer. If you do not, your engine might
engine begins cranking, the engine will not perform properly. Any resulting damage
continue cranking until the vehicle starts or would not be covered by your vehicle’s
until it exceeds the maximum cranking warranty.
time allowed, approximately 15 seconds to

115
Engine Coolant Heater To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may have an engine coolant heater. 1. Turn off the engine.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical
the engine coolant heater can help. You will get cord. For the 2.8L V6 and the 3.6L V6
easier starting and better fuel economy during engines, the cord is located in the engine
engine warm-up. compartment on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle in front of the fuse block. For the
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a 6.0L V8 engine, the cord is located in
minimum of four hours prior to starting your the engine compartment on the driver’s side
vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of of the vehicle near the inner fender and above
the coolant heater is not required. Your vehicle the strut.
may also have an internal thermostat in the
plug end of the cord. This will prevent operation of Remove the plastic cap to access the plug.
the engine coolant heater when the temperature 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC
is at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord. outlet.

116
 4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cord as it was before to keep it
{CAUTION: away from moving engine parts. If you do
not, it could be damaged.
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded
How long should you keep the coolant heater
outlet could cause an electrical shock. plugged in? The answer depends on the outside
Also, the wrong kind of extension cord temperature, the kind of oil you have, and some
could overheat and cause a fire. You other things. Instead of trying to list everything here,
could be seriously injured. Plug the cord we ask that you contact your dealer in the area
into a properly grounded three-prong where you will be parking your vehicle. The dealer
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not can give you the best advice for that particular area.
reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

117
Automatic Transmission Operation
The shift lever is located on the center console {CAUTION:
between the front seats.
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle
There are several
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
different positions for
the shift lever. with the parking brake firmly set. Your
vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, always set your parking brake
PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels. It and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
is the best position to use when you start the
See Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic
engine because your vehicle cannot move easily.
Transmission) on page 126. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 328.

118
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does
before starting the engine. Your vehicle has an not connect with the wheels. To restart when
automatic transmission shift lock control system. you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
You must fully apply your regular brakes first You can also use NEUTRAL (N) when your
and then press the shift lever button before you vehicle is being towed.
can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in
ON. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease
pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever {CAUTION:
all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain
brake application. Then press the shift lever button Shifting into a drive gear while your
and move the shift lever into another gear. See engine is running at high speed is
Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 128.
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your the brake pedal, your vehicle could move
vehicle is moving forward could damage very rapidly. You could lose control and
the transmission. The repairs would not hit people or objects. Do not shift into a
be covered by your warranty. Shift to drive gear while your engine is running at
REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is high speed.
stopped.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or
At low vehicle speeds, you can also use NEUTRAL (N) with the engine running at high
REVERSE (R) to rock your vehicle back and forth speed may damage the transmission. The
to get out of snow, ice, or sand without damaging repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
your transmission. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck Be sure the engine is not running at high
in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 320 for speed when shifting your vehicle.
additional information.

119
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. It Driver Shift Control (DSC)
provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. If
you need more power for passing, and you are: Notice: If you drive your vehicle at high
RPMs without upshifting while using Driver
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push
Shift Control (DSC), you could damage
the accelerator pedal about halfway down.
your vehicle. Always upshift when necessary
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push while using DSC.
the accelerator all the way down.
Your automatic transmission has a Driver Shift
The transmission will shift down to a lower Control (DSC) feature that allows you to change
gear and have more power. gears similar to a manual transmission. To use the
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road DSC feature:
conditions could result in skidding, see Skidding 1. Slide the shift lever over from DRIVE (D) to
under Loss of Control on page 305 the right into the DSC area.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the The sport mode light in
vehicle in one place on a hill using only the the instrument panel
accelerator pedal may damage the cluster will come on.
transmission. If you are stuck, do not spin the
tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

120
 If you do not move the shift lever forward or The transmission will only allow you to shift into
rearward, the vehicle will be in sport mode. gears appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine
When you are in the sport mode the vehicle Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The transmission
will still shift automatically. While driving will not automatically shift to the next higher
in sport mode, the transmission may remain in gear if the engine RPM is too high.
a gear longer than it would in the normal If shifting is prevented for any reason, the currently
driving mode based on braking, throttle input, selected gear will flash multiple times, indicating
and vehicle lateral acceleration. that the transmission has not shifted gears.
2. To enter the DSC mode, press the shift lever While in the DSC mode, the transmission will
forward to upshift or rearward to downshift. automatically downshift when the vehicle comes to
The odometer on the instrument panel cluster will a stop and while quickly applying the accelerator
change from the mileage to a number indicating to increase speed. This will allow for more
the requested gear range when moving the power during take-off.
shift lever forward or rearward. See Speedometer When accelerating your vehicle from a stop in
and Odometer on page 190 for more information snowy and icy conditions, you may want to shift
on the odometer. into second gear. A higher gear ratio allows you to
While using the DSC feature, the vehicle will have gain more traction on slippery surfaces.
firmer shifting and increased performance. You
can use this for sport driving or when climbing or
descending hills, to stay in gear longer, or to
down shift for more power or engine braking.

121
Manual Transmission Operation Here is how to operate your transmission:

If your vehicle has a manual transmission, the shift FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
lever is located on the center console between FIRST (1). Then slowly let up on the clutch
the front seats. The following explains how pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
to operate the manual transmission. For the CTS, you can shift into FIRST (1) when
you are going less than 25 mph (40 km/h). If
you come to a complete stop and it is hard to shift
into FIRST (1), put the shift lever in NEUTRAL
and let up on the clutch. Press the clutch
pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
For the CTS-V, you can shift into FIRST (1) when
you are going less than 40 mph (64 km/h).
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let
up on the accelerator pedal and shift into
SECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutch
CTS CTS-V pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

These are the shift patterns for the six-speed THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5) and
manual transmissions. SIXTH (6): Shift into THIRD (3), FOURTH (4),
FIFTH (5) and SIXTH (6) the same way you do for
SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal
as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press
the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,
press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal,
and shift to NEUTRAL.
122
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or Shift Speeds (Manual Transmission)
idle your engine. Your shift lever is in NEUTRAL
when it is centered in the shift pattern, not in
any gear. {CAUTION:
REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the
clutch pedal, completely stop the vehicle, and shift If you skip a gear when you downshift,
into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal you could lose control of your vehicle.
slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal. You could injure yourself or others. Do
For the CTS, pull the shift lever quickly to the left not shift down more than one gear at a
and then forward into gear. time when you downshift.
For the CTS-V, the transmission has a safety
feature that prevents you from shifting into Notice: If you skip more than one gear when
REVERSE (R) while the vehicle is driven at you downshift, or if you race the engine
speeds greater than 3 mph (5 km/h). You will be when you release the clutch pedal while
locked out if you try to shift into REVERSE (R) downshifting, you could damage the engine,
while your vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph clutch, driveshaft or the transmission. Do
(5 km/h). If you have turned your ignition off and not skip gears or race the engine when
wish to park your vehicle in REVERSE (R), downshifting.
you will have to overcome the lockout mechanism
by moving the shift lever quickly to the right, If the vehicle speed drops below 20 mph
and immediately forward into gear using more (32 km/h), or if the engine is not running smoothly,
force than a normal shift. you should downshift to the next lower gear.
You may have to downshift two or more gears to
keep the engine running smoothly or for good
performance.

123
Skip Shift (CTS-V) This message comes on when:
• The engine coolant temperature is higher than
1r4: This message may appear in the message 169°F (76°C) and you are going 15 to 19 mph
center in the speedometer during light throttle, low (24 to 31 km/h).
speed maneuvers (15 to 19 mph (24 to 31 km/h)).
When this message appears, you can only shift • You are pressing the accelerator pedal less
from FIRST (1) to FOURTH (4) instead of then a quarter of the way down.
FIRST (1) to SECOND (2).
See One-to-Four Shift Message (CTS-V Only) on
Parking Brake
page 217 for more information.
The parking brake pedal
During the shift from FIRST (1) to FOURTH (4), is located on the lower
pull the shift lever straight back using light force on portion of the instrument
the shift lever. You must complete the shift into panel to the left of the
FOURTH (4) to turn off this feature. This helps get steering wheel.
the best possible fuel economy. The skip shift
feature is turned backed on when the vehicle is at
a complete stop and the digital speedometer
reads 0 mph (0 km/h).
Notice: Forcing the shift lever into
any gear except FOURTH (4), when the
One – to – Four Shift message comes on, To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake
may damage the transmission. Shift only pedal down with your right foot and push the
from FIRST (1) to FOURTH (4) when the parking brake pedal down with your left foot.
One – to – Four Shift message comes on.

124
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
on the instrument panel cluster should come overheat the brake system and cause
on. If it does not, you need to have your vehicle premature wear or damage to brake system
serviced. See Brake System Warning Light parts. Verify that the parking brake is fully
on page 197 for more information. released and the brake warning light is
off before driving.
A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is
set, the ignition is on, and the vehicle begins to
move. To stop the chime, fully release the parking
brake.
If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 328 for more
information.

To release the parking brake, pull the release

lever located to the left of the steering wheel on
the instrument panel.

125
Shifting Into Park (P) To shift into PARK (P), use the following steps:
(Automatic Transmission) 1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by
pressing the button on the front of the
{CAUTION: shift lever while pushing the lever all the way
toward the front of the vehicle. Release
the button.
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in 3. With your right foot still holding the brake
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly pedal down, set the parking brake with
set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left your left foot. See Parking Brake on page 124
for more information.
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. 4. Turn the key to OFF.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, 5. Remove the key from the ignition switch and
even when you are on fairly level ground, take it with you. If you can leave your vehicle
use the steps that follow. If you are with the key in your hand, the vehicle is in
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on PARK (P).
page 328.

126
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
Running (Automatic Transmission) If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift
your transmission into PARK (P) properly,
the weight of the vehicle may put too much force
{CAUTION: on the parking pawl in the transmission. You
may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To
with the engine running. Your vehicle prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
could move suddenly if the shift lever is shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
not fully in PARK (P) with the parking
PARK (P)” listed previously.
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
overheat and even catch fire. You or another vehicle push yours a little uphill to
others could be injured. Do not leave your take some of the pressure from the parking pawl
in the transmission, so you can pull the shift
vehicle with the engine running.
lever out of PARK (P).

If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine

running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)
and your parking brake is firmly set before you
leave it. After you have moved the shift lever into
PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.
Then, see if you can move the shift lever
away from PARK (P) without first pushing the
button on the shift lever. If you can, it means that
the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).

127
Shifting Out of Park (P) Parking Your Vehicle
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift (Manual Transmission)
lock control system. Before you get out of your vehicle, place the shift
To shift out of PARK (P): lever in REVERSE (R) and firmly apply the
1. Apply the regular brake pedal. parking brake. Turn the ignition key to OFF, press
the release button and remove the key. See
2. Then press the shift lever button. “Key Release Button” under Ignition Positions on
3. Move the shift lever to the desired gear. page 112 for more information.
If you are still unable to shift out of PARK (P): If you are towing a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
1. Fully release the shift lever button. page 328.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press
the shift lever button again.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired gear.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from
PARK (P), consult your dealer.

128
Parking Over Things That Burn
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot
exhaust parts under your vehicle and
ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,
dry grass, or other things that can burn.

129
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION: (Continued)

{CAUTION: • Your vehicle was damaged when

driving over high points on the road
or over road debris.
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the
• Repairs were not done correctly.
gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you
• Your vehicle or exhaust system has
cannot see or smell. It can cause
been modified improperly.
unconsciousness and death.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
You might have exhaust coming in if: your vehicle:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange • Drive it only with all the windows
or different. down to blow out any CO; and
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. • Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a
collision.
CAUTION: (Continued)

130
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if {CAUTION:
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the automatic transmission shift
{CAUTION: lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
Idling the engine with the climate control roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the
system off could allow dangerous exhaust engine is running unless you have to.
into your vehicle. See the earlier caution If you have left the engine running, the
under Engine Exhaust on page 130. vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let could be injured. To be sure your vehicle
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your will not move, even when it is on fairly
vehicle even if the climate control fan is at level ground, always set the parking brake
the highest setting. One place this can and move the automatic transmission
happen is a garage. Exhaust — with shift lever to PARK (P), or the manual
CO — can come in easily. NEVER park in transmission shift lever to NEUTRAL.
a garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will
See Winter Driving on page 316. not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic
Transmission) on page 126 and Parking Your
Vehicle (Manual Transmission) on page 128.
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 328.

131
Mirrors Passenger Airbag Indicator
The mirror may have a passenger airbag indicator
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror on the mirror glass, just above the buttons. If
the vehicle has this feature, the mirror will display
with OnStar® the word ON, or an airbag symbol in Canada,
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming when the passenger airbag is enabled. See
inside rearview mirror with OnStar® controls. For Passenger Sensing System on page 79 for more
more information about OnStar®, see OnStar® information.
System on page 137. Cleaning the Mirror
O (On/Off): The on/off button, located on the When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or
lower left side of the mirror, is used for the similar material dampened with glass cleaner.
automatic dimming functions of the rearview mirror. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror
as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
Mirror Operation the mirror housing.
The automatic dimming feature comes on each
time the vehicle is started. Automatic dimming
reduces the glare of lights from behind the vehicle.
To turn the automatic dimming feature on or off,
press and release the on/off button. The indicator
light will come on when this feature is on.

132
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror Compass Operation
with OnStar® and Compass Press the on/off button once to turn the compass
on or off.
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming
inside rearview mirror with a compass and When the ignition and the compass feature are
OnStar® controls. For more information about on, the compass will show two character boxes for
OnStar®, see OnStar® System on page 137. approximately two seconds. After two seconds,
the mirror will display the current compass
The mirror has an eight-point compass display in direction.
the upper right corner of the mirror. When on,
the compass automatically calibrates, or sets the Compass Calibration
driving direction, as the vehicle is driven. If the
vehicle has the navigation option, the direction the If after two seconds the display does not show a
vehicle is facing will be displayed on the compass direction, (N for North for example), there
navigation screen. may be a strong magnetic field interfering with
the compass. Such interference may be caused by
O (On/Off): The on/off button is located on the a magnetic antenna mount, note pad holder, or
lower left side of the mirror and is used for similar object. If the letter C appears in the
the automatic dimming and compass functions of compass window, the compass may need to be
the rearview mirror. reset or calibrated.
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle
Mirror Operation in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the
The automatic dimming feature comes on each display reads a direction.
time the vehicle is started. The compass can be calibrated by pressing and
To turn the automatic dimming feature on or off, holding the on/off button until a C is shown in
press the on/off button. The indicator light will the compass display.
illuminate when this feature is on.

133
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between
earth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.
If the mirror is not adjusted for compass
variance, the compass could give false readings.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving
the factory. It will be necessary to adjust the
compass to compensate for compass variance if
the vehicle is driven outside zone eight. Under
certain circumstances, such as a long distance,
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust the
compass variance.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance
zone number on the zone map that follows.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone
number appears on the display.
3. Once the zone number appears on the
display, press the on/off button quickly
until you reach the correct zone number.
If C appears in the compass window,
the compass may need calibration. See
“Compass Calibration” listed previously.

134
Passenger Airbag Indicator Outside Power Mirrors
The mirror may have a passenger airbag indicator
on the mirror glass, just above the buttons. The control on the
If the vehicle has this feature, the mirror will driver’s door armrest
display the word ON, or an airbag symbol operates both outside
in Canada, when the passenger airbag is enabled. rearview mirrors.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 79 for
more information.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or
similar material dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror
as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter Press the left or right mirror symbol on the
the mirror housing. selector switch to choose the driver’s side or
passenger’s side mirror. The center position turns
the control off so that the mirrors will not move
if the control pad is touched.

135
Once a mirror is selected, use the arrows on the Outside Curb View Assist Mirror
control pad to move the mirror to the correct
direction. Adjust each mirror so you can see the If the vehicle has the memory seat and mirrors,
side of your vehicle and the area behind your the passenger’s mirror can be tilted to a
vehicle. preselected position when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R). Use this outside curb
The mirrors can be manually folded inward to view assist feature to view the curb when parallel
prevent damage when going through an automatic parking.
car wash. To fold, push the mirror toward the
vehicle. To return the mirror to its original position, When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R)
push outward. Be sure to return both mirrors to and after a five-second delay, the passenger’s
their original unfolded position before driving. mirror will return to its original position.
If the vehicle has the memory package, the mirrors If further adjustment is needed after the mirror is
can be programmed for personalization and in a tilted position, the mirror controls can be used.
curb view assist. For more information, see See Outside Power Mirrors on page 135 for
Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 11 and DIC more information.
Vehicle Personalization on page 239. The outside curb view assist can be turned or off
through the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 239 for
more information.

136
Outside Convex Mirror OnStar® System

{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like
other vehicles) look farther away than
they really are. If you cut too sharply into
the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and
your right. Check your inside mirror or live advisors to provide you with a wide range
glance over your shoulder before of safety, security, information, and convenience
changing lanes. services. If your airbags deploy, the system is
designed to make an automatic call to OnStar®
Emergency where OnStar® advisors can request
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex emergency services be sent to your location.
mirror’s surface is curved so that more can be If you lock your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar®
seen from the driver’s seat. The mirror does not at 1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to
have a dimming feature. unlock your doors. If you need roadside
assistance, press the OnStar® button and they
Outside Heated Mirrors can contact Roadside Service for you.
When the rear window defogger is turned on, it
also warms both outside rearview mirrors to
help clear them of fog or ice. See “Rear Window
Defogger” under Dual Climate Control System
on page 180 for more information.

137
A complete OnStar® Owner’s Guide and the • Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
Terms and Conditions of the OnStar® Subscription • OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics
Service Agreement are included in the vehicle’s
OnStar® Subscriber Information packet located in • OnStar® Hands-Free Calling
your vehicle. For more information, visit • OnStar® Virtual Advisor
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, contact
OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), or Directions & Connections® Plan
press the OnStar® button to speak with an • All Safe & Sound Plan Services
OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
• Driving Directions
OnStar® Services • RideAssist
For new vehicles that have OnStar®, the Safe & • Information and Convenience Services
Sound Plan is included for one year from the date
of purchase. You can extend this plan beyond OnStar® Hands-Free Calling
the first year, or upgrade to the Directions & OnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows OnStar®
Connections® Plan to meet your needs. For more subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
information, press the OnStar® button to speak commands at the touch of a button. Hands-Free
with an advisor. Calling is fully integrated into the vehicle, and may
Safe & Sound Plan be used with Pre-Paid Minute Packages or
linked to a cell phone through OnStar® Shared
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment Minutes Plan. To find out more, refer to the
• Emergency Services OnStar® Owner’s Guide, visit www.onstar.com or
• Roadside Assistance www.onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar®
advisor by pressing the OnStar® button or calling
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
• AccidentAssist

138
OnStar® Virtual Advisor This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
Your vehicle may have Virtual Advisor. It is a
two conditions:
feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling that uses
your minutes to access weather, local traffic 1. This device may not cause harmful
reports, and stock quotes. By pressing the phone interference.
button and giving a few simple voice commands, 2. This device must accept any interference
you can browse through the various topics. received, including interference that may
Customize your information profile at cause undesired operation.
www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® Owner’s
guide for more information. The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization
Certificate number is KOBGTE05A.
Universal Home Remote This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
System two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
Universal Home Remote System 2. This device must accept any interference
(With Three Round LED) received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
The Universal Home Remote System provides a
way to replace up to three hand-held The Canadian Registration ID number is
Radio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used to 3521A-GTE05A.
activate devices such as garage door openers, Changes or modifications to this system by other
security systems, and home lighting. than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.

139
Universal Home Remote System This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
(With One Triangular LED) two conditions:
The Universal Home Remote System provides a 1. This device may not cause interference.
way to replace up to three hand-held 2. This device must accept any interference
radio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activate received, including interference that may
devices such as garage door openers, security cause undesired operation of the device.
systems, and home lighting.
The Canadian Registration ID number is
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC 2791021849A.
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
1. This device may not cause harmful
authorization to use this equipment.
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization
Certificate number is CB2SAHL3.

140
Universal Home Remote System This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate
Operation (With Three Round LED) devices such as garage door openers, security
systems, and home lighting.
Do not use the this system with any garage door
opener that does not have the stop and reverse
feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Read the instructions completely before attempting
to program the transmitter. Because of the steps
Your vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote involved, it may be helpful to have another
System. If there are three round Light Emitting person available to assist you in programming the
Diode (LED) above the Universal Home Remote transmitter.
System buttons, follow the instructions below. If
there is one triangular LED above the Universal
Home Remote System buttons, follow the
instructions under Universal Home Remote System
Operation (with one triangular LED).

141
Be sure to keep the original remote control
transmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as, for
future programming. You only need the original
remote control transmitter for fixed code
programming. It is also recommended that upon
the sale or lease termination of the vehicle,
the programmed buttons should be erased for
security purposes. See “Erasing your Universal
Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the
garage door or security device you are
programming. When programming a garage door,
it is advised to park outside of the garage.
If you do not know if your garage door opener is a
fixed code or rolling code device, open your
garage door opener’s remote control battery cover.
Your garage door opener is a fixed code device
if there is a panel of switches. If not, your
garage door opener is a rolling code device.

142
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
Fixed Code garage door openers are used for
garage doors produced prior to 1996. Fixed code
uses the same coded signal every time, which
is manually programmed by setting DIP switches
for a unique personal code.
To program up to three channels,
1. Remove the battery cover of the hand-held
transmitter.

Example of Switch Settings

2. Write down the eight to 12 coding switch
settings from left to right. When the switch
is in the up position, write “on,” and when a
switch is in the down position, write “off”.
If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “middle”.
3. Enter these positions into the Universal Home
Remote System as follows.
Press and release all three buttons at the same
time to put the device into programming mode.

143
 5. After entering the switch settings, press and
release all three buttons at the same time.
The indicator lights will turn on.
6. Press and hold the button you would like to
use to control the garage door until the
garage door moves. The indicator light above
the selected button should slowly blink.
You may need to hold the button from five to
55 seconds.
7. Immediately release the button when the
garage door moves. The indicator light will
blink rapidly until programming is complete.
8. Press and release the button again. The
4. The indicator light will blink slowly. In order garage door should move, confirming that
from left to right, and within two and one-half programming is successful and complete.
minutes, enter each switch setting into the
To program another device such as an additional
Universal Home Remote System. Push
garage door opener, a security device, or
one button for each switch as follows:
home lighting, repeat Steps 1–8, choosing a
• Left button = “on” switch position. different function button in Step 7 than what you
• Right button = “off” switch position. used for the garage door opener.
• Middle button = “middle” switch position.

144
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
Rolling code garage door openers are used for
garage doors produced after 1996 and are
code protected. Rolling code means the coded
signal is changed every time your remote control
garage door opener is used.
Programming a rolling code garage door opener
involves time-sensitive actions, so read the
entire procedure before you begin. If you do not
follow these actions, the device will time out
and you will have to repeat the procedure.
Follow these steps to program up to 2. Go to the garage. Locate the garage door
three channels: motor head and press and release the
1. Press the two outside buttons at the same “learn” button.
time for one to two seconds, and immediately After pressing the “learn” button, you
release them. have 10 to 30 seconds to complete Step 4
depending on your garage control unit. If you
cannot locate the “learn” button, refer to
the owners guide for your garage door opener.

145
 3. Press and hold the button you would like to Reprogramming Universal Home
use to control the garage door until the Remote Buttons
garage door moves. The indicator light, above
the selected button, should slowly blink. You can reprogram any of the three buttons by
You may need to hold the button from five to repeating the instructions.
20 seconds.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
4. Immediately release the button when the
garage door moves. The indicator light will
Buttons
blink rapidly until programming is complete. You should erase the programmed buttons when
5. Press and release the button again. The you sell the vehicle or terminate your lease.
garage door should move, confirming that To erase either rolling code or fixed code on the
programming is successful and complete. Universal Home Remote device, do the following:
To program another device such as an additional 1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at
garage door opener, a security device, or the same time for approximately 20 seconds,
home lighting, repeat Steps 1–6, choosing a until the indicator lights, located directly
different function button in Step 4 than what you above the buttons, begin to blink rapidly.
used for the garage door opener. 2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,
Using Universal Home Remote release both buttons. The codes from all
button will be erased.
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least
half of a second. The indicator light will come For additional information on Universal Home
on while the signal is being transmitted. Remote, see Customer Assistance Offices
on page 486.

146
Universal Home Remote System Read the instructions completely before attempting
to program the Universal Home Remote.
Operation (With One Triangular LED) Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to
have another person available to assist you in
the programming steps.
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in
other vehicles as well as for future Universal
Home Remote programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed Universal Home Remote buttons
Your vehicle may have the Universal Home should be erased for security purposes. See
Remote System. If there is one triangular Light “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later in
Emitting Diode (LED) above the Universal this section or, for assistance, see Customer
Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions Assistance Offices on page 486.
below. If your vehicle has three round LED above Be sure that people and objects are clear of the
the Universal Home Remote buttons, follow the garage door or gate operator you are
instructions under Universal Home Remote System programming. When programming a garage door,
Operation (With three round LED). it is advised to park outside of the garage.
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any It is recommended that a new battery be installed
garage door opener that does not have the in your hand-held transmitter for quicker and
stop and reverse feature. This includes any garage more accurate transmission of the radio-frequency
door opener model manufactured before April 1, signal.
1982. If you have a newer garage door opener
with rolling codes, please be sure to follow
Steps 6 through 8 to complete the programming of
your Universal Home Remote Transmitter.

147
Programming Universal Home Remote 4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and
then rapidly after Universal Home Remote
Follow these steps to program up to successfully receives the frequency signal
three channels: from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons.
Universal Home Remote buttons, releasing 5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal
only when the Universal Home Remote Home Remote button and observe the
indicator light begins to flash, after indicator light.
20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons for
longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat If the indicator light stays on continuously,
this step to program a second and/or programming is complete and your device
third hand-held transmitter to the remaining should activate when the Universal Home
two Universal Home Remote buttons. Remote button is pressed and released.
To program the remaining two Universal Home
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 under
about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
“Programming Universal Home Remote.”
Universal Home Remote buttons while
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of
keeping the indicator light in view.
the programmed channels.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the If the indicator light blinks rapidly for
desired Universal Home Remote button two seconds and then turns to a constant light,
and the hand-held transmitter button. Do not continue with Steps 6 through 8 following to
release the buttons until Step 4 has been complete the programming of a rolling-code
completed. equipped device, most commonly, a garage
Some entry gates and garage door openers door opener.
may require you to substitute Step 3 with
the procedure noted in “Gate Operator and
Canadian Programming” later in this section.

148
 6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener Gate Operator and Canadian
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn” Programming
or “Smart” button. This can usually be
found where the hanging antenna wire is Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
attached to the motor-head unit. signals to time out or quit after several seconds
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or of transmission. This may not be long enough
“Smart” button. The name and color of for Universal Home Remote to pick up the signal
the button may vary by manufacturer. during programming. Similarly, some U.S. gate
operators are manufactured to time out in
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8. the same manner.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
the programmed Universal Home Remote programming a gate operator or garage door
button for two seconds, then release. Repeat opener by using the “Programming Universal
the press/hold/release sequence a second Home Remote” procedures, regardless of where
time, and depending on the brand of the you live, replace Step 3 under “Programming
garage door opener, or other rolling code Universal Home Remote” with the following:
device, repeat this sequence a third time to
complete the programming. Continue to press and hold the Universal Home
Remote button while you press and release every
The Universal Home Remote should now
two seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitter
activate your rolling-code equipped device.
button until the frequency signal has been
To program the remaining two Universal successfully accepted by the Universal Home
Home Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 of Remote. The Universal Home Remote indicator
“Programming Universal Home Remote.” You do light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
not want to repeat Step 1, as this will erase Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
all previous programming from the Universal Home Universal Home Remote” to complete.
Remote buttons.

149
Using Universal Home Remote Reprogramming a Single Universal
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Home Remote Button
Remote button for at least half of a second. To program a device to Universal Home Remote
The indicator light will come on while the signal is using a Universal Home Remote button
being transmitted. previously trained, follow these steps:
Erasing Universal Home Remote 1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home
Buttons Remote button. Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
To erase programming from the three Universal
20 seconds. While still holding the Universal
Home Remote buttons do the following:
Home Remote button, proceed with Step
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons 2 under “Programming Universal Home
until the indicator light begins to flash, after Remote” shown earlier in this section.
20 seconds. Do not hold the two outside
buttons for longer than 30 seconds. For additional information on Universal Home
Remote, see Customer Assistance Offices
2. Release both buttons. on page 486.
The Universal Home Remote is now in the training
(learning) mode and can be programmed at any
time beginning with Step 2 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” shown earlier in
this section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can
be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a
Single Universal Home Remote Button” following
this section.

150
Storage Areas Center Console Storage Area
(CTS Only)
Glove Box
Your vehicle may have a center console with a
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever. storage tray, a storage compartment, a dual
Use your door key to lock or unlock it. cupholder with a removable rubber liner and an
Cupholder(s) armrest. To access the storage area, pull up
on the latch located at the front of the armrest.
There are two cupholders for the front seat
passengers. They are located in the center Map Pocket
console. The map/storage pockets are located on each
There are two cupholders located in the rear seat door as well as on the back of the front seatbacks.
center armrest. Pull the armrest down to access
the cupholders.

151
Roof Rack The vehicle has threaded nuts that are covered
with a plastic cap on the roof rails, that indicate the
mounting locations for a roof rack or luggage
carrier. Open the doors to access these locations.
{CAUTION: Remove the plastic cap before attaching a roof
rack or luggage carrier.
If you try to carry something on top of
For more information on purchasing the
your vehicle that is longer or wider than
rack/carrier as well as installation information,
the luggage carrier — like paneling, contact your dealer.
plywood, a mattress and so forth — the
wind can catch it as you drive along. This
can cause you to lose control. What you
Convenience Net
are carrying could be violently torn off, The convenience net attaches to the floor and
and this could cause you or other drivers back wall of the trunk using four anchor points
to have a collision, and of course damage which allows the net to be used two ways. It can
your vehicle. You may be able to carry be attached like a hammock or anchored to
something like this inside. But, never lay flat across the floor of the trunk. Put small
carry something longer or wider than the loads, like grocery bags, behind the net. It can help
keep them from falling over during sharp turns
luggage carrier on top of your vehicle.
or quick starts and stops.
The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store them
in the trunk as far forward as you can. When
not using the net, hook the net to the tabs securing
it to the sill plate.

152
Sunroof P (Comfort Stop): Turn the control clockwise
to this position to open the glass panel about
Your vehicle may have a power sunroof. It will three quarters of the way. The sunshade will open
operate when the ignition is turned on, or in with the glass panel, or it can be opened
ACCESSORY, or when Retained Accessory manually.
Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 114. This is called the comfort stop position. It provides
less wind noise than the full-open position.
The sunroof controls are
located on the overhead A (Full Open): Turn the control clockwise to
console. this position to open the glass panel all the
way. The sunshade will open with the glass panel,
or it can be opened manually.
I (Vent): Turn the control counterclockwise to
this position to use the vent feature. The glass
panel will tilt upward from the vehicle. The
sunshade must be opened manually.
? (Close): Turn the control to this position to
@ (Half Open): Turn the control clockwise to close the sunroof. The sunshade must be
this position to open the glass panel half way. The closed manually.
sunshade will open with the glass panel, or it
can be opened manually.

153
Anti-Pinch Feature Anti-Pinch Feature Override
If an object is in the path of the sunroof when it is A condition may exist that causes the anti-pinch
closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the feature of the sunroof to activate due to weather or
object and stop the sunroof from closing at the an obstruction. In an emergency, the anti-pinch
point of the obstruction. The sunroof will then feature can be overridden in a supervised mode.
return to the full-open or vent position. To close To override the anti-pinch feature rotate the
the sunroof once it has re-opened, turn the control sunroof control to the closed position, then press
to the closed position. the control upward and continue pressing
upward until the sunroof reaches the desired
position.
In this mode, the sunroof can still close on an
object in its path. Use care when using the
override mode.

154
 Section 3 Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 158 Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 177
Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 160 Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 178
Other Warning Devices ............................. 160 Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 179
Horn .......................................................... 160 Climate Controls ......................................... 180
Tilt Wheel .................................................. 161 Dual Climate Control System ..................... 180
Reconfigurable Steering Wheel Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 185
Controls (SWC) (CTS) ........................... 161 Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 186
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 163 Steering Wheel Climate Controls (CTS) ..... 187
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 163
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 164 Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 188
Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 164 Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 189
Windshield Wipers ..................................... 165 Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 190
Windshield Washer .................................... 166 Trip Odometers ......................................... 191
Headlamp Washer ..................................... 167 Tachometer ............................................... 191
Cruise Control ........................................... 168 Engine Speed Limiter ................................ 191
Headlamps ................................................ 172 Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 192
Wiper Activated Headlamps ....................... 172 Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 192
Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 173 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 194
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 173 Charging System Light .............................. 196
Fog Lamps ................................................ 175 Brake System Warning Light ..................... 197
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .................. 175 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 198
Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 176 Traction Control System (TCS)
Entry Lighting ............................................ 176 Warning Light ........................................ 199
Parade Dimming ........................................ 177 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Reading Lamps ......................................... 177 Light (CTS) ............................................ 200
155
 Section 3 Instrument Panel
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 200 Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 218
Tire Pressure Light (CTS-V Only) .............. 201 System Controls ........................................ 218
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 202 Status of Vehicle Systems ......................... 219
Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 206 DIC Main Menu ......................................... 224
Sport Mode Light (Automatic DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 228
Transmission/CTS) ................................. 207 DIC Vehicle Personalization ....................... 239
Security Light ............................................ 207 Audio System(s) ......................................... 258
Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 207 Setting the Time ........................................ 260
Lights On Reminder .................................. 207 Radio with CD ........................................... 260
Cruise Control Light .................................. 208 XM Radio Messages ................................. 279
Highbeam On Light ................................... 208 Navigation/Radio System ........................... 281
Fuel Gage ................................................. 208 Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 281
Message Center .......................................... 209 Audio Steering Wheel Controls (CTS) ........ 281
Message Center (CTS-V) .......................... 209 Audio Steering Wheel Controls (CTS-V) .... 282
Transmission Fluid Hot Message ............... 214 Radio Reception ........................................ 284
Hot Coolant Temperature Warning Care of Your CDs ..................................... 285
Message ................................................ 215 Care of the CD Player .............................. 285
Check Engine Oil Pressure Message ......... 215 Diversity Antenna System .......................... 286
Oil Temperature Warning Message ............ 216 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 286
Tire Pressure Warning Message ................ 216
One-to-Four Shift Message (CTS-V Only) .... 217

156
✍ NOTES

157
Instrument Panel Overview

CTS shown, CTS-V similar

158
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 185. H. Voice Recognition Button (If Equipped).
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn See Navigation System Supplement.
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 163. I. Audio Volume Knob and Source Button
C. Reconfigurable Steering Wheel Controls (CTS) (CTS Only). See Audio Steering Wheel
(If Equipped) or Message Center Controls Controls (CTS) on page 281 or Audio Steering
(CTS-V). See Reconfigurable Steering Wheel Wheel Controls (CTS-V) on page 282.
Controls (SWC) (CTS) on page 161 or J. Storage Compartment or Ashtray (If Equipped).
Message Center (CTS-V) on page 209. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter on
Steering Wheel Climate Controls (CTS). See page 179.
Steering Wheel Climate Controls (CTS) K. Transmission Shift Lever. See Automatic
on page 187. Traction Control Disable Button Transmission Operation on page 118 or Manual
(CTS-V). See Traction Control System Transmission Operation on page 122.
(TCS) (CTS) on page 295 or Traction Control
L. Accessory Power Outlet or Cigarette Lighter
System (TCS) (CTS-V) on page 297.
(If Equipped). See Accessory Power Outlet(s)
D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument on page 178 or Ashtray(s) and Cigarette
Panel Cluster on page 189. Lighter on page 179.
E. Windshield Wiper Lever. See Windshield M. Climate Control System. See Dual Climate
Wipers on page 165. Control System on page 180.
F. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard N. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 151.
Warning Flashers on page 160. Traction Control Disable Button (CTS). See
G. Audio (Base Audio System) or Audio/Navigation Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS) on
System (If Equipped). See Audio System(s) on page 295 or Traction Control System (TCS)
page 258 or Navigation/Radio System on (CTS-V) on page 297
page 281.

159
Hazard Warning Flashers Other Warning Devices
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up
They also let police know you have a problem. at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)
Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on behind your vehicle.
and off.

The hazard warning

Horn
flasher button is located Press near or on the horn symbols on your
in the center of the steering wheel pad to sound the horn.
instrument panel.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what

position your key is in, and even if the key is
not in the ignition switch.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button
again to turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your
turn signals will not work.

160
Tilt Wheel Reconfigurable Steering Wheel
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel Controls (SWC) (CTS)
before you drive. You can raise it to the highest If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to
level to give your legs more room when you customize the four steering wheel controls to work
exit and enter the vehicle. with the OnStar®, the climate controls, audio,
and traction control systems.

The controls for this

feature are located on
the left spoke of
the steering wheel.

If your vehicle has the base audio system, do the

The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel following:
is located on the left side of the steering column.
1. Access the main menu of the audio system by
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and
pressing the TUNE/SEL (SELECT) knob
pull the lever. Then move the steering wheel to a
located at the lower right of the audio system.
comfortable position and release the lever to
lock the wheel in place. 2. Scroll through the menu by turning the knob.

161
 3. When SETUP appears on the display, press 3. Press the multi-function button next to Prog
the knob once to select it. SWC located at the right of the screen.
4. Scroll through the SETUP menu by turning 4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through the
the knob. available functions.
5. When CONFIGURE SWC KEYS appears on 5. Once the function desired is highlighted, press
the display, press the knob once to select it. and hold the multi-function button next to the
6. Scroll through the buttons (1, 2, 3 or 4). Press control you want to program (1, 2, 3 or 4).
the knob to select the desired number. The buttons are located at the right of
the display.
7. Choose a new function for the control by
scrolling through the list of available functions. When a control is successfully programmed,
the function you selected will appear next
8. Once you have highlighted your choice, press to the number of the control at the right of the
the knob once to select it. display.
The control you selected is now programmed 6. Press the multi-function button next to the
with the function you selected. Back prompt to exit each menu. To program
9. Press the CLR (CLEAR) button to exit each another control, repeat the procedure.
menu. To program another control, repeat the When a control is programmed with a function,
procedure. that function cannot be used with any other control.
If your vehicle has the Navigation system, do the It becomes available again only when another
following: function is programmed to the control.
1. Press the MAIN button located to the lower
left of the display.
2. Press the multi-function button next to the
Setup prompt at the right of the display.

162
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever Turn and Lane-Change Signals
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. The lever returns automatically when
the turn is complete.

An arrow on the
instrument panel cluster
will flash in the
direction of the turn or
The lever on the left side of the steering column lane change.
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See
Turn and Lane-Change Signals on page 163.
• O Headlamps. See Headlamps on page 172. Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to
• 3 Headlamp High/Low Beam-Changer. flash to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer lane change is complete. The lever returns to its
on page 164. original position when it is released.
• Flash-To-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass on Rapid flashing of arrows when signaling for a turn
page 164. or lane change may be caused by a burned-out
signal bulb. Other driver’s will not see the signal.
• - Fog Lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 175.
Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possible
• I Cruise Control. See Cruise Control on accidents. Check the fuse and for burned-out bulbs
page 168. if the arrow fails to work when signaling a turn.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 447 for
more information.

163
Turn Signal On Chime Flash-to-Pass
If the turn signal is left on for about 1 mile (1.6 km), This feature allows you to use the high-beam
a warning chime will sound and the Turn Signal headlamps to signal the driver in front of you that
On message will appear on the Driver Information you want to pass.
Center (DIC) display. See “Turn Signal On”
under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 228 Pull and hold the turn signal/multifunction lever
for more information. toward you to use this feature. When you do this,
the following will occur:
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer • If the headlamps are off, in low-beam or in
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) mode, the
Push forward on the turn signal/multifunction high-beam headlamps will turn on. They will
lever to change the headlamps from low to high stay on as long as you hold the lever
beam. Pull the lever back and then release it there. Release the lever to turn them off.
to change from high to low beam.
• If the headlamps are in high-beam mode, they
If you turn the vehicle off with the high beams on, will switch to low beam. To return to
the high beams will be on the next time you high-beam, push the lever away from you.
start your vehicle.
This light on the
instrument panel cluster
will be on, indicating
high-beam usage.

164
Windshield Wipers 6 (Delay Adjustment): Use this band to set the
length of the delay between wipes when using the
delay feature. The closer you move the band
toward mist, the longer the delay. The windshield
wiper lever must be in delay for this feature to work.
6 (Low Speed): Put the lever in this position
for slow, steady wiping cycles.

The lever on the right side of the steering column 1 (High Speed): Put the lever in this position
operates the windshield wipers. for rapid wiping cycles.
If the windshield wipers are in use for about
7 (Mist): Pull the lever down and release it for six seconds while you are driving, the exterior
a single wiping cycle. The lever will return to its lamps will come on automatically if the exterior
original position. For more cycles, hold the lamp control is in AUTO. See Wiper Activated
lever down before releasing it. Headlamps on page 172 for more information.
9 (Off): Put the lever in this position to turn off Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper
the wipers. blades before using them. If they are frozen to the
windshield, gently loosen or thaw them. If the
& (Delay): Put the lever in this position to set a blades do become damaged, install new blades.
delay between wipes. Turn the delay adjustment For more information, see Windshield Wiper Blade
band to set the length of the delay. Replacement on page 390.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.

165
Windshield Washer If your vehicle is low on washer fluid, the Check
Washer Fluid message will appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) display. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 228.
{CAUTION:
If the headlamps are on when you wash the
In freezing weather, do not use your windshield, the headlamp washers, if the vehicle
washer until the windshield is warmed. has them, will turn on. Both the windshield and the
Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice headlamps will be washed. See “Headlamp
Washer” following for more information.
on the windshield, blocking your vision.

K (Washer Fluid): Press the button with this

symbol located at the end of the windshield washer
lever to wash the windshield. Washer fluid will
spray onto the windshield and the wipers will run
for a few cycles to clear the windshield. For
more wash cycles, press and hold the button.

166
Headlamp Washer The headlamps must be on in order to be washed.
If the headlamps are off, only the windshield will
If your vehicle has the high-intensity discharge be washed when the washer button is pressed.
(HID) headlamps, your vehicle will also have To wash the headlamps, press the washer button
headlamp washers. The headlamp washers help located at the end of the windshield wiper lever.
clear the headlamp lenses. Both the headlamps and the windshield will be
The headlamp washers washed.
are located on the See Windshield Washer on page 166 for more
inboard side of information.
the headlamp lenses.

167
Cruise Control With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of
about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without
These controls are keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can
located on the end of really help on long trips. Cruise control does not
the multifunction lever. work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you cannot drive safely at a steady speed.
So, do not use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
9 (Off): This position turns the system off.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
R (On): This position turns the system on. slippery roads. On such roads, fast
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this changes in tire traction can cause
symbol to make the vehicle resume to a previously excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
set speed or to accelerate when cruise is already control. Do not use cruise control on
active. slippery roads.
T (Set/Decrease): Press this button to set the
speed or to decrease the speed when cruise
is already active.

168
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the 3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever
Traction Control System (TCS) begins to limit and release it.
wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
disengage. See Traction Control System
(TCS) (CTS) on page 295 or Traction Control This light on the
System (TCS) (CTS-V) on page 297 and instrument panel cluster
StabiliTrak® System on page 299. When road will come on while
conditions allow you to safely use it again, cruise control is on.
you may turn the cruise control back on.

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when
you are not using cruise, you might hit a
button and go into cruise when you do not
want to. You could be startled and even
lose control. Keep the cruise control switch
off until you want to use cruise control.

1. Move the cruise control switch to on.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

169
Resuming a Set Speed Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired Control
speed and then you apply the brake. This, of There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
course, disengages the cruise control. But you do
not need to reset it. • Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the
Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or lever, then release the button and the
more, you can move the cruise control switch accelerator pedal. You will now cruise at the
briefly from on to resume/accelerate. higher speed.
You will go right back up to your chosen speed • Move the cruise switch from on to
and stay there. resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the up to the desired speed and then release
vehicle will keep going faster until you release the the switch. To increase your speed in
switch or apply the brake. So unless you want very small amounts, move the switch briefly to
to go faster, do not hold the switch at resume/accelerate. Each time you do this,
resume/accelerate. your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
faster.
If using the accelerator pedal and the set button at
end of the lever to increase cruise set speed,
the new set speed must be at least 5 mph higher
than the current speed for this method to work.
If it is not 5 mph higher, switch cruise switch
off, then on, and then reset your speed using the
set button.

170
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Using Cruise Control on Hills
Control How well your cruise control will work on hills
There are two ways to reduce your speed while depends upon your speed, load, and the
using cruise control: steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,
you may have to step on the accelerator pedal
• Press in the button at the end of the lever until to maintain your speed. When going downhill, you
the desired lower speed is reached, then may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to
release it. keep the speed reduced. Applying the brake or
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly shifting into a lower gear will take you out of cruise
press the set button. Each time you do this, control. If you need to apply the brake or shift to
you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower. a lower gear due to the grade of the downhill
slope, you may not want to use the cruise control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using feature.
Cruise Control
Ending Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your To end a cruise control session, step lightly on the
vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed brake pedal. If your vehicle has a manual
you set earlier. transmission, lightly tapping the clutch pedal will
also end a cruise control session.
Stepping on the brake or clutch pedal will only end
the current cruise control session. Move the
cruise control switch to off to completely turn off
the system.

171
Erasing Speed Memory 5 (Headlamps): Turning the control to this
position turns on the headlamps, together with the
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
previously listed lamps and lights.
the cruise control set speed memory is erased.
AUTO (Automatic): Turning the control to this
Headlamps position puts the headlamps in automatic
The exterior lamp control is located in the middle mode. AUTO mode will turn the exterior lamps on
of the turn signal/multifunction lever. See Turn and off depending upon how much light is
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 163. available outside of the vehicle.
O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the control Wiper Activated Headlamps
with this symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps. This feature activates the headlamps and parking
The exterior lamp control has the following lamps after the windshield wipers have been in
four positions: use for about six seconds. For this feature to work,
the exterior lamp control must be in AUTO.
9 (Off): Turning the control to this position turns
When the exterior lamp control is off or in the
off all lamps except the Daytime Running
parking lamp position and the windshield wiper
Lamps (DRL).
control is in any position except off, the Headlamps
; (Parking Lamps): Turning the control to this Suggested message will appear on the DIC
position turns on the parking lamps together display. See “Headlamps Suggested Message”
with the following: under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 228
for more information.
• Sidemarker Lamps
When the ignition is turned to OFF, the
• Taillamps wiper-activated headlamps will immediately turn
• License Plate Lamps off. They will also turn off if the windshield
• Instrument Panel Lights wiper control is turned off.

172
Headlamps on Reminder When DRL are on, only your front turn signal
lamps will be on. No other exterior lamps will be
A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp on. Your instrument panel cluster will not be
control is left on in either the headlamp or parking lit up either.
lamp position and the driver’s door is opened
When the exterior lamp control is in AUTO and it
with the ignition off. See Lights On Reminder on
is dark enough outside, the DRL will turn off
page 207 for additional information.
and the low-beam headlamps will turn on. When it
is bright enough outside, the low-beam headlamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) will go off, and the DRL will turn back on. If you
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
for others to see the front of your vehicle during headlamp system will come on immediately.
the day. DRL can be helpful in many different Once you leave the garage, it will take about one
driving conditions, but they can be especially minute for the automatic headlamp system to
helpful in the short periods after dawn and before change to DRL if it is light outside. During
sunset. Fully functional daytime running lamps that delay, your instrument panel cluster may not
are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada. be as bright as usual. Make sure your instrument
panel brightness lever is in the full bright position.
The DRL system will make the turn signal lamps See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 176.
come on when the following conditions are met:
• It is still daylight and the ignition is in ON or
START.
• The exterior lamp control is in off or AUTO and
the headlamps are off.
• The automatic transmission is not in PARK (P).

173
If it is dark enough outside and the exterior lamp Light Sensor
control is off, a Headlamps Suggested message
will appear on the Driver’s Information Center
(DIC) display. This message informs the driver that
turning on the exterior lamps is recommended
even though the DRL are still on. Turning
the exterior lamp control to AUTO or to the
low-beam headlamp position will turn off the DRL
and cancel the Headlamps Suggested message.
If the parking lamps or the fog lamps were
turned on instead, the DRL will still turn off and
the Headlamps Suggested message will be
displayed. You can turn it off by pressing the OK
button if you have the Navigation audio system
or the CLR (Clear) button if you have the
base audio system.
The light sensor for the DRL and AUTO headlamp
To drive your vehicle with the DRL off, turn the feature is located on top of the instrument panel.
exterior lamp control off. Then turn on the If you cover the sensor, it will prevent it from
fog lamps or parking lamps, and the DRL will turn sensing light, and the exterior lamps or the
off. The Headlamps Suggested message will Headlamps Suggested message will appear on
appear on the DIC display. This will work the DIC whenever the ignition is on.
regardless of gear position and whether or not the
parking brake is set.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the
regular headlamp system when you need it.

174
Fog Lamps Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or If the parking lamps or headlamps have been left
misty conditions. on, the exterior lamps will turn off about
The fog lamp control is located on the turn 10 minutes after the ignition is turned to OFF. This
signal/multifunction lever. protects against draining the battery in case the
headlamps or parking lamps have been left
- (Fog Lamps): The band with/or next to this on. The battery saver does not work if the
symbol is used to turn the fog lamps on and off. headlamps are turned on after the ignition is turned
to OFF.
The parking lamps must be on for the fog lamps
to work. If you need to leave the lamps on for more than
10 minutes, use the exterior lamp control to
To operate the fog lamps: turn the lamps back on.
• To turn the fog lamps on, turn the fog lamp
band on the lever up to the dot and release
it. The band will return to its original position.
• To turn the fog lamps off, turn the for
lamp band up to the dot and release it. The
band will return to its original position, and the
fog lamps will turn off. If the high-beam
headlamps are turned on, the fog lamps will
also turn off. They will turn back on again
when you switch back to low-beam
headlamps.
Some localities have laws that require the
headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

175
Instrument Panel Brightness Entry Lighting
The lever for this The entry lighting system turns on the reading and
feature is located on the dome lamps and the backlighting to the exterior
overhead console. lamp control when a door is opened or if the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter unlock
button is pressed. If activated by the (RKE),
the lighting will remain active for about 25 seconds.
The entry lighting system uses the light sensor
on the instrument panel; so it must be dark outside
in order for the lamps to turn on. The lamps turn
off about 25 seconds after the last door is
closed. They will dim to off if the ignition key is
turned to ON, or immediately turn off if the power
locks are used.
Slide the lever toward the symbol to brighten the
lights or away from it to dim them.
If you slide the lever all the way toward the
symbol past the resistance point, the interior lamps
will come on. To turn them off, slide the lever
back toward the minimum brightness setting.

176
Parade Dimming Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature prohibits dimming of the instrument Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent the
panel displays and backlighting during daylight battery from being drained, in case the underhood
hours when the key is in the ignition and the lamp, vanity mirror lamps, cargo lamps, reading
headlamps are on. This feature operates with the lamps, console, or glove box lamps are
light sensor and is fully automatic. When the light accidentally left on, or something is left plugged
sensor reads darkness outside and the parking into the accessory power outlet or cigarette lighter.
lamps are active, the instrument panel displays can If any of the accessory lamps are left on, they
be adjusted by sliding the instrument panel will automatically time-out after about 20 minutes.
brightness lever toward the symbol to brighten or To reset the battery protection, all of the above
away from the symbol to dim the lighting. lamps must be turned off or the ignition key must
be in ON.
Reading Lamps
The reading lamps are located on the overhead
console. These lamps come on automatically when
any door is opened.
For manual operation, press the button next to
each lamp to turn it on or off.
If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically
shut off 10 minutes after the ignition has been
turned off.

177
Accessory Power Outlet(s) Certain electrical accessories may not be
compatible with the accessory power outlet and
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.
auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellular If you experience a problem see your dealer for
telephone or CB radio. additional information on accessory power outlets.
There are two accessory power outlets. The front Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to
accessory power outlet is located in the ashtray your vehicle may damage it or keep other
on the instrument panel below the climate control components from working as they should.
system. The outlet will have a cigarette lighter The repairs would not be covered by your
if your vehicle has this option. Remove the warranty. Do not use equipment exceeding
cigarette lighter to access the outlet. maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
The rear accessory power outlet is located on the Check with your dealer before adding electrical
back of the center console. equipment.
To use an outlet, remove the protective cap. Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
When not in use, always cover the outlet with the cause damage not covered by your warranty.
protective cap. The accessory power outlet is Do not hang any type of accessory or
operational at all times. accessory bracket from the plug because the
power outlets are designed for accessory
Notice: If electrical devices are left plugged
power plugs only.
into a power outlet, the battery may drain
causing your vehicle not to start or damage to
the battery. This would not be covered by
the warranty. Always unplug all electrical
devices when turning off your vehicle.

178
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette The cigarette lighter is located next to the ashtray.
lighter. The vehicle does not have a cigarette lighter for
the rear seat passengers.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other
flammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it
or other smoking materials could ignite is heating will not allow the lighter to back
them and possibly damage your vehicle. Never away from the heating element when it is hot.
put flammable items in the ashtray. Damage from overheating may occur to the
lighter or heating element, or a fuse could be
Ashtray blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in
The ashtray is located under the climate control while it is heating. Do not use equipment
panel on the instrument panel. Press on the exceeding maximum amperage rating of
door to release the ashtray. 15 amperes.
To empty the ashtray, remove it from the See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 178 for
instrument panel by gripping the edges and pulling more information.
straight out. To reinstall, push the tray back into To use the lighter, press the lighter all the way in
place. and release it. It will pop back out to use once
the element has heated.

179
Climate Controls 1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable
setting between 70°F (21°C) and 80°F (27°C).
Dual Climate Control System
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature
With this system you can control the heating, setting will not cause the system to heat or
cooling and ventilation for your vehicle. cool any faster. If you set the system at
the warmest temperature setting, the system
will remain in manual mode at that temperature
and it will not go into automatic mode.
In cold weather, the system will start at
reduced fan speeds to avoid blowing cold air
into your vehicle until warmer air is available.
The system will start out blowing air at the floor
but may change modes automatically as the
vehicle warms up to maintain the chosen
temperature setting. The length of time needed
Uplevel Version Shown, Base Similar for warm up will depend on the outside
temperature and the length of time that has
Automatic Operation elapsed since your vehicle was last driven.
AUTO (Automatic): When this button is pressed 3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take
and the temperature is set, the system will from 10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the
automatically control the inside temperature, the temperature, if necessary.
air delivery mode, the air conditioning compressor,
and the fan speed. AUTO will appear on the
display.

180
You can switch from English to metric units To change the current mode, select one of the
through the Driver Information Center (DIC). If you following:
have the Base audio system, see DIC Main
Menu on page 224. If you have the Navigation Y (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
system, see “Setup Menu” in the Index of panel outlets.
the Navigation System Owner Manual.
\ (Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately
The air-conditioning system removes moisture half of the air to the instrument panel outlets,
from the air, so you may sometimes notice a small and then directs most of the remaining air to the
amount of water dripping underneath your floor outlets. In automatic operation, cooler air
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine. is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to
This is normal. the floor outlets.
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the
center of the instrument panel, near the [ (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to
windshield. For more information on the solar the floor outlets with some air directed to the
sensor, see “Sensors” later in this section. outboard outlets (for the side windows), and a little
air directed to the windshield.
Manual Operation
The mode switch can also be used to select the
yN z (Mode): Pressing the mode switch and defog mode. Information on defogging and
changing the mode cancels automatic operation defrosting can be found later in this section.
and places the system in manual mode. Press
AUTO to return to automatic operation.
yAz (Fan): Press this switch to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Pressing this switch
The outboard air outlets will always receive airflow cancels automatic operation and places the system
regardless of the mode selected. See Outlet in manual mode. Press AUTO to return to
Adjustment on page 185 to change this airflow automatic operation.
from the outboard outlets.

181
If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at QPWRR (Power/Driver’s Temperature): Press
the highest setting, the passenger compartment the PWR button located on the driver’s side of
air filter may need to be replaced. For more the climate control panel to turn the entire climate
information, see Passenger Compartment Air Filter control system on or off. Press the up or down
on page 186 and Scheduled Maintenance on arrow on the switch to increase or decrease
page 463. the automatic temperature setting.
h (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside QPWRR (Power/Passenger’s
air from coming in the vehicle. It can be used Temperature): Press the PWR button located on
to prevent outside air and odors from entering your the passenger’s side of the climate control
vehicle or to help heat or cool the air inside your panel to allow the passenger’s climate control
vehicle more quickly. Press this button to setting to be different than the driver’s. Press the
switch between recirculation and fresh air. Press up or down arrow on the switch to increase or
the auto button to have the system select the best decrease the automatic temperature setting.
air delivery mode for your temperature setting.
A/C OFF (Air Conditioning): Press this button to
Recirculation is not available in the defrost mode manually turn off the air conditioning compressor.
and will automatically turn off after 10 minutes Press AUTO to return to automatic operation
when defog is selected. or press the A/C OFF button again.
Using recirculation for long periods of time may
cause the air inside your vehicle to become too dry
or stuffy. To prevent this from happening, after
the air in your vehicle has cooled, turn the
recirculation mode off or press the auto button.

182
Sensors There is also an interior
temperature sensor
located to the right of
the steering wheel
on the instrument panel.

These sensors monitor the solar radiation and the

air inside your vehicle, they use the information
to maintain the selected temperature by adjusting
to the temperature, the fan speed, and the air
There is a solar sensor located on the instrument delivery system. The system may also supply
panel, near the windshield. cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun.
The recirculation mode will also be activated,
as necessary. Do not cover the sensors or
the automatic climate control system will not
work properly.

183
Defogging and Defrosting If there is fog on the side windows, turn the
thumbwheel on the outboard outlets to the side
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high window defog position. See Outlet Adjustment on
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window page 185 for more information.
glass. This can be minimized if the climate
control system is used properly. There are two 0 (Defrost): Pressing defrost directs most of
modes to clear fog from your windshield. Use the the air to the windshield, with some air directed to
defog mode to clear the windows of fog or the side windows. In this mode, the system will
moisture and warm the passengers. Use the automatically turn off recirculation and run
defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the air-conditioning compressor, unless the outside
the windshield more quickly. temperature is at or below freezing.
yN z (Mode): Press this button until defog This mode may also cause the fan speed and air
appears on the display. temperature to increase.

- (Defog): This mode directs the air between If there is fogging on the side windows, turn the
the windshield, floor outlets and side windows. thumbwheel on the outboard outlets to the
When this mode is selected, the system turns off side window defog position. See Outlet Adjustment
recirculation and runs the air-conditioning on page 185 for more information. Do not drive
compressor unless the outside temperature is at the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
or below freezing. If recirculation mode is selected
while in defog mode, it will be cancelled after
10 minutes.

184
Rear Window Defogger Notice: Do not try to clear frost or other
material from the inside of the front windshield
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to and rear window with a razor blade or anything
remove fog or frost from the rear window. else that is sharp. This may damage the rear
The rear window defogger will only work when the window defogger grid and affect your radio’s
ignition is in ON. ability to pick up stations clearly. The repairs
wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
= (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button
to turn the rear window defogger on or off. Be Outlet Adjustment
sure to clear as much snow from the rear window Use the knobs located in the center of each outlet
as possible. to change the direction of the airflow. Use the
The rear window defogger will turn off about thumbwheels to open or close the outlets.
10 minutes after the button is pressed, but if the
vehicle’s speed is above 30 mph (48 km/h),
j (Side Window Defog): Turn the thumbwheel
to this symbol to use the side window defog
the rear defogger will stay on continuously.
setting. The air coming through the outlets will be
If turned on again, the defogger will only run for
directed toward the side windows to clear fog.
about five minutes before turning off. The defogger
can also be turned off by pressing the button k (Open): Turn the thumbwheel to this symbol to
again or by turning off the engine. open the outlets completely and allow the
The heated outside rearview mirrors will heat to maximum amount of air to enter your vehicle. A
help clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror small amount of air will still be directed to the side
when the rear window defogger button is on. windows.
See Outside Heated Mirrors on page 137.
l (Closed): Turn the thumbwheel to this symbol
to close the outlets and minimize the amount
of air entering the vehicle.

185
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the
air inlets at the base of the windshield that
may block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the
system.
The passenger compartment air filter is located
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of underneath the hood below the windshield
objects to help circulate the air inside of wiper arm on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
your vehicle more effectively. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 342
for more information on location.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Use the procedure listed below to replace the
The passenger compartment air filter traps most of passenger compartment air filter:
the pollen from the air entering your vehicle. 1. Turn the ignition to ON with the engine off.
Like your vehicle’s engine air cleaner/filter, it needs
2. Turn on the windshield wipers and turn them
to be changed periodically. See Scheduled
off again when the wipers are straight on the
Maintenance on page 463.
windshield.
Using the climate control system without the This allows you access to the leaf screen. The
passenger air filter installed may allow water or passenger compartment air filter is located
other debris to enter the system. This could cause under the leaf screen.
a water leak or noises. Make sure to install a
new air filter after removing the old one.

186
3. Open the hood to access the engine Steering Wheel Climate
compartment. See Hood Release on page 341
for more information. Controls (CTS)
4. Remove the four screws that hold the leaf Your vehicle may have four controls that can
screen in place and lift off the screen by be programmed for use with the climate
lifting and sliding toward the center of control system.
the vehicle.
The controls are located
5. Pull out on the two tabs located on each end on the left side of the
of the filter cover. steering wheel.
6. Lift the filter cover off by pulling it straight
upward.
7. Remove the old filter and insert a new one.
Make sure the arrow on the filter is pointing
toward the passenger compartment.
See Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 476 for the correct part number
for the filter.
See Reconfigurable Steering Wheel Controls
8. Reverse Steps 1 through 6 to reinstall (SWC) (CTS) on page 161 for more information on
the cover. programming these controls.

187
Warning Lights, Gages, and Gages can indicate when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often
Indicators gages and warning lights work together to let
you know when there is a problem with your
This part describes the warning lights and gages
vehicle.
that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will
help you locate them. When one of the warning lights comes on and
stays on while you are driving, or when one of the
Warning lights and gages can signal that something
gages shows there may be a problem, check
is wrong before it becomes serious enough to
the section that tells you what to do about
cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying
it. Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and even
attention to the warning lights and gages could also
dangerous. So please get to know your warning
save you or others from injury.
lights and gages. They are a big help.
Warning lights come on when there may be or
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information
is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Center (DIC) that works along with the warning
As you will see in the details on the next few
lights and gages. See Driver Information Center
pages, some warning lights come on briefly when
(DIC) on page 218 for more information.
you start the engine just to let you know they
are working. If you are familiar with this section,
you should not be alarmed when this happens.

188
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You
will know how fast you are going, how much fuel you are using and many of the other things you will need
to know to drive safely and economically.

CTS (United States version shown, Canada similar)

189
Speedometer and Odometer

CTS-V (United States version shown, Canada similar)

The speedometer lets you see your speed in either miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
The odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or
kilometers (used in Canada).

190
If your vehicle has to have a new odometer Tachometer
installed, the new one may read the correct
mileage. This is because your vehicle’s computer This gage indicates the engine speed in
has stored the mileage in memory. Revolutions Per Minute (RPM).
While the Driver Shift Control (DSC) feature is Notice: If you operate the engine with the
active, the odometer will change to show the gear tachometer in the shaded warning area, your
range. See Automatic Transmission Operation vehicle could be damaged, and the damages
on page 118 for more information. would not be covered by your warranty. Do not
operate the engine with the tachometer in
Trip Odometers the shaded warning area.

The trip odometer can record the number of miles Engine Speed Limiter
or kilometers traveled for up to two trips.
The trip odometer is part of the Driver Information This feature prevents the engine from operating at
Center (DIC), for more information see Status too many revolutions per minute (rpm). When
of Vehicle Systems on page 219. the engine’s rpms are too high, the throttle
is closed to reduce speed. If this is not sufficient,
For vehicles that have the navigation system, see then the fuel supply to the engine will be
your Navigation System manual for more limited. When the rpms return to normal, the fuel
information. supply will return to normal. This helps prevent
damage to the engine.

191
Safety Belt Reminder Light Airbag Readiness Light
When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime There is an airbag readiness light on the
will come on for several seconds to remind instrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.
people to fasten their safety belts. The system checks the airbag’s electrical
system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there
The safety belt light will is an electrical problem. The system check
also come on and stay includes the airbag sensors, the airbag modules,
on for several the wiring and the diagnostic module. For
seconds, then it will more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
flash for several more. System on page 68.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, the chime

will not come on.

192
 This light will come on
when the ignition key is
turned to ON and it {CAUTION:
will flash for a
few seconds. If the airbag readiness light stays on after
you start your vehicle, it means the airbag
system may not be working properly. The
Then the light should go out. This means the airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in
system is ready. If it does not go out, have your a crash, or they could even inflate without
vehicle serviced right away. a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself
or others, have your vehicle serviced right
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
away if the airbag readiness light stays on
start the vehicle or comes on while you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly. after you start your vehicle.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
If there is a problem with the airbag system in
your vehicle, the Service Air Bag message
will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
display. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 228 for more information.

193
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator When the ignition key is turned to ON or START,
the passenger airbag status indicator will light
Your rearview mirror has a passenger airbag ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
status indicator. for several seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on
or off symbol to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the
passenger airbag status indicator, it means that
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled
United States (may inflate).

Canada

194
 {CAUTION: {CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have Even though the passenger sensing
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the system is designed to turn off the
right front passenger’s seat, it means that passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
the passenger sensing system has not detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag. A system is failsafe, and no one can
child in a rear-facing child restraint can be guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
seriously injured or killed if the right front under some unusual circumstance, even
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is though it is turned off. We recommend
because the back of the rear-facing child that rear-facing child restraints be secured
restraint would be very close to the in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the
seat if the airbag is turned on. airbag status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has turned off the right
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate front passenger’s frontal airbag. See Passenger
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun Sensing System on page 79 for more on this,
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat including important safety information.
in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

195
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights Charging System Light
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there
may be a problem with the lights or the passenger When you turn the key
sensing system. See your dealer for service. to ON or START, this
light will come on briefly
to show that the
{CAUTION: generator and battery
charging systems
If the off indicator and the airbag are working properly.
readiness light ever come on together, it
If this light stays on, your vehicle needs service.
means that something may be wrong with You should take your vehicle to the dealer at once.
the airbag system. If this ever happens, To save your battery until you get there, turn off
have the vehicle serviced promptly, all accessories. For more information see DIC
because an adult-size person sitting in the Warnings and Messages on page 228.
right front passenger seat may not have
the protection of the frontal airbag. See
Airbag Readiness Light on page 192.

196
Brake System Warning Light When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will also come on when you set your
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided parking brake. The light will stay on if your parking
into two parts. If one part is not working, the other brake does not release fully. If it stays on after
part can still work and stop you. For good your parking brake is fully released, it means you
braking, though, you need both parts working well. have a brake problem.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off
problem. Have your brake system inspected the road and stop carefully. You may notice
right away. that the pedal is harder to push, or the pedal may
go closer to the floor. It may take longer to
stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed
for service. See Towing Your Vehicle on
page 326.

{CAUTION:
United States Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn Your brake system may not be working
the ignition key to ON. If it does not come on then, properly if the brake system warning light
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if is on. Driving with the brake system
there is a problem. warning light on can lead to an accident.
If the light is still on after you have pulled
off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.

197
Anti-Lock Brake System If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. If the
light comes on when you are driving, stop as
Warning Light soon as possible and turn the ignition off. Then
start the engine again to reset the system. If
With the Anti-Lock the light still stays on, or comes on again while
Brake System (ABS), you are driving, your vehicle needs service. If the
the light will come regular brake system warning light is not on,
on when your engine is you still have brakes, but you do not have anti-lock
started and stay on brakes. If the regular brake system warning light
for several seconds. is also on, you do not have anti-lock brakes
This is normal. and there is a problem with your regular brakes.
If the ABS warning light comes on and stays on, See Brake System Warning Light on page 197 for
there may be a problem with the anti-lock more information.
portion of the brake system. If the brake system The ABS warning light should come on briefly
warning light is not on, you still have brakes, when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the light
but you do not have anti-lock brakes. See Brake does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
System Warning Light on page 197 for more be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
information.

198
Traction Control System (TCS) The light will also come on if you turn the traction
control system off using the TC on/off button
Warning Light located in the glove box for the CTS and on the
steering wheel for the CTS-V.
If the TC (traction
control) warning light If the TC warning light stays on or comes on while
comes on and stays on, you are driving, pull off the road as soon as
there may be a possible and stop carefully. Try resetting the
problem with the traction system by turning the ignition off then back on. If
control system. the light still stays on or comes back on again
while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.
Have the Traction Control System (TCS)
The TC warning light will come on briefly when inspected as soon as possible. See Traction
you turn the ignition to ON. If it does not come on Control System (TCS) (CTS) on page 295
then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn or Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS-V) on
you if there is a problem. page 297 for more information.

199
Engine Coolant Temperature Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Warning Light (CTS)
This gage shows the
This light will come on engine coolant
when you first start the temperature. If the gage
vehicle as a check pointer moves into
to let you know that the the shaded area, the
light is working. engine is too hot.

It will go out after a few seconds. If the light does

not come on, see your GM dealer.
If the light does not go out or if the light comes on That reading means the same thing as the
and stays on while you are driving, your vehicle warning light – the engine coolant is very hot. See
may have a problem with the cooling system. You Engine Overheating on page 360.
should stop the vehicle and turn off the engine
as soon as possible to avoid damage to the
engine. A warning chime will also sound when this
light is on.
See Engine Overheating on page 360 and
Message Center (CTS-V) on page 209 for more
information.

200
Tire Pressure Light (CTS-V Only) See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 405
for more information.
If the vehicle has the For more information on the proper tire pressure,
Tire Pressure Monitor see Loading Your Vehicle on page 321. For
System, this light more information on your tires, see Tires on
will come on if the page 392.
system detects low tire
pressure.

This light will also come on for a bulb check when

the vehicle is started.

201
Malfunction Indicator Lamp Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with
this light on, after awhile, your emission
Check Engine Light controls may not work as well, your fuel
economy may not be as good, and your engine
Your vehicle has a may not run as smoothly. This could lead to
computer which costly repairs that may not be covered by your
monitors operation of warranty.
the fuel, ignition,
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
and emission control
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
systems.
of your vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than those of the same
This system is called OBD II (On-Board Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended your vehicle’s emission controls and may
to assure that emissions are at acceptable cause this light to come on. Modifications to
levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce these systems could lead to costly repairs not
a cleaner environment. The check engine light covered by your warranty. This may also
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and result in a failure to pass a required Emission
service is required. Malfunctions often will be Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
indicated by the system before any problem is and Modifications on page 332.
apparent. This may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle. This system is also designed to
assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.

202
This light should come on, as a check to show If the Light is Flashing
you it is working, when the ignition is on and the
engine is not running. If the light does not The following may prevent more serious damage
come on, have it repaired. This light will also to your vehicle:
come on during a malfunction in one of two ways: • Reducing vehicle speed
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has • Avoiding hard accelerations
been detected. A misfire increases vehicle • Avoiding steep uphill grades
emissions and may damage the emission
control system on your vehicle. Diagnosis and • If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount
service may be required. of cargo being hauled as soon as it is
possible
• Light On Steady — An emission control
system malfunction has been detected on your If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
required. If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do
so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park
your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least
10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light
remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”
following. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps, and see your dealer for service as
soon as possible.

203
If the Light Is On Steady Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
You may be able to correct the emission system If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
malfunction by considering the following: See Gasoline Octane on page 334. Poor fuel
quality will cause your engine not to run as
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle? efficiently as designed. You may notice this as
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully stalling after start-up, stalling when you put
install the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 338. the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
The diagnostic system can determine if the acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration.
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. (These conditions may go away once the engine
A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to is warmed up.) This will be detected by the
evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips system and cause the light to turn on.
with the cap properly installed should turn the If you experience one or more of these conditions,
light off. change the fuel brand you use. It will require at
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the
water? light off.
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The If none of the above steps have made the light
condition will usually be corrected when the turn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.
electrical system dries out. A few driving trips Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
should turn the light off. diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.

204
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
Programs OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that
critical emission control systems have not been
Some state/provincial and local governments have completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
or may begin programs to inspect the emission would be considered not ready for inspection.
control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass This can happen if you have recently replaced your
this inspection could prevent you from getting a battery or if your battery has run down. The
vehicle registration. diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical
Here are some things you need to know to help emission control systems during normal driving.
your vehicle pass an inspection: This may take several days of routine driving.
If you have done this and your vehicle still does
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system
check engine light is on or not working properly. readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the vehicle
for inspection.

205
Oil Pressure Light If your vehicle has this
light, it will come on
when there is a problem
with your engine oil
{CAUTION: pressure.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is
low. If you do, your engine can become so
hot that it catches fire. You or others This light will come on when you turn your key to
ON or START. It goes off once you start the
could be burned. Check your oil as soon
engine. That is a check to be sure the light works.
as possible and have your vehicle If it does not come on, be sure to have it fixed
serviced. so it will be there to warn you if there is a problem.
When the light comes on and stays on, it means
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance that oil is not flowing through your engine properly.
may damage the engine. The repairs would You could be low on oil and you might have
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow some other system problem. See Engine Oil on
the maintenance schedule in this manual for page 346 for more information.
changing engine oil.

206
Sport Mode Light Fog Lamp Light
(Automatic Transmission/CTS)
This light will come on
This light will come on when the fog lamps are
while the sport mode is in use.
in use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps are

When you turn off the sport mode, the light will go turned off. See Fog Lamps on page 175 for more
out. If it stays on, your vehicle may need service. information.
See your dealer. See “Sport Mode” under Lights On Reminder
Automatic Transmission Operation on page 118
for more information.
This light comes on
Security Light whenever the parking
lamps are on.
For information
regarding this light, see
Theft-Deterrent
System on page 107.
See Headlamps on Reminder on page 173 for
more information.

207
Cruise Control Light Fuel Gage
This light comes on The fuel gage shows
whenever you set your approximately how
cruise control. much fuel is in the fuel
tank. It works only
when the ignition is in
the ON position.

The light will go out when the cruise control is

turned off. See Cruise Control on page 168
for more information.
If the fuel supply gets low, the Fuel Level Low
Highbeam On Light message will appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) and a single chime will sound. See
This light comes on DIC Warnings and Messages on page 228 for
whenever the more information.
high-beam headlamps
are on.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on

page 164 for more information.

208
Here are a few concerns some owners have had Message Center
about the fuel gage. All of these situations are
normal and do not indicate that anything is wrong Message Center (CTS-V)
with the fuel gage:
• At the gas station the gas pump shuts off Your vehicle may have a message center that can
before the gage reads full. display information relating to powertrain fluids,
tire pressures, vehicle dynamics, speedometer and
• The gage may change when you turn, stop odometer information, and transmission status.
quickly or accelerate quickly. It also displays warning messages. There are two
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tank different areas where message center information
than the gage indicated. For example, the gage will be displayed. One display is inside of the
may have indicated that the tank was half full, tachometer and the other is inside of the
but it actually took a little more or less than half speedometer.
the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.

209
 These are the controls Speedometer Display
for the message center.
They are located on This display will show information relating to
the left spoke of vehicle speed, odometer, and transmission status.
the steering wheel. The information displayed can be changed by
pressing (C). Pressing this button cycles the
displayed information as follows: digital
speedometer only, odometer only, speedometer
and odometer, or blank display.
When the transmission is shifted into
REVERSE (R), an R will appear in the
The outboard switch (A and B) controls the display upper right corner.
of information inside of the tachometer. The During slow speed maneuvers, the engine’s
upper button (C) on the inboard switch controls computer may command the transmission to
the display of information inside of the engage the Skip Shift feature. For more
speedometer. The lower button (D) on the inboard information see Manual Transmission Operation
switch turns the traction control on or off. See on page 122.
Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS) on page 295
or Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS-V) on
page 297 for more information.

210
Tachometer Display Oil Pressure
Press (B) to cycle through the following displays: When the oil pressure
coolant temperature, oil pressure, oil temperature, displays you will see the
transmission temperature, tire pressure, and oil pressure symbol.
lateral acceleration. Press (A) to cycle through the
displays in reverse order. If you press (A), for
about one second, the display will become blank.
Coolant Temperature
When the coolant The oil pressure displays in psi or kPa with a
temperature displays graph beneath the reading. If the graph shows the
you will see the coolant pressure in the shaded area all the way to the
temperature symbol. left, then the oil pressure is low. See Engine Oil on
page 346 and DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 228 for more information.

The temperature displays in degrees Fahrenheit or

Celsius with a graph beneath the reading. If the
graph shows the temperature in the shaded
area all the way on the right, then the coolant
temperature is hot. See Engine Overheating
on page 360 for more information.

211
Oil Temperature Transmission Temperature
When the oil When the transmission
temperature displays temperature displays
you will see the oil you will see the
temperature symbol. transmission
temperature symbol.

The temperature displays in degrees Fahrenheit or The temperature displays in degrees Fahrenheit or
Celsius with a graph beneath the reading. If the Celsius with a graph beneath the reading. If the
graph shows the temperature in the shaded graph shows the temperature in the shaded
area all the way on the right, then the oil area all the way on the right, then the transmission
temperature is hot. See Engine Oil on page 346 temperature is hot. See DIC Warnings and
for more information. Messages on page 228 and Manual Transmission
Fluid on page 355 for more information.

212
Tire Pressure Warning Messages
When the tire pressure is displayed you will see a The warning messages that are described in the
vehicle in the display. The numbers in each following text are also shown in the tachometer
corner represent the tire pressure for the display.
corresponding tire. The tire pressure will be While any warning messages are shown,
displayed in psi or kPa. pressing (A) or (B) will acknowledge the warning
If any of the tires are blinking on the vehicle in the and then display the gage relating to the message.
display, this means that the tire pressure in that For instance, if a tire is below the minimum
tire is either high or low. See Tire Pressure Monitor recommended pressure, the tire pressure warning
System on page 405 for more information. message will blink on and off (five times for a
low tire warning, continuously for a flat tire
Lateral Acceleration warning). The driver can go to the tire pressure
Lateral acceleration is a measure of how hard you display immediately by pressing either button
are taking a corner. For example, when you are on the outboard switch.
turning right you will feel your body push to the left.
This force is measured in a “g”. This gage will
display from 0.00 g to 1.2 g. The lowest reading
means there is no lateral acceleration. The highest
reading means the force the driver is feeling is
1.2 times the acceleration due to gravity.
When (B) is pressed and held while the Lateral
Acceleration display is being shown, the peak hold
values—both tick marks and numbers—will be
reset to zero.

213
Transmission Fluid Hot Message If this message appears, you may continue to drive
at a slower speed while monitoring the transmission
When you see this fluid temperature. Ideally, the transmission oil
flashing symbol, the temperature should not rise above 265°F (129°C). If
transmission fluid you regularly experience temperatures above this
temperature is high limit due to high performance operation, it is
(290°F (143°C)). recommended to use an auxiliary fluid cooler for the
transmission and differential. See your dealer for
details. If this warning is displayed during normal
vehicle operation on flat roads, your vehicle may
To acknowledge this warning, press either button need service. See your dealer for an inspection.
on the outboard switch on the left spoke of the See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 228 and
steering wheel. After you press this button, the Manual Transmission Fluid on page 355 for more
warning will redisplay every 10 minutes until the information.
temperature returns to the normal operating range.

214
Hot Coolant Temperature Warning Check Engine Oil Pressure Message
Message
Your vehicle may have
When you see this this feature. When you
flashing symbol, the see this flashing
engine coolant symbol, the engine oil
temperature is high pressure is low.
(257°F (125°C)).

To acknowledge this warning, press either button

To acknowledge this warning, press either button on the outboard switch on the left spoke of the
on the outboard switch on the left spoke of the steering wheel. After you press this button, the
steering wheel. After you press a button, this warning will redisplay every 10 minutes until the
warning will come on every 10 minutes until the pressure returns to the normal operating range. Oil
temperature returns to the normal operating range. pressure should be 20 to 80 psi (140 to 550 kPa). In
Driving aggressively or driving on long hills can certain situations such as long, extended idles on
cause the engine coolant temperature to be higher hot days, it could read as low as 6 psi (40 kPa) and
than normal. The Engine Coolant Temperature still be considered normal. It may vary with engine
Warning Light should also come on. See Engine speed, outside temperature and oil viscosity. The
Coolant Temperature Warning Light (CTS) on Oil Pressure Light shoud also come on. See Oil
page 200 for more information. If this warning is Pressure Light on page 206 for more information.
displayed during normal vehicle operation on
flat roads, your vehicle may need service.
See your dealer for an inspection.

215
Oil Temperature Warning Message Tire Pressure Warning Message
When you see this When you see this
flashing symbol, the flashing symbol, one or
engine oil temperature more of the vehicle’s
is high. tires is either under
or over-inflated.

To acknowledge this warning, press either button

on the outboard switch on the left spoke of the
steering wheel. After you press a button, the
warning will come on every 10 minutes until the
temperature returns to the normal operating range.
Driving aggressively or driving on long hills can To acknowledge this warning, press either button
cause the engine oil temperature to be higher than on the outboard switch on the left spoke of the
normal. If this warning is displayed during steering wheel. There are three levels of warning
normal vehicle operation on flat roads, your vehicle for this display:
may need service. See your dealer for an
inspection. See Engine Oil on page 346 for more 1. High Tire Pressure (above 42 psi (290 kPa))
information. 2. Low Tire Pressure (below 25 psi (170 kPa))
3. Flat Tire (below 5 psi (35 kPa))

216
For conditions 1 and 2, this warning will flash five One-to-Four Shift Message
times and the display will then show the tire
pressure gage. For condition 3, this warning will (CTS-V Only)
flash continuously until the driver acknowledges it.
In any of the three cases, the warning will This message indicates
redisplay every 10 minutes until the situation is that you can only shift
corrected. Conditions 2 and 3 will also display a from FIRST (1) to
warning light elsewhere on the cluster that will stay FOURTH (4) instead of
on after this warning is acknowledged. See Tire FIRST (1) to
Pressure Light (CTS-V Only) on page 201 for more SECOND (2).
information. Also see Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 405 for more information on tire You must complete the shift into FOURTH (4) to
pressure specifications. turn off this feature. This helps you get the
best possible fuel economy.
After shifting to FOURTH (4), you may downshift
to a lower gear if you prefer.
See Manual Transmission Operation on page 122
for more information.
Notice: Forcing the shift lever into any gear
except FOURTH (4) when the 1 TO 4 SHIFT
message comes on may damage the
transmission. Shift only from FIRST (1) to
FOURTH (4) when the light comes on.

217
Driver Information Center (DIC) System Controls
The DIC gives you the status of many of your
vehicle’s systems. It is also used to display driver
personalization features and warning/status
messages. All messages will appear on the audio
system display.
If your vehicle has the Base audio system, use the
information contained in this manual for
instructions on operating the DIC for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has the Navigation system, see
the Navigation system manual for instructions on
operating the DIC for your vehicle.

Use the following controls located on the audio

system to operate the DIC:
INFO (Information): Press the up or down arrows
on this switch, located on the right side of the
audio system, to scroll through the system status
information.
CLR (Clear): Press this button, located on the
right side of the audio system, to clear DIC
messages and to reset some DIC displays to zero.
This button is also used to exit out of a menu.

218
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 228 • MILES RANGE (KM RANGE)
and Status of Vehicle Systems on page 219 • MPG AVG (L/100 KM AVG)*
for more information.
• MPG INST (L/100 KM INST)
TUNE/SEL (Select) Knob: Turn this knob, located
in the lower right corner of the audio system, to • GAL FUEL USED (L FUEL USED)*
scroll through the menu items displayed. Press this • AVG MPH (AVG KM/H)*
knob to select the • TIMER*
menu item.
• BATTERY VOLTS
Status of Vehicle Systems • ENGINE OIL LIFE*
You can view the status of several vehicle • TRANS FLUID LIFE*
systems using the DIC. (Automatic Transmission Only)
• PSI LF TIRE (KPA LF TIRE)
Vehicle Information Menu
• PSI RF TIRE (KPA RF TIRE)
To access this menu, press the up or down arrow
on the INFO switch located to the right of the • PSI RR TIRE (KPA RR TIRE)
display. • PSI LR TIRE (KPA LR TIRE)
The following items are available when the ignition • BLANK LINE
is in ON. These items will not be available when
*These items can be reset. Each one must be
the ignition is in ACCESSORY. The tire pressure
reset individually. For a detailed description of the
menu items are only available if your vehicle
menu items and how to reset them, see “Vehicle
has the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system:
Information Menu Item Descriptions” later in
• OUTSIDE TEMP this section.
• MI TRIP A (KM TRIP A)* You can view any of these items at any time, but
• MI TRIP B (KM TRIP B)* only one item can be displayed at a time.

219
Vehicle Information Menu Item MILES RANGE (KM RANGE): If you select this
Descriptions item, the approximate number of remaining
miles or kilometers you can drive without refueling
The following paragraphs contain a more detailed is displayed. This estimate is based on the
description of each menu item: current driving conditions and will change if the
driving conditions change. For example, if you are
OUTSIDE TEMP: If you select this item, the driving in traffic making frequent stops, the
current outside temperature is displayed at the top display may read one number, but if you enter the
of the screen. It will be in either degrees freeway, the number may change even though
Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C) depending you still have the same amount of gas in the gas
upon whether the system is set for English or tank. This is because different driving conditions
metric units. If you wish to change the units, see produce different fuel economies. Generally,
DIC Main Menu on page 224. freeway driving produces better fuel economy than
MI TRIP A and B (KM TRIP A and B): For city driving.
information on the trip odometers, see Trip If your vehicle is low on fuel, the Fuel Level Low
Odometers on page 191. message will be displayed. See “Fuel Level
Low” under DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 228 for more information.

220
MPG AVG (L/100 KM AVG): If you select this AVG MPH (AVG KM/H): If you select this item,
item, the approximate average miles per the average speed of the vehicle is displayed
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per
is displayed. This number is calculated based hour (km/h). This average is calculated based on
on the number of mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the various vehicle speeds recorded since the
the last time this menu item was reset. last reset of this menu item.
To reset the MPG AVG (L/100 KM AVG), press To reset AVG MPH (AVG KM/H), press the CLR
the CLR button located to the right of the screen. button located to the right of the screen. The
The display will return to zero. display will return to zero.
MPG INST (L/100 KM INST): If you select this TIMER: If you select this item, a timing feature is
item, the current fuel economy is displayed. displayed. The timer functions like a stopwatch
This number reflects only the fuel economy that in that you can record the time it takes to
the vehicle has right now and will change travel from one point to another.
frequently as driving conditions change. Unlike
average fuel economy, this menu item cannot To turn on the timer, press the CLR button located
be reset. to the right of the screen once. The display will
read 00:00:00 TIMER ON and begin counting.
GAL FUEL USED (L FUEL USED): If you select
To turn off the timer, press the CLR button again.
this item, the number of gallons or liters of fuel
When the timer is off, the display will show the
used since the last reset of this menu item
timer value and TIMER OFF. The timing feature
is displayed.
will stop.
To reset GAL FUEL USED (L FUEL USED), press
To reset the timer, turn off the timer and then
the CLR button located to the right of the screen.
press and hold the CLR button. The display will
The display will return to zero.
return to zero.

221
BATTERY VOLTS: If you select this item, the When you reset the Change Engine Oil message by
current battery voltage is displayed. If the voltage clearing it from the display, you still must reset the
is in the normal range, the display will have engine oil life system separately. For more
OK after it. For example, the display may read information on resetting the engine oil life system,
13.2 BATTERY VOLTS OK. see “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System and
the Oil Life Indicator” under Engine Oil Life System
If there is a problem with the battery charging
on page 350. If you clear the Change Engine Oil
system, there are four possible DIC messages that
message from the display, it will not re-appear.
may be displayed. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 228 for more information. TRANS FLUID LIFE (Automatic Transmission): If
you select this item, the percentage of remaining
ENGINE OIL LIFE: If you select this item, the
transmission fluid life is displayed. If you see
percentage of remaining oil life is displayed.
99% TRANS FLUID LIFE on the display, that
If you see 99% ENGINE OIL LIFE on the display,
means that 99% of the current transmission fluid
that means that 99% of the current oil life remains.
life remains.
When the oil life is depleted, the Change Engine Oil
When the transmission fluid life is depleted, the
message will appear on the display. See your
Change Trans Fluid message will appear on the
dealer for service. In addition to the engine oil life
display. You should change the transmission fluid
system monitoring the oil life, additional
as soon as possible. Be sure to keep a written
maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance
record of the mileage and date of the fluid change
Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled
so you will have it for future reference. See
Maintenance on page 463 and Engine Oil on
Scheduled Maintenance on page 463 and
page 346 for more information.
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 474
for more information.

222
When you reset the Change Trans Fluid message RR TIRE: If you select this item, the passenger’s
by clearing it from the display, you still must reset side rear tire pressure will be displayed. If the
the transmission fluid life monitor separately. For tire pressure is low, LOW will be displayed
more information on resetting the transmission fluid with this item. The pressure can be displayed in
life monitor, see Automatic Transmission Fluid on pounds per square inch (PSI) or kilopascals (KPA).
page 353. To change the units, see DIC Main Menu on
page 224 DIC Main Menu.
LF TIRE: If you select this item, the driver’s side
front tire pressure will be displayed. If the tire LR TIRE: If you select this item, the driver’s side
pressure is low, LOW will be displayed with this rear tire pressure will be displayed. If the tire
item. The pressure can be displayed in pounds per pressure is low, LOW will be displayed with this
square inch (PSI) or kilopascals (KPA). To item. The pressure can be displayed in pounds per
change the units, see DIC Main Menu on page 224 square inch (PSI) or kilopascals (KPA). To
DIC Main Menu. change the units, see DIC Main Menu on page 224
DIC Main Menu.
RF TIRE: If you select this item, the passenger’s
side front tire pressure will be displayed. If the BLANK LINE: If you select this item, nothing is
tire pressure is low, LOW will be displayed displayed at the top of the screen.
with this item. The pressure can be displayed in
pounds per square inch (PSI) or kilopascals (KPA).
To change the units, see DIC Main Menu on
page 224 DIC Main Menu.

223
DIC Main Menu • MSG RECALL RDS MESSAGE
• AF
Accessing the DIC Main Menu
• A SEEK LOCAL/DISTANT
To access the main menu of the DIC, do the
following: • 9 (English/Metric Units)
1. Press the PWR/VOL knob to turn the • TCS
radio on. • 8 (Clock)
2. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once. • 8 / 4 (Clock/Information Display)
3. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob clockwise or • SETUP
counterclockwise to scroll through the
menu items. DIC Main Menu Item Descriptions
The DIC main menu consists of the following e BASS - MID (Midrange) - TREBLE: This
menu items: menu item allows you to adjust the levels for the
• e BASS - MID - TREBLE bass, midrange, treble, balance, and fade features
• e EQ of the audio system. For more information, see
“Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)” and “Adjusting the
• DSP (Bose® Audio System) Speakers (Balance/Fade)” under Radio with CD
• AVC (Bose® Audio System) on page 260.
• H/A e EQ (Equalizer): This menu item allows you to
• AUTOSTORE PRESETS choose among five preset equalizations for the
• CAT audio system. See “Audio Equalizer” under Radio
with CD on page 260 for more information.
• TA

224
DSP (Digital Signal Processing): If your vehicle H/A (Home/Away Preset Stations): This menu
has a Bose® Audio System, this menu item item allows you to switch back and forth between
allows you to select the DSP type that you want your home and away preset radio stations.
on the audio system. You may choose Normal, Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch between
Talk, Spacious, Rear Seat, or Driver Seat. Press home and away.
the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through these
See “Setting Preset Stations” under Radio with CD
choices. Once the desired choice is displayed,
on page 260 for more information.
turn the knob to set your DSP choice and continue
scrolling through the main menu. AUTOSTORE PRESETS: This menu item allows
See “Using DSP” under Radio with CD on you to automatically store radio stations with
page 260 for more information. the strongest signals as presets. See “Setting
Preset Stations” under Radio with CD on page 260
AVC (Automatic Volume Compensation): If for more information.
your vehicle has a Bose® Audio System, this menu
item allows you to turn the AVC feature on and CAT (Category): This menu item allows you to
off. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once to turn select radio stations based on preset categories.
AVC on and off. When AVC is on, an X will be in To turn the CAT feature on, press the TUNE/SEL
the box next to AVC on the menu. The X knob once. When CAT is on, an X will be in
disappears when AVC is off. the box next to CAT on the menu. The X
disappears when CAT is off.
See “AVC (Automatic Volume Compensation)”
under Radio with CD on page 260 for more See “Activating Category (CAT) Stations (RDS
information. and XM™)” under Radio with CD on page 260 for
more information.

225
TA (Traffic Announcement): This menu item A SEEK LOCAL/DISTANT: This feature instructs
allows you to turn the TA feature on and off. the audio system to seek only local radio
To turn the TA feature on, press the TUNE/SEL stations with the strongest signal or to seek all
knob once. When TA is on, an X will be in the box radio stations with a strong signal in a large area.
next to TA on the menu. The X disappears Use LOCAL when you are in urban areas
when TA is off. where there are several strong radio station
See “RDS Messages” under Radio with CD on signals and you want to limit the number of
page 260 for more information. stations to those with the strongest signals only.
Use DISTANT when you are in rural areas
MSG (Message) RECALL RDS (Radio Data where there are fewer radio station signals
System) MESSAGE: This menu item allows you available.
to view an RDS radio station message broadcast
To switch between LOCAL and DISTANT, press
by a radio station. To view the message, press the
the TUNE/SEL knob. Once your choice is
TUNE/SEL knob once. The message will appear
displayed, turn the knob to set your choice and
on the screen.
continue scrolling through the main menu.
See “RDS Messages” under Radio with CD on
page 260 for more information. 9 (English/Metric Units): Use this menu item
to adjust the measurement units.
AF (Alternate Frequency): This menu item
allows you to turn the AF feature on and off. To You can choose between ENGLISH UNITS and
turn on AF, press the TUNE/SEL knob once. When METRIC UNITS. To switch between the two, press
AF is on, an X will be in the box next to AF on the TUNE/SEL knob. Once your choice is
the menu. The X disappears when AF is off. displayed, turn the knob to set your choice and
continue scrolling through the main menu.
See “Activating Category (CAT) Stations (RDS
and XM™)” under Radio with CD on page 260 for
more information.

226
The measurement units that you choose will be 8 (Clock): Use this menu item to set the time on
reflected on all the vehicle system displays, the clock.
not just the DIC information. For example, the
climate control panel will display degrees Celsius See Setting the Time on page 260 for more
if you choose METRIC UNITS. information.

TCS (Traction Control System): You can enable 8 / 4 (Clock/Information Display): Use this
or disable the Traction Control System (TCS) menu item to toggle between the clock display and
using this menu item. Press the TUNE/SEL knob the XM™ Information (Song, Artist, Album), if
to switch between on and off. available.
You can also turn the TCS off using the traction See Setting the Time on page 260 and “XM™
control button located in the glove box (CTS) or on Satellite Radio Service” under Radio with CD on
the steering wheel (CTS-V), or by programming page 260 for more information.
one of the steering wheel controls (1, 2, 3, or 4) or
SETUP: When you select this menu item, the
audio system soft keys to enable/disable the
following submenu is available:
TCS. See Reconfigurable Steering Wheel Controls
(SWC) (CTS) on page 161 and “Configurable • LANGUAGE
Radio Display Keys” under Radio with CD • PERSONALIZATION
on page 260 for more information.
• CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS
When you disable the TCS, the traction control • CONFIGURE SWC (Steering Wheel
system warning light on the instrument panel Control) KEYS
cluster will come on. See Traction Control System
(TCS) Warning Light on page 199 for more
information.

227
To change the language displayed on the radio, Battery Not Charging
select LANGUAGE by pressing the TUNE/SEL
knob. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through When this message appears on the display, there
the available languages and press the knob to is a problem with the generator and battery
make your selection. If you accidentally select a charging systems. Have the electrical system
language that you did not want, ENGLISH is checked by your dealer as soon as possible.
always at the top of the language list. Battery Saver Active
For more information on the other items in the
This message appears when the system detects
SETUP menu, see DIC Vehicle Personalization on
that the battery voltage is dropping beyond a
page 239 and Reconfigurable Steering Wheel
reasonable level. The battery saver system will
Controls (SWC) (CTS) on page 161.
start reducing certain features of the vehicle which
you may be able to notice. At the point that the
DIC Warnings and Messages features are disabled, this message is displayed.
These messages will appear if there is a problem It means that the vehicle is trying to save the
detected in one of your vehicle’s systems. charge in the battery.

You must acknowledge a message to clear it from Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the
the screen for further use. To clear a message, battery to recharge.
press the CLR button. The normal battery voltage range is
Be sure to take any message that appears on the 11.5 to 15.5 volts. You can monitor battery voltage
screen seriously and remember that clearing on the DIC by pressing the INFO button until
the message will only make the message BATTERY VOLTS appears.
disappear, not the problem.

228
Battery Voltage High Battery Voltage Low
This message indicates that the electrical charging This message will appear when the electrical
system is overcharging the battery. When the system is charging less than 10 volts or if
system detects that the battery voltage is above the battery has been drained.
approximately 16 volts, this message will be If this message appears immediately after starting
displayed. the engine, it is possible that the generator can
To reduce the charging overload, use the vehicle’s still recharge the battery. The battery should
accessories. Turn on the exterior lamps and recharge while driving but may take a few hours to
radio, set the climate control on AUTO and the fan do so. Consider using an auxiliary charger to
speed on the highest setting, and turn the rear boost the battery after returning home or to a final
window defogger on. destination. Make sure you follow the
The normal battery voltage range is manufacturer’s instructions.
11.5 to 15.5 volts when the engine is running. If this message appears while driving or after
You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC starting your vehicle and stays on, have it checked
by pressing the INFO button until BATTERY by your dealer immediately to determine the
VOLTS appears. cause of this problem.
To help the generator recharge the battery quickly,
you can reduce the load on the electrical system
by turning off the accessories.
The normal battery voltage range is
11.5 to 15.5 volts. You can monitor battery voltage
on the DIC by pressing the INFO button until
BATTERY VOLTS appears.

229
Buckle Passenger If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignition is
on and the vehicle is in motion, the reminder will be
This message reminds you to buckle the repeated. If the driver’s seat belt is already buckled,
passenger’s seat belt. this message and chime will not come on.
This message will display and a chime will sound This message is an additional reminder to the
when the ignition is on, the driver’s seat belt is Safety Belt Reminder Light in the instrument panel
buckled, the passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled cluster. See Safety Belt Reminder Light on
with the passenger airbag enabled, and the vehicle page 192 for more information.
is in motion. You should have the passenger
buckle their seat belt. Change Engine Oil
The reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on, This message indicates that the life of the engine
the vehicle is in motion, the driver is buckled oil has expired and it should be changed and
and the passenger is still unbuckled, and that your vehicle is due for service. See your
the passenger airbag is enabled. If the dealer. See Engine Oil on page 346 and
passenger’s seat belt is already buckled, this Scheduled Maintenance on page 463 for more
message and chime will not come on. information.
Buckle Seat Belt When you reset the Change Engine Oil message
by clearing it from the display, you still must
This message reminds you to buckle the driver’s reset the engine oil life system separately. For
seat belt. more information on resetting the engine oil
This message will display and a chime will sound life system, see Engine Oil Life System on
when the ignition is on, the driver’s seat belt is page 350. If you clear this message from the
unbuckled, and the vehicle is in motion. You display, it will not re-appear.
should buckle your seat belt.

230
Change Trans (Transmission) Fluid Check Gas Cap
(Automatic Transmission) When this message appears on the display, the
This message indicates that the life of the gas cap has not been fully tightened. You
transmission fluid has expired and it should be should recheck the gas cap to ensure that it is on
changed. See Scheduled Maintenance on and tightened properly. See “If the Light Is On
page 463 and Recommended Fluids and Steady” under Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Lubricants on page 474 for the proper fluid and on page 202 for more information.
change intervals. Check Tire Pressure
When you reset the Change Trans Fluid message
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
by clearing it from the display, you still must
system, this message indicates that one or
reset the transmission fluid life monitor separately.
more of the vehicle’s tires are low. See Status of
For more information on resetting the transmission
Vehicle Systems on page 219 for information
fluid life monitor, see Automatic Transmission
on checking your vehicle’s tire pressures. Also,
Fluid on page 353.
see Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 405
Check Brake Fluid and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 402 for more
information.
This message will display if the ignition is in ON to
inform the driver that the brake fluid level is low. Check Washer Fluid
Have the brake system serviced by your dealer as
When this message appears on the display, it
soon as possible. See Brake System Warning
means that your vehicle is low on windshield
Light on page 197 and Brakes on page 372
washer fluid. You should refill the windshield
for more information.
washer fluid reservoir as soon as possible. See
Windshield Washer Fluid on page 370 for
more information.

231
Competitive Driving (CTS-V) Engine Coolant Hot – AC
When competitive driving mode is turned on with (Air Conditioning) Off
the TC (traction control) button, this message This message displays when the engine coolant
will be displayed on the DIC. The TC light will be becomes hotter than the normal operating
on when the competitive driving mode is on. temperature. To avoid added strain on a hot
The Traction Control System (TCS) will not engine, the air conditioning compressor is
operate while in competitive driving mode. You automatically turned off. When the coolant
should adjust your driving accordingly. See temperature returns to normal, the air conditioning
the CTS-V portion of Traction Control System compressor will turn back on. You can continue
(TCS) (CTS) on page 295 or Traction Control to drive your vehicle.
System (TCS) (CTS-V) on page 297 for more
information. If this message continues to appear, have the
system repaired by your dealer as soon as
Driver Door Ajar possible to avoid damage to the engine or
transmission.
When this message appears on the display, it
means that the driver’s door was not closed
completely. You should make sure that the driver’s
door is closed completely.

232
Engine Coolant Hot – Idle Engine Engine Power Reduced
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the This message informs you that the vehicle is
engine is overheating, severe engine damage reducing engine power to try to protect the engine
may occur. If an overheat warning appears or transmission from damage due to extreme
on the instrument panel cluster and/or operating conditions. Reduced engine power can
DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Do affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this
not increase the engine speed above normal message is on, but there is no reduction in
idling speed. See Engine Overheating on performance, proceed to your destination. The
page 360 for more information. performance may be reduced the next time
the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at
This message will appear when the engine coolant
a reduced speed while this message is on, but
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the
acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime
vehicle to idle until it cools down.
this message stays on, the vehicle should be
taken to your dealer for service as soon as
possible.

233
Fuel Level Low Left Rear Door Ajar
When this message appears on the display, it When this message appears on the display, it
means that your vehicle is low on fuel. You should means that the driver’s side rear door was
refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. A single not closed completely. You should make sure that
chime will sound when this message is displayed. the door is closed completely.
Headlamps Suggested Oil Pressure Low – Stop Engine
This message will appear when the amount of Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
available light outside the vehicle is low and engine oil pressure is low, severe engine
the exterior lamp control is off. This message damage may occur. If a low oil pressure
informs the driver that turning on the exterior lamps warning appears on the instrument panel
is recommended even though the daytime cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
running lamps (DRL) are still illuminated and it has possible. Do not drive the vehicle until the
become dark enough outside to require the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected. See
headlamps and/or other exterior lamps. Engine Oil on page 346 for more information.
This message will also appear when the Passenger Door Ajar
windshield wipers have been on for more than
six seconds and the exterior lamp control is off or When this message appears on the display, it
in the parking lamp position. means that the passenger’s side front door was
not closed completely. You should make sure that
Ice Possible the door is closed completely.
This message appears when the outside
temperature is cold enough to create icy road
conditions.

234
Right Rear Door Ajar Service Charging System
When this message appears on the display, it This message will display when a problem with
means that the passenger’s side rear door was not the charging system has been detected. Have your
closed completely. You should check to make vehicle serviced by your dealer.
sure that the door is closed completely.
Service Electrical System
Service AC (Air Conditioning) System
This message will display if an electrical problem
This message appears when the electronic has occurred within the Powertrain Control
sensors that control the air conditioning and Module (PCM) or the ignition switch. Have your
heating systems are no longer working. Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
climate control system serviced by your dealer
if you notice a drop in heating and air conditioning Service Fuel System
efficiency. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has
Service Air Bag detected a problem within the fuel system when
this message appears. Have your vehicle serviced
There is a problem with the airbag system when by your dealer.
this message appears. Have your vehicle serviced
by your dealer immediately. See Airbag Readiness Service Idle Control
Light on page 192 for more information. A problem with the idle control has occurred when
Service Brake Assist this message displays. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
This message will display when a problem with
the panic brake assist system has been detected.
Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer.

235
Service Stability System Service Theft System
®
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak , this message will This message means there is a problem with the
be displayed if there has been a problem immobilizer. See Immobilizer on page 109 for
detected with StabiliTrak®. more information. A fault has been detected in the
If this message comes on while you are driving, system, which means that the system is disabled
pull off the road as soon as possible and stop and is not protecting the vehicle. The vehicle
carefully. Try resetting the system by turning the usually restarts, however, you may want to take
ignition off and then back on. If this message your vehicle to your dealer before turning off
still stays on, or comes back on again while you the engine.
are driving, your vehicle needs service. Have Service Tire Monitor System
the StabiliTrak® system inspected by your dealer
as soon as possible. See StabiliTrak® System If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
on page 299 for more information. system, this message will appear if the TPM
system is not working properly. Have your vehicle
Service Steering System serviced at your dealer as soon as possible.
Your vehicle may have a speed variable assist See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 405
steering system. See Steering on page 300. for more information.
This message will be displayed if a problem is Service Transmission
detected with the speed variable assist steering This message will display if there is a problem
system. When this message is displayed, you may with the transmission of your vehicle. Have your
notice that the effort required to steer the vehicle vehicle serviced by your dealer.
increases or feels heavier, but you will still be able
to steer the vehicle.

236
Service Vehicle Soon Stability System Ready
This message is displayed when a non-emissions If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message will
related powertrain malfunction occurs. Have be displayed any time you turn StabiliTrak® on
your vehicle serviced by your dealer as soon as again using the TC (traction control) on/off button.
possible. See Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS) on
page 295 or Traction Control System (TCS)
Stability System Engaged (CTS-V) on page 297 for more information. When
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message will this message has been displayed, StabiliTrak®
be displayed any time StabiliTrak® is actively is ready to assist you with directional control of the
assisting you with directional control of the vehicle. vehicle, if needed.
Slippery road conditions may exist when this
message is displayed, so adjust your driving Starting Disabled – Remove Key
accordingly. This message may stay on for a few This message will appear when the vehicle
seconds after StabiliTrak® stops assisting you with theft-deterrent system detects that an improper
directional control of the vehicle. See StabiliTrak® ignition key is being used to try to start the vehicle.
System on page 299 for more information. Check the ignition key for damage. If it is
Stability System Off damaged, it may need to be replaced. If it is not
damaged, remove the key and try to start the
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message will vehicle again. If it still does not start, try another
be displayed any time you turn off StabiliTrak® ignition key or have your vehicle serviced by
using the TC (traction control) on/off button. See your dealer.
Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS) on page 295
or Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS-V) on Starting Disabled – Throttle Problem
page 297 for more information. When this message
This message appears when your vehicle’s throttle
has been displayed, StabiliTrak® is no longer
available to assist you with directional control of the system is not functioning properly. Have your
vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly. vehicle serviced by your dealer.

237
Theft Attempted Trans (Transmission) Hot – Idle Engine
This message is displayed if the content This message indicates that the transmission
theft-deterrent system has detected a break-in fluid in your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and
attempt while you were away from your vehicle. allow it to idle until the transmission cools down
or until this message is removed. See also
Top Speed – Fuel Cut Off Transmission Fluid Hot Message on page 214 for
This message will appear when the Engine more information.
Control Module (ECM) detects that the maximum Trunk Open
speed for your vehicle has been reached. Your
vehicle’s top speed is based on the top speed When this message appears on the display, it
rating of the tires. This ensures that your vehicle means that the trunk lid of your vehicle was not
stays in a safe operating range for the tires. closed completely. You should make sure that the
trunk lid is closed completely.
Traction Engaged
Turn Signal On
This message will appear when the Traction
Control System (TCS) is actively limiting wheel If you drive your vehicle for more than about
spin. Slippery road conditions may exist if 1 mile (1.6 km) with a turn signal on, this message
this message is displayed, so adjust your driving will appear as a reminder to turn off the turn
accordingly. The message will stay on for a signal. A multiple chime will sound when this
few seconds after the TCS stops limiting wheel message is displayed.
spin. See Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS) on
page 295 or Traction Control System (TCS)
(CTS-V) on page 297 for more information.

238
DIC Vehicle Personalization Entering the Personalization Menu
If your vehicle has the navigation system, see the To enter the feature programming mode, use the
navigation system manual for instructions on following procedure:
operating the DIC for your vehicle. 1. Turn the ignition to ON, but do not start the
Your vehicle has personalization that allows you to engine. Make sure an automatic transmission
program certain features to a preferred setting is in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
for up to two people. The number of programmable has the parking brake set.
features varies depending upon which model of To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
the vehicle is purchased. recommended that the headlamps are
On all vehicles, features such as climate control turned off.
settings, radio preset settings, exterior lighting
2. If your vehicle has memory settings, press the
at unlock, remote lock and unlock confirmation,
appropriate memory button, 1 or 2, located on
and automatic door locks have already been
programmed for your convenience. the driver’s door armrest. The DIC display
will show either Driver 1 or 2 depending
Some vehicles have additional features that can on which button was selected.
be programmed including the seat and outside
rearview mirror position. 3. Press the PWR/VOL knob to turn the
radio on.
If your vehicle has the ability to program additional
personalization features, the driver’s preferences 4. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once to access the
are recalled by pressing the unlock button on the main menu of the DIC.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, 1 or 2, or 5. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SETUP is
by pressing the appropriate memory button, 1 or 2, highlighted.
located on the driver’s door. Certain features can be
6. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once to access the
programmed not to recall until the key is placed in
SETUP menu.
the ignition. To change feature preferences, see
“Entering the Personalization Menu” following.
239
 7. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until the feature you To program a name, use the following procedure:
want to change is highlighted, then press the 1. Enter the Personalization menu following
TUNE/SEL knob to turn the feature on or the instructions listed previously.
off. If the feature is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name. 2. Select the PERSONALIZATION NAME menu
item by pressing the TUNE/SEL knob once.
If none of the personalization items are turned
on, turn on the personalization menu by You will see a cursor on the screen.
pressing the TUNE/SEL knob. The list of 3. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until you reach the
features will then appear, and you can repeat first letter you want. The letter will be
Step 6. highlighted. There is a complete alphabet with
both upper and lower case letters and the
Personalization Features numbers zero through nine. Also included are
The following choices are available for spaces and other non-letter characters
programming: such as the ampersand (&).
Personalization Name 4. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once to select the
letter. The letter will then appear on the display.
This feature allows you to type in a name that will If you make a mistake, press the CLR button.
appear on the DIC display whenever the This will exit the menu. You can then go
corresponding Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
back into the menu and edit the name. You
transmitter is used or one of the buttons on the can also press the TUNE/SEL knob repeatedly
driver’s door armrest (1 or 2) is pressed. to cycle through all the characters until you
If a customized name is not programmed, the reach the character you wish to change.
system will show DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2 5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until the name you
to correspond with the numbers on the back of the want is complete. You can program up to
RKE transmitters. 16 characters.

240
The name you selected is now set. You can either Remote Recall Memory
exit the programming mode by following the
If your vehicle has the optional memory package,
instructions later in this section or program the
you will have this feature. When this feature is
next feature available on your vehicle. To program
turned on, you can recall any previously
the next feature, enter the personalization
programmed seat and mirror controls when the
portion of the SETUP menu following the
unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
instructions listed previously.
transmitter is pressed.
Configure Display Keys Programmable Modes
This feature allows you to customize the functions
Mode 1: ON
of the four soft keys located to the left and right
of the audio display. See “Configurable Radio Mode 2: OFF
Display Keys” under Radio with CD on page 260
for programming information. Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
Configure SWC (Steering Wheel which the vehicle was programmed may have
Controls) Keys been changed since it left the factory.
This feature allows you to customize the functions
of the four steering wheel controls located on
the left spoke of the steering wheel. See
Reconfigurable Steering Wheel Controls (SWC)
(CTS) on page 161 for programming information.

241
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use Remote Exit Recall
the following procedure:
If your vehicle has the optional memory package,
1. Enter the personalization portion of the you will have this feature. When this feature is
SETUP menu following the instructions turned on, you can recall any previously
listed previously. programmed exit position for the driver’s seat
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until REMOTE when the unlock button on the Remote Keyless
RECALL MEMORY is highlighted. Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and Programmable Modes
forth between on and off. Mode 1: ON
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name. Mode 2: OFF
If this feature is selected, Remote Exit Recall or Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
Key In Recall Memory cannot be selected. it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
The mode you selected is now set. You can either been changed since it left the factory.
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.

242
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use Key in Recall Memory
the following procedure:
If your vehicle has the optional memory package,
1. Enter the personalization portion of the you will have this feature. When this feature is
SETUP menu following the instructions turned on, you can recall any previously
listed previously. programmed seat and mirror positions when the
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until REMOTE EXIT key is inserted into the ignition.
RECALL is highlighted. Programmable Modes
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and Mode 1: ON
forth between on and off.
Mode 2: OFF
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name. Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
If this feature is selected, Remote Recall Memory which the vehicle was programmed may have
cannot be selected. been changed since it left the factory.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.

243
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use Auto Exit Seat
the following procedure:
If your vehicle has the optional memory package,
1. Enter the personalization portion of the you will have this feature. When this feature is
SETUP menu following the instructions turned on, you can recall any previously
listed previously. programmed exit position for the driver’s seat
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until KEY IN when the key is removed from the ignition and the
RECALL MEMORY is highlighted. driver’s door is opened.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and Programmable Modes
forth between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark Mode 1: ON
will appear next to the feature name.
Mode 2: OFF
If this feature is selected, Remote Recall Memory
cannot be selected. Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
which the vehicle was programmed may have
exit the programming mode by following the
been changed since it left the factory.
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.

244
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use Twilight Delay
the following procedure:
This feature allows you to set the amount of time
1. Enter the personalization portion of the you want the exterior lamps to remain on after
SETUP menu following the instructions you exit the vehicle.
listed previously.
Programmable Modes
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until AUTO EXIT
SEAT is highlighted. Mode 1: 0:00 seconds
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and Mode 2: 0:15 seconds
forth between on and off.
Mode 3: 0:30 seconds
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear in the box next to the feature name. Mode 4: 1:00 minute
The mode you selected is now set. You can either Mode 5: 1:30 minutes
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the Mode 6: 2:00 minutes
next feature available on your vehicle.
Mode 7: 2:30 minutes
Mode 8: 3:00 minutes
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since the vehicle left the factory.

245
To determine the mode to which the vehicle is Lights Flash at Unlock
programmed or to program the vehicle to a
This feature flashes the exterior lamps when the
different mode, use the following procedure:
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to
1. Enter the personalization portion of the unlock the vehicle. The lamps will flash for
SETUP menu following the instructions approximately 20 seconds unless a door is
listed previously. opened, the ignition is turned to ACCESSORY,
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until TWILIGHT ON, or START, or the RKE transmitter is used to
DELAY is highlighted. lock the vehicle.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through Programmable Modes
and select the available delay settings. Mode 1: ON
If you choose Mode 1, the exterior lamps will
not illuminate when you exit the vehicle. Mode 2: OFF
Only one mode can be selected at a time. Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
The mode you selected is now set. You can either it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to
exit the programming mode by following the which the vehicle was programmed may have
instructions later in this section or program the been changed since it left the factory.
next feature available on your vehicle.

246
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use Lights Flash at Lock
the following procedure:
This feature allows the exterior lamps to flash
1. Enter the personalization portion of the once when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
SETUP menu following the instructions transmitter is used to lock the vehicle. All doors
listed previously. must be closed for this feature to work, and
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until LIGHTS the lamps will not flash if the parking lamps or
FLASH AT UNLOCK is highlighted. headlamps are on.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and Programmable Modes
forth between on and off. Mode 1: ON
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name. Mode 2: OFF
The mode you selected is now set. You can either Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
exit the programming mode by following the it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to
instructions later in this section or program the which the vehicle was programmed may have
next feature available on your vehicle. been changed since it left the factory.

247
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use Horn Sounds at Lock
the following procedure:
This feature sounds the horn once when the
1. Enter the personalization portion of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used
SETUP menu following the instructions to lock the vehicle. All doors must be closed
listed previously. for this feature to work.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until LIGHTS Programmable Modes
FLASH AT LOCK is highlighted.
Mode 1: ON
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and
forth between on and off. Mode 2: OFF
When the mode is turned on, a check mark Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
will appear next to the feature name. it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
You can select this feature by itself, or you can which the vehicle was programmed may have
combine it with Horn Sounds At Lock so that both been changed since it left the factory.
the lights flash and the horn chirps when you
lock your vehicle.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.

248
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use Exterior Lights at Unlock
the following procedure:
This feature turns on the exterior lamps when the
1. Enter the personalization portion of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
SETUP menu following the instructions used to unlock the vehicle. The lamps will remain
listed previously. on for about 20 seconds unless a door is
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until HORN opened, the ignition is turned to ACCESSORY,
SOUNDS AT LOCK is highlighted. ON, or START, or the RKE transmitter is used to
lock the vehicle.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and
forth between on and off. Programmable Modes
When the mode is turned on, a check mark Mode 1: ON
will appear next to the feature name.
Mode 2: OFF
If you select this feature to be on, Lights Flash At
Lock will also be on. You can choose Lights Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
Flash At Lock by itself, but Horn Sounds At Lock it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to
will always have Lights Flash At Lock enabled which the vehicle was programmed may have
when it is selected. been changed since it left the factory.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.

249
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use Driver Unlock in Park
the following procedure: (Automatic Transmission Only)
1. Enter the personalization portion of the The feature allows the driver’s door to
SETUP menu following the instructions automatically unlock when the transmission is
listed previously. shifted into PARK (P).
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until EXT. LIGHT Programmable Modes
AT UNLOCK is highlighted.
Mode 1: ON
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and
forth between on and off. Mode 2: OFF
When the mode is turned on, a check mark Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
will appear next to the feature name. it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
The mode you selected is now set. You can either which the vehicle was programmed may have
exit the programming mode by following the been changed since it left the factory.
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.

250
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use Driver Unlock Key Out Automatic
the following procedure: Transmission Only/Driver Unlock Key Off
1. Enter the personalization portion of the (Manual Transmission Only)
SETUP menu following the instructions This feature allows the driver’s door to
listed previously. automatically unlock when the key is removed
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until DRIVER from the ignition on automatic transmission
UNLOCK IN PARK is highlighted. vehicles or when the ignition is turned to OFF for
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and manual transmission vehicles.
forth between on and off. Programmable Modes
When the mode is turned on, a check mark Mode 1: ON
will appear next to the feature name.
If this feature is selected, Driver Unlock Key Mode 2: OFF
Out/Off, Doors Unlock Key Out/Off, or Doors Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
Unlock in Park cannot be selected. it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
The mode you selected is now set. You can either which the vehicle was programmed may have
exit the programming mode by following the been changed since it left the factory.
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.

251
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use Doors Unlock in Park (Automatic
the following procedure: Transmission Only)
1. Enter the personalization portion of the The feature allows the doors to automatically
SETUP menu following the instructions unlock when the transmission is shifted into
listed previously. PARK (P).
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until DRIVER Programmable Modes
UNLOCK KEY OUT/OFF is highlighted.
Mode 1: ON
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch between
on and off. Mode 2: OFF
When the mode is turned on, a check mark Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
will appear next to the feature name. it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
If this feature is selected, Driver Unlock in Park which the vehicle was programmed may have
(automatic transmission), Doors Unlock in been changed since it left the factory.
Park (automatic transmission), or Doors Unlock
Key Out/Off cannot be selected.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.

252
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use Doors Unlock Key Out (Automatic
the following procedure: Transmission Only)/ Doors Unlock Key Off
1. Enter the personalization portion of the (Manual Transmission Only)
SETUP menu following the instructions This feature allows the doors to automatically
listed previously. unlock when the key is removed from the ignition
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until DOORS on automatic transmission vehicles or when
UNLOCK IN PARK is highlighted. the ignition is turned to OFF on manual
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and transmission vehicles.
forth between on and off. Programmable Modes
When the mode is turned on, a check mark Mode 1: ON
will appear next to the feature name.
If this feature is selected, Doors Unlock Key Mode 2: OFF
Out/Off, Driver Unlock Key Out/Off, or Driver Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
Unlock in Park (automatic transmission) cannot be it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
selected. which the vehicle was programmed may have
The mode you selected is now set. You can either been changed since it left the factory.
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.

253
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use Delayed Locking
the following procedure:
This feature delays the locking of the vehicle’s
1. Enter the personalization portion of the doors for up to five seconds after a power
SETUP menu following the instructions door lock switch or the lock button on the Remote
listed previously. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until DOORS The five second delay occurs after the last door is
UNLOCK KEY OUT/OFF is highlighted. closed.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch between Programmable Modes
on and off. Mode 1: ON
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name. Mode 2: OFF
If this feature is selected, Doors Unlock in Park Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
(automatic transmission), Driver Unlock in it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to
Park (automatic transmission), or Driver Unlock which the vehicle was programmed may have
Key Out/Off cannot be selected. been changed since it left the factory.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle.

254
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use Lock Passenger Window
the following procedure:
This feature allows you to disable either all the
1. Enter the personalization portion of the passenger window switches or the rear passenger
SETUP menu following the instructions window switches only. If this feature is turned
listed previously. on, all passenger window switches will be disabled
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until DELAYED when the window lockout button is pressed. If
LOCKING is highlighted. the feature is off, only the rear passenger window
switches will be disabled. See Power Windows
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and on page 104 for more information.
forth between on and off.
Programmable Modes
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
will appear next to the feature name. Mode 1: ON
The mode you selected is now set. You can either Mode 2: OFF
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
next feature available on your vehicle. it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.

255
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use Mirror to Curb in Reverse
the following procedure:
If your vehicle has the optional memory package,
1. Enter the personalization portion of the you will have this feature. When this feature is
SETUP menu following the instructions turned on, the passenger’s outside rearview mirror
listed previously. will move downward so you can view the curb
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until LOCK PASS when the shift lever is shifted into REVERSE (R).
WINDOW is highlighted. The mirror will return to the last known driving
position when the shift lever is moved out of
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and REVERSE (R). See Outside Curb View Assist
forth between on and off. Mirror on page 136 for more information.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark
Programmable Modes
will appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either Mode 1: ON
exit the programming mode by following the Mode 2: OFF
instructions later in this section or program the
next feature available on your vehicle. Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to
which the vehicle was programmed may have
been changed since it left the factory.

256
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use Enhanced Chime Volume
the following procedure:
This feature allows you to adjust the volume level
1. Enter the personalization portion of the of the vehicle’s warning chimes. The chime
SETUP menu following the instructions volume cannot be turned off, only adjusted.
listed previously.
Programmable Modes
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until MIRROR TO
CURB IN REV is highlighted. Mode 1: NORMAL
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and Mode 2: LOUD
forth between on and off.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
When the mode is turned on, a check mark it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to
will appear next to the feature name. which the vehicle was programmed may have
The mode you selected is now set. You can either been changed since it left the factory.
exit the programming mode by following the To program the vehicle to a different mode, use
instructions later in this section or program the the following procedure:
next feature available on your vehicle.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the
SETUP menu following the instructions
listed previously.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until ENHANCED
CHIME VOLUME is highlighted.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and
forth between the normal and loud settings.

257
The mode you selected is now set. You can either Audio System(s)
exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the Determine which radio your vehicle has and then
next feature available on your vehicle. read the pages following to familiarize yourself
with its features.
Exiting the Personalization Menu
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a
To exit the personalization portion of the SETUP safer driving experience. See Defensive Driving on
menu, press the CLR button once you have page 288. By taking a few moments to read this
finished making your selections. You will return to manual and get familiar with your vehicle’s
the main audio screen. audio system, you can use it with less effort, as
If a 15 second time period has elapsed with no well as take advantage of its features. While your
selection made, the SETUP menu will be vehicle is parked, set up your audio system by
exited automatically. presetting your favorite radio stations, setting the
tone and adjusting the speakers. Then, when
driving conditions permit, you can tune to
your favorite stations using the presets and
steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

258
 • Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
{CAUTION: adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
This system provides you with a far radio stations using the presets and steering
greater access to audio stations and song wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
listings. Giving extended attention to
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment
entertainment tasks while driving can
to your vehicle, such as an audio system,
cause a crash and you or others can be CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,
injured or killed. Always keep your eyes or two-way radio, make sure that it can be
on the road and your mind on the added by checking with your dealer. Also,
drive — avoid engaging in extended check federal rules covering mobile radio and
searching while driving. telephone units. If sound equipment can be
added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with the
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
safe driving. For more information, see Defensive other systems, and even damage them.
Driving on page 288. Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid operation of sound equipment that has
distraction while driving. been added.
While your vehicle is parked: Your vehicle has a feature called Retained
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls. Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio
system can be played even after the ignition
• Familiarize yourself with its operation. is turned off. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 114 for more information.

259
Setting the Time Radio with CD
1. Press the TUNE/SEL (select) knob to enter
the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SET CLOCK
appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select
SET CLOCK.
4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to adjust the time.
5. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to update the
time. VEHICLE TIME UPDATED will appear
on the display.
If the CLOCK/RADIO DISP (display) is configured
into one of the configurable keys, pressing the key
will switch the display between the radio station Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD
frequency and the time. See “Configurable Radio similar
Display Keys” under Radio with CD on page 260 for
more information on configuring the keys.

260
Radio Data System (RDS) XM™ Satellite Radio Service
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS). XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
RDS features are available for use only on FM the 48 contiguous United States and Canada.
stations that broadcast RDS information. XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coast
With RDS, the radio can do the following: channels including music, news, sports, talk,
traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’s
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected programming. XM™ provides digital quality
type of programming audio and text information that includes song title
• Receive announcements concerning local and and artist name. A service fee is required in
national emergencies order to receive the XM™ service. For more
• Display messages from radio stations information, contact XM™; In the U.S. at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call
This system relies upon receiving specific 1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).
information from these stations and will only work CLOCK/INFO DISP (Clock/Information
when the information is available. In rare cases, a Display): Press the CLOCK/INFO DISP button to
radio station may broadcast incorrect information switch between the clock display, the XM™
that will cause the radio features to work screen, and the XM™ information display.
improperly. If this happens, contact the radio
station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the
station name or call letters will appear on the
display instead of the frequency. RDS stations may
also provide the time of day, a program type
(PTY) for current programming, and the name of
the program being broadcast.

261
Press this button while in XM™ mode to retrieve Playing the Radio
three different categories of information related
to the current song or channel: Artist, Song Title, PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
and Category. To view this information, perform on and off.
the following:
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the decrease the volume.
main menu.
AVC (Automatic Volume Compensation):
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until CLOCK/INFO Available only with the premium Bose® audio
DISP appears on the display. system. AVC, which utilizes Bose AudioPilot® noise
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select compensation technology, continuously adjusts the
CLOCK/INFO DISP. The display will change audio system equalization, to compensate for
to show the additional XM™ information. background noise, so that your music always
4. To return to the original display, press the sounds the same at the set volume level. This
CLR (clear) button or wait for the display to feature is most effective at lower radio volume
time out. settings where background noise can affect how
well you hear the music being played through your
If the CLOCK/INFO DISP is configured into one of vehicle’s audio system. At higher volume settings,
the configurable keys, pressing the key will where the music is much louder than the
switch the display between the radio station background noise, there may be little or no
frequency and the time. See “Configurable Radio adjustments by AVC. To turn AVC on and off,
Display Keys” later in this section for more perform the following steps:
information.
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the
main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until AUTO
VOLUME COMP. appears on the display.

262
 3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to turn AVC on or Q SCAN R: Press the SCAN button to enter
off. An X will appear in the box when AVC is scan mode. SCAN will appear on the display.
selected on. Press the up arrow to scan to the next station.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To The radio will go to a station, play for five seconds,
return to the original display, repeatedly press then go on to the next station. Press this button
the CLR button or wait for the display to again to stop scanning.
time out. To scan preset stations, press and hold SCAN for
SOURCE: Press this button to select a source, more than two seconds until you hear a beep
either radio or CD. The CD must be loaded and PSCAN appears on the display. The radio will
to select the source and to play. CD will appear go to the first preset station stored on your firm
on the display if a CD is loaded. If a CD is keys, play for five seconds, then go on to the next
not loaded the display will not change from the preset station. Press SCAN again to stop
radio source. scanning presets.

Finding a Station The radio will only scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
BAND: Press this button to select FM1, FM2, AM,
or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).
Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to
go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there. SEEK will appear on the display. The
sound will mute while seeking.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.

263
LOCAL/DISTANT Selection: With this feature Setting Preset Stations
you can set the radio to search for local stations or
stations that are further away for a larger Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
selection. To set this feature to LOCAL or six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be
DISTANT, perform the following steps: programmed on the six numbered firm keys, by
performing the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the
main menu. 1. Turn the radio on.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SEEK LOCAL 2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM, or
or SEEK DISTANT appears on the display. XM1 or XM2.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select either 3. Tune in the desired station.
LOCAL or DISTANT. 4. Press and hold one of the six numbered firm
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To keys for two seconds until you hear a beep.
return to the original display, repeatedly press The set preset station number will appear
the CLR button or wait for the display to on the display above the firm key that it is set
time out. to. Whenever that numbered firm key is
pressed for less than two seconds, the station
To search for stations, press the SEEK up or that was set will return.
down arrows. If the system is set to LOCAL, SEEK
will appear in the display and seek to stations
with strong signals only. If the system is set
to DISTANT, D-SEEK will appear in the display
and seek to stations with weak and strong signals.

264
 5. Repeat the steps for each firm key. 5. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select.
To set the preset stations with an equalization AUTOSTORE will appear on the display. The
setting, DSP (digital signal processing) setting, radio will automatically search the band
or a program type (PTY) setting, see each of and select and store the six radio stations
these features later in this section. When a with the strongest signal. The stations will be
preset station is selected, once one of these stored by signal strength, not sequential
additional settings is selected, the preset station order. The set preset station number
will remember each setting and it will remain will appear on the display above the firm key
active, until the setting is selected off for that that it is set to. Whenever that numbered
preset station. firm key is pressed for less than two seconds,
the station that was set will return.
AUTOSTORE PRESETS: To set the preset
6. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To
stations automatically, perform the following steps:
return to the original display, repeatedly press
1. Turn the radio on. the CLR button or wait for the display to
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM. time out.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the When battery power is removed and later applied,
main menu. you will not have to reset your radio presets.
4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until AUTOSTORE
PRESETS appears on the display.

265
PRESETS HOME/AWAY: This feature gives you Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
the ability to store two different kinds of station
presets. HOME can be used for stations available To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble, perform
where you live and AWAY can be for stations the following steps:
available outside of your local broadcasting area. 1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the
To set preset stations for home and away main menu.
perform the following steps: 2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the BASS-MID-TREBLE appears on the display.
main menu. 3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the tone
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until PRESETS settings.
HOME/AWAY appears on the display. 4. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select. HOME the settings.
or AWAY will appear on the display. 5. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to increase or to
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To decrease the bass, midrange, or treble. If a
return to the original display, repeatedly press station is weak or noisy, decrease the treble.
the CLR button or wait for the display to 6. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to set the
time out. adjustment.
Follow the manual or automatic steps previously 7. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To
listed for setting the preset firm keys for both home return to the original display repeatedly press
and away. the CLR button or wait for the display to
time out.

266
AUDIO EQUALIZER: This feature allows you to Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
select customized equalization settings. To choose
an equalization setting (EQ0 through EQ5), To adjust the balance or fade, perform the
perform the following steps: following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the 1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the
main menu. main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until EQUALIZER 2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until
appears on the display. BASS-MID-TREBLE appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to set the 3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the tone
equalization setting. The equalization setting settings.
will appear on the display. 4. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll to
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To BALANCE or FADER.
return to the original display, repeatedly press 5. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to adjust the
the CLR button or wait for the display to BALANCE to the right or the left speakers and
time out. the FADER to the front or the rear speakers.
The equalization settings are preset to 6. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to set the
EQ0 (Normal), EQ1 (Pop), EQ2 (Rock), adjustment.
EQ3 (Jazz), EQ4 (Talk), and EQ5 (Country). 7. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press
the CLR button or wait for the display to
time out.
EQ0 will not appear on the display when in
this mode.

267
Using Digital Signal Processing (DSP) TALK: This setting should be used when listening
to non-musical material such as news, talk
Available only with the premium Bose® audio shows, sports broadcasts, and books on tape.
system, this feature is used to provide a choice of Talk makes spoken words sound very clear.
five different listening experiences: DSP normal,
talk, spacious, rear seat, and driver seat. DSP can SPACIOUS: This setting is used to make the
be used while listening to the radio or the CD listening space seem larger.
player. The radio keeps separate DSP settings for
each band, preset, and source. To select a REAR SEAT: This setting adjusts the audio to
DSP choice, perform the following steps: give the rear seat passenger(s) the best possible
sound quality. Sound quality for the front seat
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the passengers may be different when this setting
main menu. is used.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until one of the five
DRIVER SEAT: This setting adjusts the audio to
settings appears on the display.
give the driver the best possible sound quality.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select a DSP Sound quality for the front and rear seat
setting. passenger(s) may be different when this setting
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To is used.
return to the original display, repeatedly press
the CLR button or wait for the display to
time out.
DSP NORMAL: This setting provides the best
overall audio performance for all passengers. DSP
NORMAL will not appear on the display when in
this mode.

268
RDS Messages MSG (Message): If the current RDS station has a
message, MSG will appear on the display. The
The RDS message feature is available only on message may display the artist, song title, call in
FM stations that broadcast RDS information. See phone numbers, etc. If the entire message
Radio Data System (RDS) for more information does not appear on the display, parts of the
earlier in this section. message will appear every three seconds until the
ALERT: Alert warns of local and national message is completed. Once the completed
emergencies. When, an alert announcement message has been displayed, MSG will disappear
comes on the current radio station or a related from the display until another new message is
network station, ALERT will appear on the display. received.
You will hear the announcement, even if the To display the last message, perform the
volume is low or a CD is playing. If a CD following steps:
is playing, play will stop during the announcement.
Alert announcements cannot be turned off. If 1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the
the radio tunes to a related network station for the main menu.
announcement, it will return to the original 2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until CLOCK/INFO
station when the announcement is finished. DISP appears on the display.
ALERT will not be affected by tests of the 3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob. The message will
emergency broadcast system. This feature is not appear on the display.
supported by all RDS stations. Once the message has been displayed, MSG will
disappear from the display until another new
message is received.

269
TP (Traffic Program): TP will appear on the To turn TA on or off, perform the following steps:
display when the radio detects a signal from an 1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the
RDS station that has traffic announcement main menu.
broadcast capability.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until TRAFFIC
TA (Traffic Announcement): If TA appears on ANNOUNCE appears on the display.
the display, the tuned radio station broadcasts
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select ON or
traffic announcements and when a traffic
OFF. An X will appear in the box when TA is
announcement comes on the tuned station you
selected on.
will hear it.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To
If the station does not broadcast traffic return to the original display, repeatedly press
announcements, when TA is turned on it will seek the CLR button or wait for the display to
to a station that does. When a station that time out.
broadcasts traffic announcements is found, the
radio will stop seeking and TA will appear on the Activating Category (CAT) Stations
display. If no station is found that broadcasts (RDS and XM™)
traffic announcements, No Traffic will appear on
the display. CAT allows you to search for stations with specific
types of music. The selectable categories are
The radio will play traffic announcements if the POP, EASY, TALK, CNTRY (Country), CLASS
volume is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a (Classical), and JAZZ.
CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements.

270
To activate program types, perform the AF (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
following steps: allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the the same category.
main menu. To turn AF on or off, perform the following steps:
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until CATEGORY 1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the
appears on the display. main menu.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select ON or 2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until ALTERNATE
OFF. An X will appear in the box when CAT FREQ. appears on the display.
is selected on.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select AF OFF,
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To AF ON, or AF REG. An X will appear in the
return to the original display, repeatedly press box when AF is selected on.
the CLR button or wait for the display to
time out. 4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press
Once CAT is activated the categories will appear the CLR button or wait for the display to
on the display above the firm keys, in place of time out.
the preset stations, if programmed. Press the firm
key for the category that you would like to This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite
listen to. Not all stations support CAT. The radio Radio Service.
may not go to all of the stations with that
music type when pressing the firm key.

271
Radio Message The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
THEFTLOCK: This message is displayed when and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
the THEFTLOCK® system has been activated. manner.
Take the vehicle to the dealer for service.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be
Radio Messages for XM™ Only reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
See XM Radio Messages on page 279 later in this recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
section for further detail. handled. There may be an increase in skipping,
Using the Single CD Player difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
The player will pull it in. If the ignition and the radio is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
are on the CD will begin playing. A CD may be scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
loaded with the radio off but it will not start playing surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
until the radio is on. on page 285 for more information.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in If there is no apparent damage, try a known
the player, it will stay in the player. When the good CD.
ignition or radio is turned on, the CD will start to
play where it stopped, if it was the last selected Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
audio source. in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
When the CD is inserted, CD will appear on the needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
display. As each new track starts to play, the track with a marking pen instead.
number will appear on the display.

272
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert F3 RDM (Random): Press this firm key to listen
more than one CD into the slot at a time, to the tracks in random, rather than sequential,
or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, order. RANDOM will appear on the display. Press
you could damage the CD player. When RDM again to turn off random play. RANDOM
using the CD player, use only CDs in good will disappear from the display.
condition without any label, load one CD at a
time, and keep the CD player and the loading F4 RPT (Repeat): Press this firm key to hear a
slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and track over again. REPEAT will appear on the
debris. display. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.
REPEAT will disappear from the display.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD
Messages” later in this section. F6 DISP (Display): Press this firm key to display
the time of the track. Press this firm key again
When a CD is inserted the CD functions will
to remove the time of the track from the display.
appear on the display above the firm keys, in place
of the preset stations (if programmed). Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow
F1 PREV (Previous): Press this firm key to go to to go to the next or to the previous track on
the previous track. Press and hold this firm key the CD.
to reverse quickly within a track. Release the firm Q SCAN R: Press this button to listen to each
key to play the passage. The elapsed time of track for 10 seconds. The CD will go to a track,
the track will appear on the display. play for 10 seconds, then go on to the next track.
F2 NEXT: Press this firm key to go to the next Press this button again to stop scanning.
track. Press and hold this firm key to advance
quickly within a track. Release the firm key to play X (Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when
the passage. The elapsed time of the track will it is playing or to eject a CD when it is not
appear on the display. playing. Eject may be activated with the ignition
and the radio off.

273
Using the Six-Disc CD Changer Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time,
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs,
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs you could damage the CD player. When
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same using the CD player, use only CDs in good
manner. condition without any label, load one CD at a
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be time, and keep the CD player and the loading
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and
recording, the quality of the music that has been debris.
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been If an error appears on the display, see “CD
handled. There may be an increase in skipping, Messages” later in this section.
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the When a CD is inserted the CD functions will
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD appear on the display above the firm keys, in place
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or of the preset stations, if programmed.
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the LOAD: Press the LOAD button to load CDs into
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs the CD player. This CD player will hold up to
on page 285 for more information. six CDs.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen instead.

274
To insert one CD, do the following: 3. Load the CD, when INSERT appears on the
1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off. display, insert a CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
2. Press and release the LOAD button. Please
Do not try to load two CDs at one time
Wait will appear on the display.
and wait to load a CD until INSERT appears
3. Load the CD, when INSERT appears on the on the display for each disc inserted. The
display, insert a CD partway into the slot, CD player will take up to six CDs. Do not try
label side up. The player will pull the CD in. to load more than six. If you want to load
When a CD is inserted, CD will appear on the less than six CDs, load the desired amount.
display, the number of the CD and the track The CD player will time out when it does
number will appear on the display if the radio not receive any more CDs and the last CD
is on. loaded will begin to play.
If the radio is on, the CD will begin to play If the radio is on, the last CD loaded will begin to
automatically. play automatically.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following: F1 CD n (Down): Press this firm key to go to
1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off. the previous CD.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for F2 CD m (Up): Press this firm key to go to the
two seconds. Please Wait will appear on the next CD.
display and you will hear a beep.
CD REV { (Reverse): Press this firm key to go
to the previous track. Press and hold this firm
key to reverse quickly within the track. Release the
firm key to play the passage. The elapsed time
of the track will appear on the display.

275
CD FWD | (Forward): Press this firm key to go • RDM TRK (Random Track): Plays the tracks
to the next track. Press and hold this firm key on the current CD in random, rather than
to advance quickly within the track. Release the sequential, order. RDM TRK will appear on the
firm key to play the passage. The elapsed time of display. Press the MODE firm key again to
the track will appear on the display. turn off random play. RDM TRK will disappear
from the display.
F5 MODE: Press this firm key to select from
NORMAL, RPT TRCK (Repeat Track), RPT CD • RDM ALL (Random All CDs): Plays all of the
(Repeat CD), RDM TRK (Random Track), CDs loaded in random, rather than sequential,
and RDM ALL (Random All CDs). order. RDM ALL will appear on the display.
Press the MODE firm key again to turn
• NORMAL: Sets the system for normal play of off random play. RDM ALL will disappear from
the CD(s). NORMAL will not appear on the the display.
display when in this mode.
• RPT TRCK (Repeat Track): Repeats the F6 DISP (Display): Press this firm key to display
track over again. RPT TRCK will appear on the the time of the track. Press this firm key again
display. Press the MODE firm key again to to display CD PLAY and press this firm key once
turn off repeat play. RPT TRCK will disappear more to clear the display.
from the display. Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to go
• RPT CD (Repeat CD): Repeats the CD over to the next or to the previous track on the CD.
again. RPT DISC will appear on the display.
Press the MODE firm key again to turn Q SCAN R: Press this button to listen to each
off repeat play. RPT DISC will disappear from track for 10 seconds. The CD will go to a track,
the display. play for 10 seconds, then go on to the next track.
Press this button again to stop scanning.

276
X (Eject): Press this button to eject the CD that • The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
is currently playing, or press and hold this upside down.
button to eject all of the CDs loaded. You will hear • The air is very humid. If so, wait about an
a beep. Eject may be activated with the ignition hour and try again.
or radio off.
• There may have been a problem while
CD Messages burning the CD.
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the • The label may be caught in the CD player.
following reasons: If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other
• If it is very hot. When the temperature returns reason, try a known good CD.
to normal, the CD should play. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
• If you are driving on a very rough road. be corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the
When the road becomes smoother, the radio displays an error message, write it down and
CD should play. provide it to your GM dealer when reporting the
problem.

277
Configurable Radio Display Keys 6. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to select which of
the four configurable keys you would like to
This feature allows you to customize the four keys change. The currently assigned feature will be
that are located on each side of the radio shown.
display to make it easier to adjust the radio
features. Other non-radio related features are also 7. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select the
available for customization. configurable key to change.
To program the configurable radio display keys, 8. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to find the feature
perform the following steps: that you would like to store to the key.
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the 9. Press the TUNE/SEL knob when you have
main menu. found the feature to be stored. The display
will update, by showing the symbol of
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SETUP the feature that you selected next to the
appears on the display. configurable key.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter into 10. Repeat the previous steps for each
SETUP. configurable key.
4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until CONFIGURE Once a feature is programmed to a key, the
DISPLAY KEYS appears on the display. feature will not appear on the display when
5. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter into programming the remaining configurable keys.
CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS. The configurable keys can be changed at any time.

278
XM Radio Messages
Radio Display Message Condition Action Required
XL (Explicit Language XL on the radio display, These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
Channels) after the channel name, customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
indicates content with
explicit language.
Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signl Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicle
is moved into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading Acquiring channel audio The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
(after 4 second delay) text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune in to another
channel.
CH Unavl Channel no longer This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
available Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info Artist Name/Feature not No artist information is available at this time on this
available channel. The system is working properly.
No Info Song/Program Title not No song title information is available at this time on this
available channel. The system is working properly.

279
 Radio Display Message Condition Action Required
No Info Category Name not No category information is available at this time on this
available channel. The system is working properly.
NotFound No channel available for There are no channels available for the selected category.
the chosen category The system is working properly.
No Info No Text/Informational No text or informational messages are available at this time
message available on this channel. The system is working properly.
XM Lock Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in your vehicle may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with your GM dealer.
Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Unknown Radio ID not known If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
(should only be if may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
hardware failure)
Check XM Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.

280
Navigation/Radio System Audio Steering Wheel
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system. Controls (CTS)
The navigation system has built-in features Some audio functions
intended to minimize driver distraction. Technology can be adjusted at the
alone, no matter how advanced, can never steering wheel. They
replace your own judgment. See the Navigation include the following:
System manual for some tips to help you
reduce distractions while driving.

Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of
your vehicle’s radio. The feature works
automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). If the radio is Volume: Turn this knob to increase or to
moved to a different vehicle, it will not operate. decrease the volume.
If the radio is removed from your vehicle, the
original VIN in the radio can be used to trace the e (Band/Source): Press this button to switch
radio back to your vehicle. between FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2
(if equipped), radio, or CD.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not
operate if stolen. For vehicles with the six-disc CD changer radio: If
none of the audio sources are loaded, and this
button is pressed, NO SOURCE LOADED
will appear on the display.

281
g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press this button to Audio Steering Wheel
silence the system. Press this button again or turn
the VOL (volume) knob to turn the sound on.
Controls (CTS-V)
If your vehicle has the navigation system, press this
button to initiate voice recognition. See “Voice
Recognition” in the Navigation System manual for
more information.

See Reconfigurable
Steering Wheel Controls
(SWC) (CTS) on
page 161 for more
information on
this feature.

Depending on your vehicle, the audio steering

wheel controls may be different.
For the CTS-V, some audio controls can be
adjusted at the steering wheel. They include the
following:
0 (Mute): Press this button to silence the system.
Press this button again, or any other radio
button, to turn the sound on.

282
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch + u — (Volume): Press this button to increase
between FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 or to decrease the volume.
(if equipped), radio, or CD.
+ t u — (Seek): Press either arrow to go to
g (OnStar®/Voice Recognition): If your vehicle the next or the previous radio station and stay
has the Radio with CD or Radio with Six-Disc there. The radio will only seek stations with
CD audio system, press this button to interact with a strong signal that are in the selected band.
the OnStar system.
When a CD is playing, press the minus sign to go
If your vehicle has the navigation system, press to the start of the current track, if more than
this button to initiate voice recognition. See “Voice 10 seconds have played. Press the plus sign to go
Recognition” in the Navigation System manual to the next track. If either the minus or the plus
for more information. While in Voice Recognition, button are pressed more than once, the player will
say “OnStar” to interact with the OnStar® continue moving backward or forward through
system. See the OnStar® System on page 137 in the CD.
this manual for more information.
Press and hold the SEEK plus or minus button,
1-6 (Preset Stations): Press this button to play until you hear a beep. The CD will fast forward or
stations that are programmed on the radio fast reverse through the CD. Press either button
preset pushbuttons. The radio will only seek preset again to play the passage.
stations with a strong signal that are in the
If you have the navigation system, some of the
selected band.
audio steering wheel controls work when a DVD is
When a CD is playing, press this button to go to playing in the navigation radio. See the Navigation
the next track. System manual for more information.
When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer,
press this button to go to the next available
CD, if multiple CDs are loaded.

283
Radio Reception FM Stereo
You may experience frequency interference and FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals
static during normal radio reception if items will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
such as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenience Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM
accessories, and external electronic devices signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
are plugged into the accessory power outlet. If
there is interference or static, unplug the item from
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
the accessory power outlet. XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
AM United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
The range for most AM stations is greater than for tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
FM, especially at night. The longer range can radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
cause station frequencies to interfere with each In addition, traveling or standing under heavy
other. For better radio reception, most AM foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
radio stations will boost the power levels during loss of XM signal for a period of time. The
the day, and then reduce these levels during radio may display No Signl to indicate interference.
the night. Static can also occur when things like
storms and power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try reducing the
treble on your radio.

284
Cellular Phone Usage Care of Your CDs
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original
your vehicle’s radio. This interference may cases or other protective cases and away from
occur when making or receiving phone calls, direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the
charging the phone’s battery, or simply having the bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a
phone on. This interference causes an increased CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
level of static while listening to the radio. If static is or scratched, the CD will not play properly or not
received while listening to the radio, unplug the at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a
cellular phone and turn it off. soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in
a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process
starts from the center to the edge.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up
CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of
the hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD Player

The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the
internal lens of the CD optics with lubricants.

285
Diversity Antenna System If adding an aftermarket cellular telephone to your
vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear to the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the
window defogger, located in the rear window. AM-FM antennas are not damaged. Make sure
Make sure that the inside surface of the rear the cellular telephone antenna does not touch a
window is not scratched and that the grid lines on grid line.
the glass are not damaged. If the inside surface
is damaged, it could interfere with radio reception. XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass System
tinting with metallic film. The metallic film in
some tinting materials will interfere with The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on
or distort the incoming radio reception. Any the roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of
damage caused to your antenna due to metallic snow and ice build up for clear radio reception.
tinting materials will not be covered by your If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of
warranty. the XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof
Notice: Do not try to clear frost or other is open.
warranty. Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can
If static is heard on the radio, when the rear interfere with the performance of the XM™ system.
window defogger is turned on, it could mean that Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is
a defogger grid line has been damaged. If this not obstructed.
is true, the grid line must be repaired.

286
 Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Competitive Driving ................................... 306
Your Vehicle ............................................ 288 Driving at Night ......................................... 306
Defensive Driving ...................................... 288 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 308
Drunken Driving ........................................ 289 City Driving ............................................... 310
Control of a Vehicle .................................. 292 Freeway Driving ........................................ 311
Braking ...................................................... 292 Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 312
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 293 Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 313
Braking in Emergencies ............................. 295 Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 314
Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS) ........ 295 Winter Driving ........................................... 316
Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS-V) .... 297 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Competitive Driving Mode (CTS-V) ............ 298 Ice, or Snow .......................................... 320
Limited-Slip Rear Axle ............................... 299 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 321
StabiliTrak® System ................................... 299 Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 321
Panic Brake Assist .................................... 300 Towing ........................................................ 326
Steering .................................................... 300 Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 326
Off-Road Recovery .................................... 303 Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 326
Passing ..................................................... 303 Towing a Trailer ........................................ 328
Loss of Control .......................................... 305

287
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle {CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready
Defensive Driving
for anything.” On city streets, rural roads,
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: or expressways, it means “Always expect
Drive defensively. the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians
Please start with a very important safety device in or other drivers are going to be careless
your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
Are for Everyone on page 20. might do and be ready. Rear-end collisions
are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow
enough following distance. Defensive
driving requires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that distracts
from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can
even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do these
things, or pull off the road in a safe place to
do them. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.

288
Drunken Driving Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half
the adult population — choose never to drink
Death and injury associated with drinking and alcohol, so they never drive after drinking.
driving is a national tragedy. It is the number For persons under 21, it is against the law in
one contributor to the highway death toll, every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good
claiming thousands of victims every year. medical, psychological, and developmental
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to reasons for these laws.
drive a vehicle: The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
• Judgment safety problem is for people never to drink
alcohol and then drive. But what if people do?
• Muscular Coordination How much is “too much” if someone plans
• Vision to drive? It is a lot less than many might think.
• Attentiveness Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of
cases, these deaths are the result of someone who someone who is drinking depends upon
was drinking and driving. In recent years, more four things:
than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths • The amount of alcohol consumed
have been associated with the use of alcohol, with • The drinker’s body weight
more than 300,000 people injured.
• The amount of food that is consumed before
and during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol

289
According to the American Medical Association, a It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For
180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce example, if the same person drank three double
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)
a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would within an hour, the person’s BAC would be close
reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food
(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if just before or during drinking will have a somewhat
each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors like lower BAC level.
whiskey, gin, or vodka. There is a gender difference, too. Women
generally have a lower relative percentage of
body water than men. Since alcohol is carried in
body water, this means that a woman generally will
reach a higher BAC level than a man of her
same body weight will when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout
Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In
some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and
Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers
in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have
seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the
drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

290
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC There is something else about drinking and driving
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving that many people do not know. Medical research
skills of many people are impaired at a BAC shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make
approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the
worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when
levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that the anyone who has been drinking — driver or
chance of being in a collision increases sharply for passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance
drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. of being killed or permanently disabled is
A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has higher than if the person had not been drinking.
doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a
BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver
having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of {CAUTION:
0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the Drinking and then driving is very
alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,
number of cold showers will speed that up. attentiveness, and judgment can be
“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What if affected by even a small amount of
there is an emergency, a need to take sudden alcohol. You can have a serious — or
action, as when a child darts into the street? even fatal — collision if you drive after
A person with even a moderate BAC might not
drinking. Please do not drink and drive
be able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision. or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you
are with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.

291
Control of a Vehicle Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle See Brake System Warning Light on page 197.
go where you want it to go. They are the brakes, Braking action involves perception time and
the steering, and the accelerator. All three reaction time.
systems have to do their work at the places where
the tires meet the road. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or bring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide. That means Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
you can lose control of your vehicle. See Traction second. But that is only an average. It might
Control System (TCS) (CTS) on page 295 or be less with one driver and as long as two or
Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS-V) on three seconds or more with another. Age, physical
page 297. condition, alertness, coordination, and eyesight
all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
Modifications on page 332. 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary
greatly with the surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition of the road,
whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the
condition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force applied.

292
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by
heavy braking — rather than keeping pace with Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System
traffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may (ABS), an advanced electronic braking system
not have time to cool between hard stops. The that will help prevent a braking skid.
brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of When you start your engine and begin to drive
heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic away, ABS will check itself. You may hear a
and allow realistic following distances, you momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That is going on, and you may even notice that
means better braking and longer brake life. your brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are
driving, brake normally but do not pump the If there is a problem
brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to with ABS, this warning
push down. If the engine stops, you will still have light will stay on.
some power brake assist. But you will use it See Anti-Lock Brake
when you brake. Once the power assist is used System Warning
up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal Light on page 198.
will be harder to push.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 332.

293
 ABS can change the brake pressure faster than
any driver could. The computer is programmed
to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the
obstacle while braking hard.

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving

safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of
you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here is what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the As you brake, your computer keeps receiving
computer will separately work the brakes at each updates on wheel speed and controls braking
wheel. pressure accordingly.

294
Remember: ABS does not change the time you Traction Control
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal
or always decrease stopping distance. If you get System (TCS) (CTS)
too close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not Your vehicle has a traction control system that
have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough slippery road conditions. The system operates only
room up ahead to stop, even though you if it senses that one or both of the rear wheels
have ABS. are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When
Using ABS this happens, the system brakes the spinning
wheel(s) and/or reduces engine power to
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal limit wheel spin.
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may
hear the anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feel You may feel or hear the system working, but this
the brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal. is normal.

This warning light will

Braking in Emergencies come on to let you
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same know if there is
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you a problem with your
more than even the very best braking. traction control system.

See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light

on page 199. When this warning light is on, the
system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly.

295
The traction control system automatically comes TC button again to turn the system back on.
on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel If you press and hold the TC button for
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you five seconds, the StabiliTrak® system will
should always leave the system on. But you turn off. Press the TC button again to turn
can turn the traction control system off if you ever StabiliTrak® back on. For more information,
need to. You should turn the system off if your see StabiliTrak® System on page 299.
vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and You can program your steering wheel controls
rocking the vehicle is required. Additionally, and/or the buttons on the Base audio system to
turning the traction control system off on some turn the TCS on or off. See Reconfigurable
surfaces, such as deep snow and loose gravel, will Steering Wheel Controls (SWC) (CTS) on
assist vehicle motion at lower speeds. See page 161 and/or “Configurable Radio Display
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 321 Keys” under Radio with CD on page 260 for
for more information. See also Winter Driving programming instructions.
on page 316 for information on using TCS when
driving in snowy or icy conditions. Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
You can turn the system Modifications on page 332 for more information.
off by pressing the TC
(traction control)
button located in the
glove box.

If you press the TC button once, the traction

control system will turn off and the traction control
system warning light will come on. Press the
296
Traction Control The traction control system automatically comes
on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel
System (TCS) (CTS-V) spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you
Your vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) should always leave the system on. But you
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful can turn the traction control system off if you ever
in slippery road conditions. The system operates need to. You should turn the system off if your
only if it senses that one or both of the rear wheels vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and
are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When rocking the vehicle is required. Additionally,
this happens, the system brakes the spinning turning the traction control system off on some
wheel(s) and/or reduces engine power to surfaces, such as deep snow and loose gravel, will
limit wheel spin. assist vehicle motion at lower speeds. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 321
You may feel or hear the system working, but this and If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or
is normal. Snow on page 320 for more information. See
also Winter Driving on page 316 for information on
This warning light will
using TCS when driving in snowy or icy
come on to let you
conditions.
know if there’s a
problem with your You can turn the system
traction control system. off by pressing the TC
(traction control)
button located on the
steering wheel.
See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light
on page 199. When this warning light is on, the
system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly.

297
If you press the TC button once, the traction Competitive Driving Mode (CTS-V)
control system will turn off and the TCS warning
light will come on. If you press the TC button again The driver can select this optional handling
within five seconds, the traction control system mode by pressing the Traction Control (TC) button
will remain off, the warning light will stay on, and on the steering wheel twice within five seconds.
the stability system will enter Competitive COMPETITIVE DRIVING will be displayed in
Driving Mode. Competitive Driving will be displayed the DIC. Competitive driving mode allows
on the Driver Information Center (DIC). See the driver to have control of the power applied to
Competitive Driving Mode (CTS-V) on page 298 the rear wheels, while the StabiliTrak® system
and “Driver Information Center (DIC)” in the helps steer the vehicle by selective brake
Navigation Supplement for more information. application. In competitive mode, the levels at
Press the TC button again to turn the system which StabiliTrak® is engaged have been modified
back on. If you press and hold the TC button for to better suit a performance driving environment.
five seconds, the StabiliTrak® and Traction Control When the traction control warning light is on,
systems will turn off. Press the TC button again the Traction Control System will not be operating.
to turn StabiliTrak® and Traction Control back on. Adjust your driving accordingly.
For more information, see StabiliTrak® System When you press the TC button again, or turn the
on page 299. ignition to ACCESSORY, the TCS will be on.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your The traction engaged symbol will be displayed
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and temporarily in the DIC and a chime will be heard.
Modifications on page 332 for more information.

298
Limited-Slip Rear Axle When the system activates, a Stability System
Engaged message will be displayed on the Driver
If your vehicle has this feature, your limited-slip Information Center. See DIC Warnings and
rear axle can give you additional traction on snow, Messages on page 228. You may also hear a
mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standard noise or feel vibration in the brake pedal. This is
axle most of the time, but when one of the normal. Continue to steer the vehicle in the
rear wheels has no traction and the other does, direction you want it to go.
this feature will allow the wheel with traction
If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak®, a
to move the vehicle.
Service Stability System message will be
displayed on the Driver Information Center. See
StabiliTrak® System DIC Warnings and Messages on page 228. When
Your vehicle may have an electronic stability this message is displayed, the system is not
control system called StabiliTrak®. It is an operational. Driving should be adjusted
advanced computer controlled system that assists accordingly.
you with directional control of the vehicle in StabiliTrak® comes on automatically whenever you
difficult driving conditions. start your vehicle. To help assist you with
StabiliTrak® activates when the computer senses directional control of the vehicle, you should
a discrepancy between your intended path always leave the system on. You can turn
and the direction the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak® off if you ever need to through the TC
StabiliTrak® selectively applies braking pressure (traction control) on/off button. See Traction
at any one of the vehicle’s brakes to help steer the Control System (TCS) (CTS) on page 295 or
vehicle in the direction which you are steering. Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS-V) on
page 297.

299
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the Steering
StabiliTrak® activates, the cruise control will
automatically disengage. When road conditions Power Steering
allow you to safely use it again, you may reengage
the cruise control. See Cruise Control on If you lose power steering assist because the
page 168 for more information. engine stops or the system is not functioning,
you can steer but it will take much more effort.
Panic Brake Assist Speed Variable Assist Steering
Your vehicle has a panic brake assist system that If your vehicle has this system, it varies the
monitors the intention of the driver while braking. amount of effort required to steer the vehicle in
If the system senses that the driver has applied relation to the speed of the vehicle.
hard/fast pressure to the brake pedal, the system The amount of steering effort required is less at
will generate additional pressure, making it slower speeds to make the vehicle more
easier for the driver to maintain brake application. maneuverable and easier to park. At faster
When this happens the brake pedal will feel speeds, the steering effort increases to provide a
easier to push. Just hold the brake pedal down sport-like feel to the steering. This provides
firmly and let the system work for you. You maximum control and stability.
may feel the brakes vibrate, or you may notice
some noise but this is normal. The brakes If your vehicle seems harder to steer than normal
will return to normal operation after the brake when parking or driving slowly, there may be a
pedal has been released. problem with the system. You will still have power
steering, but steering will be stiffer than normal
at slow speeds. See your dealer for service.

300
Steering Tips See Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS) on
page 295 or Traction Control System (TCS)
It is important to take curves at a reasonable (CTS-V) on page 297.
speed.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the
mentioned on the news happen on curves. way you want it to go, and slow down.
Here is why:
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted
subject to the same laws of physics when driving on speeds are based on good weather and road
curves. The traction of the tires against the road conditions. Under less favorable conditions you will
surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change want to go slower.
its path when you turn the front wheels. If there is
no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
same direction. If you have ever tried to steer a a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while
vehicle on wet ice, you will understand this. your front wheels are straight ahead.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”
the condition of your tires and the road surface, the through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady
angle at which the curve is banked, and your speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of
speed. While you are in a curve, speed is the one the curve, and then accelerate gently into
factor you can control. the straightaway.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve. Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
systems — steering and acceleration — have to Modifications on page 332.
do their work where the tires meet the road.
Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control.

301
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more
effective than braking. For example, you come
over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane,
or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or
a child darts out from between parked cars and
stops right in front of you. You can avoid
these problems by braking — if you can stop in
time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply your brakes.
An emergency like this requires close attention
See Braking on page 292. It is better to remove as
and a quick decision. If you are holding the
much speed as you can from a possible collision.
steering wheel at the recommended 9 and
Then steer around the problem, to the left or
3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full
right depending on the space available.
180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,
and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you
have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

302
Off-Road Recovery straddles the edge of the pavement. You can turn
the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn until
You may find that your right wheels have dropped the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down
you are driving. the roadway.

Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple
maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a
two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,
since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane
as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A
miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief
surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the passing driver face to face with the worst of all
the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
Ease off the accelerator and then, if there
is nothing in the way, steer so that your vehicle

303
So here are some tips for passing: Time your move so you will be increasing
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the speed as the time comes to move into
sides, and to crossroads for situations the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
that might affect your passing patterns. If you will have a running start that more than
have any doubt whatsoever about making makes up for the distance you would lose by
a successful pass, wait for a better time. dropping back. And if something happens
to cause you to cancel your pass, you need
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, only slow down and drop back again and wait
and lines. If you can see a sign up ahead for another opportunity.
that might indicate a turn or an intersection,
delay your pass. A broken center line • If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow
usually indicates it is all right to pass, providing vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that
the road ahead is clear. Never cross a solid someone is not trying to pass you as you
line on your side of the lane or a double solid pull out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember
line, even if the road seems empty of to glance over your shoulder and check
approaching traffic. the blind spot.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want • Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over
to pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. your shoulder, and start your left lane
For one thing, following too closely reduces change signal before moving out of the right
your area of vision, especially if you are lane to pass. When you are far enough ahead
following a larger vehicle. Also, you will not of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
have adequate space if the vehicle ahead vehicle’s inside mirror, activate the right
suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a lane change signal and move back into the
reasonable distance. right lane. Remember that your vehicle’s
passenger side outside mirror is convex. The
• When it looks like a chance to pass is vehicle you just passed may seem to be
coming up, start to accelerate but stay in farther away from you than it really is.
the right lane and do not get too close.
304
 • Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a Skidding
time on two-lane roads. Reconsider before
passing the next vehicle. In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and
rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are by not overdriving those conditions. But skids
not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting are always possible.
to turn.
The three types of skids correspond to your
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps your wheels are not rolling. In the steering or
you can ease a little to the right. cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a
curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.
Loss of Control And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle
causes the driving wheels to spin.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes, A cornering skid is best handled by easing your
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough foot off the accelerator pedal.
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the Remember: Any traction control system helps
driver has asked. avoid only the acceleration skid. If your traction
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to control system is off, then an acceleration
steer and constantly seek an escape route or skid is also best handled by easing your foot off
area of less danger. the accelerator pedal.

305
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off Competitive Driving
the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the
way you want the vehicle to go. If you start See your warranty book before using your vehicle
steering quickly enough, your vehicle may for competitive driving.
straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid Notice: If you use your vehicle for competitive
if it occurs. driving, the engine may use more oil than it
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, would with normal use. Low oil levels can
ice, gravel, or other material is on the road. damage the engine. Be sure to check the oil
For safety, you will want to slow down and adjust level often during competitive driving and keep
your driving to these conditions. It is important the level at or near the upper mark that
to slow down on slippery surfaces because shows the proper operating range on the
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control engine oil dipstick. For information on how to
more limited. add oil, see Engine Oil on page 346.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or Driving at Night
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could
One reason is that some drivers are likely to
cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the
be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night
surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.
vision problems, or by fatigue.
Learn to recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to Here are some tips on night driving.
make a mirrored surface — and slow down when • Drive defensively.
you have any doubt.
• Do not drink and drive.
Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
helps avoid only the braking skid. • Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.

306
 • Since you cannot see as well, you may need You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
to slow down and keep more space between headlamps. It can take a second or two, or
you and other vehicles. even several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,
as from a driver who does not lower the high
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so
beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,
much road ahead.
slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into
• In remote areas, watch for animals. the approaching headlamps.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe Keep the windshield and all the glass on your
place and rest. vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even
But as we get older these differences increase. the inside of the glass can build up a film caused
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and
much light to see the same thing at night as a flash more than clean glass would, making the
20-year-old. pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
night vision. For example, if you spend the roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
adjusting to night. But if you are driving, do not checked regularly for proper aim, so should your
wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer
glare from headlamps, but they also make a from night blindness — the inability to see in dim
lot of things invisible. light — and are not even aware of it.

307
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.
Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good
shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see
road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,
the edge of the road, and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment
in good shape and keep your windshield washer
fluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your
windshield wiper inserts when they show signs
of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or
when strips of rubber start to separate from the
inserts.

{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They
may not work as well in a quick stop and
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble.
may cause pulling to one side. You could
On a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn
as well because your tire-to-road traction is not lose control of the vehicle.
as good as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not After driving through a large puddle of
have much tread left, you will get even less water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal
traction. It is always wise to go slower and be lightly until your brakes work normally.
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving.
The surface may get wet suddenly when your
reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
308
Driving too fast through large water puddles or Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
even going through some car washes can cause There just is not a hard and fast rule about
problems, too. The water may affect your brakes. hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down
Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow when it is raining.
down before you hit them.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Hydroplaning
Notice: If you drive too quickly through
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can deep puddles or standing water, water can
build up under your tires that they can actually ride come in through your engine’s air intake and
on the water. This can happen if the road is wet badly damage your engine. Never drive through
enough and you are going fast enough. When your water that is slightly lower than the underbody
vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact of your vehicle. If you cannot avoid deep
with the road. puddles or standing water, drive through them
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if very slowly.
your tires do not have much tread or if the
pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a
lot of water is standing on the road. If you can
see reflections from trees, telephone poles,
or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’s
surface, there could be hydroplaning.

309
Driving Through Flowing Water City Driving

{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you might at a low water
crossing, your vehicle can be carried away.
As little as six inches of flowing water can
carry away a smaller vehicle. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warning
signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips

One of the biggest problems with city streets is
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra the amount of traffic on them. You will want
following distance. And be especially careful to watch out for what the other drivers are doing
when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself and pay attention to traffic signals.
more clear room ahead, and be prepared to
have your view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See
Tires on page 392.

310
Here are ways to increase your safety in city Freeway Driving
driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip
into an unknown part of the city just as you
would for a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and
energy. See Freeway Driving on page 311.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A
traffic light is there because the corner is
busy enough to need it. When a light turns
green, and just before you start to move,
check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,

parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
superhighways — are the safest of all roads. But
they have their own special rules.

311
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Once you are moving on the freeway, make
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. certain you allow a reasonable following distance.
Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers Expect to move slightly slower at night.
are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks
a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
a freeway as a passing lane. proper lane well in advance. If you miss your
exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads back up. Drive on to the next exit.
to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the
freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite
should begin to check traffic. Try to determine sharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce
where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to your speed according to your speedometer, not
merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed. to your sense of motion. After driving for any
Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, and distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think
glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. you are going slower than you actually are.
Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed Before Leaving on a Long Trip
to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If
is slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want you must start when you are not fresh — such
to pass. as after a day’s work — do not plan to make too
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then many miles that first part of the journey. Wear
use your turn signal. comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily
drive in.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly
over your shoulder to make sure there is not
another vehicle in your blind spot.

312
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it Highway Hypnosis
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it
needs service, have it done before starting out. Of Is there actually such a condition as highway
course, you will find experienced and able hypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the
service experts in GM dealerships all across North wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of
America. They will be ready and willing to help awareness, or whatever.
if you need it. There is something about an easy stretch of road
Here are some things you can check before a trip: with the same scenery, along with the hum of the
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the
rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make
full? Are all windows clean inside and outside?
you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape? your vehicle can leave the road in less than a
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you second, and you could crash and be injured.
checked all levels? What can you do about highway hypnosis? First,
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses be aware that it can happen.
clean? Then here are some tips:
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, • Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough a comfortably cool interior.
for long-distance driving? Are the tires
all inflated to the recommended pressure?
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather and your instruments frequently.
outlook along your route? Should you
delay your trip a short time to avoid a major
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
storm system? service, or parking area and take a nap, get
some exercise, or both. For safety, treat
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps? drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

313
Hill and Mountain Roads If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that
can make your trips safer and more enjoyable.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check
all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,
cooling system, and transmission. These parts
can work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes
could get so hot that they would not work
well. You would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let your engine assist
your brakes on a steep downhill slope.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different
from driving in flat or rolling terrain.

314
 • Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
{CAUTION: or cut across the center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes
could be something in your lane, like a stalled
will have to do all the work of slowing car or an accident.
down. They could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would then have
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
poor braking or even none going down a
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling
hill. You could crash. Always have your rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these
engine running and your vehicle in gear and take appropriate action.
when you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most important

thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when
you go down a steep or long hill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift
down to a lower gear. The lower gears help
cool your engine and transmission, and you can
climb the hill better.

315
Winter Driving

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a

supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some
Here are some tips for winter driving: winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter. red cloth, and a couple of reflective warning
triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe
• You may want to put winter emergency conditions, include a small bag of sand, a
supplies in your trunk. piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to
Also see Tires on page 392. help provide traction. Be sure you properly
secure these items in your vehicle.

316
Driving on Snow or Ice What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.
Most of the time, those places where the tires But wet ice can be even more trouble because it
meet the road probably have good traction. may offer the least traction of all. You can get
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires wet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and
and the road, you can have a very slippery freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving
situation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip, on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
and will need to be very careful. Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,
blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.
Traction control improves your ability to accelerate
when driving on a slippery road. Even though
your vehicle has the Traction Control System
(TCS), you will want to slow down and adjust your
driving to the road conditions. Under certain
conditions, you may want to turn the TCS off, such
as when driving through deep snow and loose
gravel, to help maintain vehicle motion at
lower speeds. See Traction Control System (TCS)
(CTS) on page 295 or Traction Control System
(TCS) (CTS-V) on page 297. Also see StabiliTrak®
System on page 299, If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 320 and “Winter
Tires” under Tires on page 392.

317
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves your If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop
on a slippery road. Even though you have ABS, If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in
you will want to begin stopping sooner than a serious situation. You should probably stay
you would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you
System (ABS) on page 293. are near help and you can hike through the
snow. Here are some things to do to summon
• Allow greater following distance on any help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:
slippery road.
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be
fine until you hit a spot that is covered with • Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police
ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches that you have been stopped by the snow.
may appear in shaded areas where the • Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket
sun cannot reach, such as around clumps of around you. If you do not have blankets
trees, behind buildings, or under bridges. or extra clothing, make body insulators from
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
overpass may remain icy when the mats — anything you can wrap around
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a yourself or tuck under your clothing to
patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you keep warm.
are on it. Try not to brake while you are
actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.

318
 {CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO
(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
could overcome you and kill you. You
cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away
snow from around the base of your
vehicle, especially any that is blocking
your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow
does not collect there.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be Open a window just a little on the side of
careful. the vehicle that is away from the wind.
This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. This

saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a
little faster than just idle. That is, push the
accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the
heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged.

319
You will need a well-charged battery to restart the
vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while. {CAUTION:
Then, shut the engine off and close the window
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start
the engine again and repeat this only when you speed, they can explode, and you or
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as others could be injured. And, the
little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as transmission or other parts of the vehicle
you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of can overheat. That could cause an engine
the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises compartment fire or other damage. When
every half hour or so until help comes. you are stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Do not spin the wheels above
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
Mud, Ice, or Snow speedometer.

In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you

will need to spin the wheels, but you do not Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy parts
want to spin your wheels too fast. The method of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you
known as rocking can help you get out when you spin the wheels too fast while shifting
are stuck, but you must use caution. the transmission back and forth, you can
destroy the transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 418.

320
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn the steering wheel left and right. It is very important to know how much weight your
That will clear the area around the front wheels. vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
You should turn the traction control system capacity weight and includes the weight of all
off. See Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS) on occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
page 295 or Traction Control System (TCS) options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
(CTS-V) on page 297. Then shift back and forth weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, Information label, and the Certification label.
or with a manual transmission, between FIRST (1)
or SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R), spinning
the wheels as little as possible. Release the {CAUTION:
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly
on the accelerator pedal when the transmission Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
is in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels in the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
the forward and reverse directions, you will cause
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If
that does not get your vehicle out after a few tries, Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
it may need to be towed out. If your vehicle parts on your vehicle can break, and it
does need to be towed out, see Towing Your can change the way your vehicle handles.
Vehicle on page 326. These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.

321
Tire and Loading Information Label The Tire and Loading Information label also
shows the tire size of the original equipment
tires (C) and the recommended cold tire inflation
pressures (D). For more information on tires
and inflation see Tires on page 392 and
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 402.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see
“Certification Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
Example Label 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar placard.
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
find the label attached below the door lock post and passengers that will be riding in your
(striker). The tire and loading information label vehicle.
shows the number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum vehicle 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds. and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

322
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Example 1
Step 4. Item Description Total
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load Vehicle Capacity
A 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
from your trailer will be transferred to your Weight for Example 1 =
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how Subtract
this reduces the available cargo and luggage B Occupant Weight 300 lbs (136 kg)
load capacity of your vehicle. 150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
Your vehicle is not designed nor intended to C
and Cargo Weight =
700 lbs (317 kg)
tow any trailer.

323
 Example 2 Example 3
Item Description Total Item Description Total
A Vehicle Capacity 1,000 lbs (453 kg) A Vehicle Capacity 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Weight for Example 2 = Weight for Example 3 =
Subtract Subtract
B Occupant Weight 750 lbs (340 kg) B Occupant Weight 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = 200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =
C Available Cargo 250 lbs (113 kg) C Available Cargo 0 lbs (0 kg)
Weight = Weight =

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading

Information label for specific information about
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s capacity weight.

324
Certification Label
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.

A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
either the driver’s door edge or the lower center damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
pillar on the driver’s side of the vehicle. This label warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
shows the gross weight capacity of your vehicle,
called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
all occupants, fuel, and cargo. The Certification
label also shows the maximum weights for
the front and rear axles, called the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). Never exceed the GVWR
or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle.

325
If you put things inside your vehicle, like suitcases, Towing
tools, packages, or anything else, they will go as
fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going. Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle
{CAUTION: towed. See Roadside Service on page 488.

Things you put inside your vehicle can If you want to tow your vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
a motorhome), see Recreational Vehicle Towing
or turn, or in a crash.
following.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.
In a trunk, put them as far forward as
you can. Try to spread the weight Recreational Vehicle Towing
evenly. Recreational vehicle towing means towing your
• Never stack heavier things, like vehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind a
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that motorhome. The two most common types of
some of them are above the tops of the recreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghy
seats. towing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheels
• Do not leave an unsecured child on the ground) and “dolly towing” (towing
restraint in your vehicle. your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
• When you carry something inside the two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.

326
With the proper preparation and equipment, many Dinghy Towing
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See
“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following. Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground, the drivetrain
Here are some important things to consider before components could be damaged. The repairs
you do recreational vehicle towing: would not be covered by your warranty. Do not
• What is the towing capacity of the towing tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the
vehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehicle ground.
manufacturer’s recommendations.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have all four wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must
restrictions on how far and how long they be towed, you should use a dolly. See “Dolly
can tow. Towing” following for more information.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as
you would prepare your vehicle for a long
trip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on
a Long Trip on page 312.

327
Dolly Towing 4. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
5. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for
towing.
6. Release the parking brake.

Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to
tow any trailer.

Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow

your vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
1. Put the rear wheels on the dolly.
2. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the
tow vehicle.
3. Put the vehicle in PARK (P) for an automatic
transmission or in NEUTRAL for a manual
transmission.
328
 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
Service ........................................................ 332 Engine Coolant .......................................... 357
Accessories and Modifications ................... 332 Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............ 360
California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 333 Engine Overheating ................................... 360
Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 333 Overheated Engine Protection
Adding Equipment to the Operating Mode ..................................... 363
Outside of Your Vehicle ......................... 334 Cooling System ......................................... 364
Fuel ............................................................. 334 Power Steering Fluid ................................. 369
Gasoline Octane ........................................ 334 Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 370
Gasoline Specifications .............................. 335 Brakes ...................................................... 372
California Fuel ........................................... 336 Battery ...................................................... 376
Additives ................................................... 336 Jump Starting ............................................ 377
Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 337 Rear Axle .................................................... 383
Filling the Tank ......................................... 338 Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 384
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 340
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 387
Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 340 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ..... 387
Hood Release ........................................... 341 Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 387
Engine Compartment Overview .................. 342 Front Turn Signal and Fog Lamps ............. 388
Engine Oil ................................................. 346 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Engine Oil Life System .............................. 350 Sidemarker Lamps ................................. 388
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 352 Back-Up and License Plate Lamps ............ 389
Automatic Transmission Fluid .................... 353 Replacement Bulbs ................................... 390
Manual Transmission Fluid ........................ 355
Hydraulic Clutch ........................................ 356 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 390

329
 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
Tires ............................................................ 392 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
Winter Tires .............................................. 393 (CTS Only) ............................................ 433
Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 394 Compact Spare Tire (CTS Only) ................ 434
Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 397 Appearance Care ........................................ 435
Run-Flat Tires (CTS-V) .............................. 400 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 435
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 402 Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 437
High-Speed Operation ............................... 404 Leather ...................................................... 438
Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 405 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 409 Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 438
When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 411 Wood Panels ............................................. 439
Buying New Tires ...................................... 411 Speaker Covers ........................................ 439
Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 414 Care of Safety Belts .................................. 439
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 414 Weatherstrips ............................................ 439
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 416 Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 439
Wheel Replacement .................................. 416 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 440
Tire Chains ............................................... 418 Finish Care ............................................... 440
Lifting Your Vehicle (CTS-V) ...................... 418 Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 441
If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 422 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ......... 441
Changing a Flat Tire (CTS Only) ............... 424 Tires ......................................................... 442
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 442
(CTS Only) ............................................ 425 Finish Damage .......................................... 442
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Underbody Maintenance ............................ 443
Spare Tire (CTS Only) ........................... 427 Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 443
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 444

330
 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
Vehicle Identification .................................. 445 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 447
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 445 Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 447
Service Parts Identification Label ............... 445 Rear Underseat Fuse Block ....................... 451
Electrical System ........................................ 446 Capacities and Specifications .................... 457
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 446
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 446
Power Windows and Other Power
Options .................................................. 446

331
Service Accessories and Modifications
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle
you to be happy with it. We hope you will go they can affect your vehicle’s performance and
to your dealer for all your service needs. You safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
will get genuine GM parts and GM-trained stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
and supported service people. aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems
like anti-lock brakes, traction control and stability
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all
control. Some of these accessories may even
GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
cause malfunction or damage not covered by
warranty.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle.
Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories. When you go to
your GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,
you will know that GM-trained and supported
service technicians will perform the work using
genuine GM Accessories.

332
California Proposition 65 Warning
CAUTION: (Continued)
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain
and/or emit chemicals known to the State of • Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other and other fasteners. English and
reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and metric fasteners can be easily
systems (including some inside the vehicle), many confused. If you use the wrong
fluids, and some component wear by-products fasteners, parts can later break or fall
contain and/or emit these chemicals. off. You could be hurt.

Doing Your Own Service Work

If you want to do some of your own service work,
you will want to use the proper service manual.
It tells you much more about how to service your
{CAUTION: vehicle than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service Publications
You can be injured and your vehicle could Ordering Information on page 501.
be damaged if you try to do service work
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
on a vehicle without knowing enough attempting to do your own service work, see
about it. Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, page 84.
experience, the proper replacement
parts, and tools before you attempt any You should keep a record with all parts receipts
vehicle maintenance task. and list the mileage and the date of any service
work you perform. See Maintenance Record
CAUTION: (Continued) on page 478.

333
Adding Equipment to the Gasoline Octane
Outside of Your Vehicle If your vehicle has the 2.8L V6 engine
Things you might add to the outside of your (VIN Code T), use regular unleaded gasoline
vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher. If the
cause wind noise and affect windshield washer octane rating is less than 87, you may notice
performance. Check with your dealer before an audible knocking noise when you drive,
adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle. commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
as soon as possible. If you are using gasoline
Fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part knocking, your engine needs service.
of the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine
help keep your engine clean and maintain optimum (VIN Code 7), use regular unleaded gasoline
vehicle performance, GM recommends the use with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher. For
of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent best performance or trailer towing, you may
Gasoline. choose to use middle grade 89 octane unleaded
The 8th digit of your Vehicle Identification Number gasoline. If the octane rating is less than 87,
(VIN) shows the code letter or number that you may notice an audible knocking noise when
identifies your engine. You will find the VIN at you drive, commonly referred to as spark knock.
the top left of the instrument panel. See Vehicle If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane
Identification Number (VIN) on page 445. or higher as soon as possible. If you are using
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear
heavy knocking, your engine needs service.

334
If your vehicle has the 6.0L V8 engine Gasoline Specifications
(VIN Code U), use premium unleaded gasoline
with a posted octane rating of 91 or higher. At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
You may also use regular unleaded gasoline specification D 4814 in the United States or
rated at 87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’s CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
acceleration may be slightly reduced, and you may contain an octane-enhancing additive called
notice a slight audible knocking noise, commonly methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
referred to as spark knock. If the octane is (MMT). General Motors recommends against the
less than 87, you may notice a heavy knocking use of gasolines containing MMT. See Additives
noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline on page 336 for additional information.
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.
Otherwise, you might damage your engine. If
you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
and you hear heavy knocking, your engine
needs service.

335
California Fuel Additives
If your vehicle is certified to meet California To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United
Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate States are now required to contain additives that
on fuels that meet California specifications. will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits
See the underhood emission control label. If this from forming, allowing your emission control system
fuel is not available in states adopting California to work properly. In most cases, you should not
emissions standards, your vehicle will operate have to add anything to your fuel. However, some
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal gasolines contain only the minimum amount of
specifications, but emission control system additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
performance may be affected. The malfunction Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel
indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may injectors and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle
fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator experiences problems due to dirty injectors or
Lamp on page 202. If this occurs, return to valves, look for gasoline that is advertised as
your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your GM
determined that the condition is caused by the dealer has additives that will help correct and
type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by prevent most deposit-related problems.
your warranty.

336
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may emissions may contain an octane-enhancing
be available in your area. General Motors additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
recommends that you use these gasolines if they tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy
comply with the specifications described earlier. gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels Motors recommends against the use of such
containing more than 10% ethanol must not be gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce the
used in vehicles that were not designed for life of spark plugs and the performance of the
those fuels. emission control system may be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If this
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
fuel that contains methanol. Do not use service.
fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal
parts in your fuel system and also damage
the plastic and rubber parts. That damage Fuels in Foreign Countries
would not be covered under your warranty. If you plan on driving in another country outside
the United States or Canada, the proper fuel may
be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or
any other fuel not recommended in the previous
text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of
improper fuel would not be covered by your
warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business
in the country where you will be driving.

337
Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire
can cause bad injuries. To help avoid
injuries to you and others, read and follow
all the instructions on the pump island.
Turn off your engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep
sparks, flames, and smoking materials
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel
fuel door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
pump unattended when refueling your To open the fuel door, push inward on the forward
vehicle. This is against the law in some edge of the fuel door until the rear edge can be
places. Keep children away from the fuel pulled outward.
pump; never let children pump fuel.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly
counterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it; if
the cap is released too soon, it will spring back
to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from
the hook on the fuel door.

338
 The Check Gas Cap message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) will be displayed if the
{CAUTION: fuel cap is not properly installed. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 228 for more
If you spill fuel and then something information.
ignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel
can spray out on you if you open the fuel
cap too quickly. This spray can happen if {CAUTION:
your tank is nearly full, and is more likely
in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly If a fire starts while you are refueling, do
and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow
unscrew the cap all the way. of fuel by shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant. Leave the
area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill
the tank and wait a few seconds after you have
finished pumping before removing the nozzle. Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to
Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon get the right type. Your dealer can get one
as possible. See Washing Your Vehicle on for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not
page 439. fit properly. This may cause your malfunction
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until indicator lamp to light and may damage
it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. your fuel tank and emissions system. See
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 202.
cap has been left off or improperly installed.
This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 202.
339
Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while
{CAUTION:
it is in your vehicle. Static electricity
An electric fan under the hood can start up
discharge from the container can ignite
and injure you even when the engine is not
the gasoline vapor. You can be badly
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
burned and your vehicle damaged if this
away from any underhood electric fan.
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and
others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside
{CAUTION:
a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup
bed, or on any surface other than the Things that burn can get on hot engine
ground. parts and start a fire. These include
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,
the inside of the fill opening before windshield washer and other fluids, and
operating the nozzle. Contact should plastic or rubber. You or others could be
be maintained until the filling is burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
complete. things that will burn onto a hot engine.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

340
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood
release lever with
this symbol on
it. It is located inside
the vehicle on the
lower left side of the
instrument panel.

CTS shown, CTS-V similar

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find

the secondary hood release lever. The lever
is located under the front edge of the
grille near the center. Move the release lever
to the side and raise the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Then pull the hood down and
close it firmly.

341
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 3.6L V6 engine (2.8L V6 engine similar), you will see the following:

342
A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse G. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See
Block on page 447. “Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on
B. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See page 346.
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Washer Fluid on page 370. Fluid” under Brakes on page 372.
C. Battery. See Battery on page 376. I. Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir (If Equipped)
D. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See (Not Shown). See “When to Check and What
Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 186. to Use” under Hydraulic Clutch on page 356.
E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Under J. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
Engine Cover). See Power Steering Fluid on See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on
page 369. page 360 and Cooling System on page 364.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Oil” under Engine Oil on page 346. Cleaner/Filter on page 352.

343
When you open the hood on the 6.0L V8 CTS-V, you will see the following:

344
A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power
Block on page 447. Steering Fluid on page 369.
B. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield Fluid” under Brakes on page 372.
Washer Fluid on page 370. I. Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir. See “When to
C. Battery. See Battery on page 376. Check and What to Use” under Hydraulic
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil” Clutch on page 356.
under Engine Oil on page 346. J. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
E. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on
Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 186. page 360 and Cooling System on page 364.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 346. Cleaner/Filter on page 352.

345
Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time
There is an oil pressure you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,
light in the instrument the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be
cluster and an Oil on level ground.
Pressure Low - Stop
Engine message on The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
the Driver Information See Engine Compartment Overview on page 342
Center (DIC). for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several
minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you
If the light and/or message appear, it means you do not do this, the oil dipstick might not
need to check the engine oil level right away. show the actual level.
For more information, see “Oil Pressure Low - Stop 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper
Engine” under DIC Warnings and Messages on towel or cloth, then push it back in all the
page 228 and Oil Pressure Light on page 206. You way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,
should check the engine oil level regularly; this and check the level.
is an added reminder.

346
When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the
tip of the dipstick, you will need to add at least
one quart/liter of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This section explains what kind of oil
to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity,
see Capacities and Specifications on page 457.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper
operating range, the engine could be damaged.

See Engine
V6 Engines Compartment Overview
on page 342 for the
location of the engine
oil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the level

somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the
V8 Engine dipstick all the way back in when you are through.

347
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Look for two things:
• GM4718M
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil
meeting GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting
this standard may be identified as synthetic.
However, not all synthetic oils will meet this GM
standard. You should look for and use only an
oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
Notice: If you use oils that do not have the
GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is
best for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other
viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

348
 Oils meeting these Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
requirements should engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard
also have the starburst GM4718M may not be available. You can add
symbol on the substitute oil designated SAE 5W-30 with
container. This symbol the starburst symbol at all temperatures. Substitute
indicates that the oil oil not meeting GM Standard GM4718M should
has been certified by the not be used for an oil change.
American Petroleum
Institute (API). Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM
You should look for this on the oil container, and standards are all you will need for good
use only those oils that are identified as meeting performance and engine protection.
GM Standard GM4718M and have the starburst
symbol on the front of the oil container.
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory
with a Mobil 1® synthetic oil, which meets all
requirements for your vehicle.

349
Engine Oil Life System If the system is ever reset accidentally, you
must change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
When to Change Engine Oil since your last oil change. Remember to reset the
oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you
know when to change the engine oil and filter. How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
This is based on engine revolutions and engine System and the Oil Life Indicator
temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving
conditions, the mileage at which an oil change The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to
will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle
life system to work properly, you must reset the use. Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system
system every time the oil is changed. so it can calculate when the next oil change is
required. If a situation occurs where you change
When the system has calculated that oil life has your oil prior to a change engine oil message in the
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change DIC being turned on, reset the system.
is necessary. A change engine oil message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) will come on.
Change your oil as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system
may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for
over a year. However, your engine oil and filter
must be changed at least once a year and at this
time the system must be reset. Your dealer has
GM-trained service people who will perform this
work using genuine GM parts and reset the system.
It is also important to check your oil regularly and
keep it at the proper level.

350
After the oil has been changed, the change engine Navigation System
oil message and the oil life indicator must be
If you have the navigation system, see “Vehicle
reset. To reset the message and indicator, use
Customization” in the Navigation System Manual
one of the following procedures:
for how to reset the oil life indicator.
Base Audio System
What to Do with Used Oil
Press the CLR button located to the right of the
DIC display to acknowledge the change engine oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that may
message. This will clear the message from the be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause
display and reset it. cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very
long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
To reset the oil life indicator, use the water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly
following steps: dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine
1. Press the up or down arrow on the INFO oil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use
button located to the right of the DIC and disposal of oil products.
display to access the DIC menu. Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
2. Once XXX% ENGINE OIL LIFE menu item is change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from
highlighted, press and hold the CLR button. the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by
The percentage will return to 100, and putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
the oil life indicator will be reset. Repeat the sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
steps if the percentage does not return to 100. recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used
oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your
3. Turn the key to OFF. used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local
If the change engine oil message comes back on recycling center for help.
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life
system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.

351
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change
after each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See
Scheduled Maintenance on page 463 for more
information. If you are driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil
change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to
CTS shown, CTS-V similar release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains
caked with dirt, a new filter is required.
The engine air cleaner/filter is in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle, To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,
near the front. See Engine Compartment Overview do the following:
on page 342 for more information on location. 1. Remove the two screws located on the sides
of the cover.
2. Lift the cover off.

352
 3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter. Automatic Transmission Fluid
See Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 476 for the correct part number It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid
for the filter. level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for
fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to your
4. Reinstall the cover by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
GM dealer service department and have it repaired
as soon as possible.
{CAUTION: Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services on page 466, and
Operating the engine with the air be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 474.
cleaner/filter off can cause you or others
to be burned. The air cleaner not only Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic
cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if transmission fluid may damage your vehicle,
the engine backfires. If it is not there and the damages may not be covered by
and the engine backfires, you could be your warranty. Always use the automatic
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 474.
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire

can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into your engine, which will
damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in
place when you are driving.

353
How to Reset the Change Transmission To reset the transmission fluid life indicator, use
Fluid Message and the Transmission the following steps:
Fluid Indicator 1. Press the up or down arrow on the INFO
(Information) button located to the right of
After the transmission fluid has been changed, the the DIC display to access the DIC menu.
Change Trans Fluid message and the transmission
2. Once the XXX% TRANS FLUID LIFE menu
fluid life indicator must be reset. To reset the
item is highlighted, press and hold the
message and indicator, use one of the following
CLR button.
procedures:
The percentage will return to 100, and the
Base Audio System transmission fluid life indicator will be reset.
Press the CLR (Clear) button located to the right 3. Repeat the steps if the percentage does not
of the Driver Information Center (DIC) display return to 100.
to acknowledge the CHANGE TRANS FLUID
message. This will clear the message from the Navigation System
display and reset it. If your vehicle has a navigation system, see your
Navigation System Manual for instructions on
how to acknowledge the Change Trans Fluid
message and reset the transmission fluid
life indicator.

354
Manual Transmission Fluid Check the fluid level only when your engine is off,
the vehicle is parked on a level place and the
When to Check Manual Transmission transmission is cool enough for you to rest your
Fluid fingers on the transmission case.
It is not necessary to check the manual To check the fluid level, do the following:
transmission fluid level. A transmission fluid leak 1. Remove the filler plug.
is the only reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs,
2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the
take the vehicle to your GM dealer service
bottom of the filler plug hole.
department and have it repaired as soon as
possible. 3. If the fluid level is good and your vehicle is a
CTS, replace the gasket and reinstall the filler
How to Check Manual Transmission plug. If the fluid level is good and your
Fluid vehicle is a CTS-V, apply LOCTITE ® #516 or
Because this operation can be difficult, you may equivalent sealant to the threads and then
choose to have this done at your GM dealer reinstall the filler plug.
service department. With either vehicle, be sure the plug is fully
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the seated. If the fluid level is low, add more fluid
instructions here, or you could get a false reading. as described in the next steps.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can
damage your transmission. Too much can
mean that some of the fluid could come out
and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system
parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could
cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure to
get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
355
How to Add Manual Transmission Fluid When to Check and What to Use
Here is how to add fluid. See Recommended The hydraulic clutch fluid
Fluids and Lubricants on page 474 to determine reservoir cap has this
which type of fluid to use. symbol on it. See Engine
1. Remove the filler plug. Compartment Overview
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only on page 342 for
enough fluid to bring the fluid level up to reservoir location.
the bottom of the filler plug hole.
3. If your vehicle is a CTS, replace the gasket
and reinstall the filler plug. If your vehicle is a
CTS-V, apply LOCTITE ® #516 or equivalent
sealant to the threads and then reinstall
the filler plug. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often you should check the fluid level in
Again, with either vehicle, be sure the plug is your clutch master cylinder reservoir and for the
fully seated. proper fluid to use. See Owner Checks and
Services on page 469 and Recommended Fluids
Hydraulic Clutch and Lubricants on page 474.
It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid How to Check and Add Fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system.
Adding fluid will not correct a leak. Make sure the fluid level is at the MIN (Minimum)
line on the side of the reservoir. If it is not,
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a remove the cap and add the proper fluid until the
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired. level reaches the MIN line.

356
Engine Coolant A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with • Give freezing protection down
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is
to −34°F (−37°C).
designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or
150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs • Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
first, if you add only DEX-COOL® extended • Protect against rust and corrosion.
life coolant.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
The following explains your cooling system and
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
how to add coolant when it is low. If you have
should.
a problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 360. Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant may require changing sooner, at
the first maintenance service after each
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.

357
What to Use Notice: If you use an improper coolant
mixture, your engine could overheat and be
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water badly damaged. The repair cost would not be
and one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will covered by your warranty. Too much water
not damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,
mixture, you do not need to add anything else. radiator, heater core, and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than once or
{CAUTION: twice a year, have your dealer check your cooling
system.
Adding only plain water to your cooling Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or additives in your vehicle’s cooling system, you
some other liquid such as alcohol, can could damage your vehicle. Use only the
boil before the proper coolant mixture will. proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is this manual for the cooling system. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
page 474 for more information.
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

358
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when
the engine and radiator are hot can allow
steam and scalding liquids to blow out
and burn you badly. Never turn the surge
tank pressure cap — even a little — when
the engine and radiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. When

your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
the FULL COLD/FROID line on the side of the
surge tank. Follow the arrow from the top of
The coolant surge tank and pressure cap are the tank down the side to the horizontal mark.
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle, toward
the rear of the engine compartment. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 342 for
more information on location.

359
Adding Coolant Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
If you need more coolant, add the proper
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the surge tank,
installed, coolant loss and possible engine
but only when the engine is cool.
damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
{CAUTION: The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
You can be burned if you spill coolant Compartment Overview on page 342 for more
information on location.
on hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill Engine Overheating
coolant on a hot engine. There are two engine hot messages that may be
displayed in the Driver Information Center
(DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages on
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
page 228 for more information.
hand-tight and fully seated.

360
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine Notice: If your engine catches fire because
you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle
can be badly damaged. The costly repairs
{CAUTION: would not be covered by your warranty. See
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode
on page 363 for information on driving to a
Steam from an overheated engine can safe place in an emergency.
burn you badly, even if you just open the
hood. Stay away from the engine if you
see or hear steam coming from it. Turn it
off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant
before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when the vehicles
engine is overheated, the liquids in it can
catch fire. You or others could be badly
burned. Stop your engine if it overheats,
and get out of the vehicle until the engine
is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 363 for
information on driving to a safe place in
an emergency.

361
If No Steam Is Coming From Your If you get the Engine Coolant Hot − Idle Engine
Engine warning with no sign of steam, try this for a minute
or so:
An Engine Coolant Hot − Idle Engine warning, 1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in
along with a low coolant, can indicate a serious NEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe to
problem. do so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P)
If you get an Engine Coolant Hot − Idle Engine or NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.
warning, but see or hear no steam, the problem 2. Set the climate controls to the highest heat
may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can setting and fan speed and open the windows,
get a little too hot as necessary.
when you:
If you no longer have the Engine Coolant Hot − Idle
• Climb a long hill on a hot day. Engine warning, you can drive. Just to be safe,
• Stop after high-speed driving. drive slower for about 10 minutes. If the warning
• Idle for long periods in traffic. does not come back on, you can drive normally.
• Tow a trailer.

362
If the warning continues and you have not Overheated Engine Protection
stopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle
right away. Operating Mode
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the This operating mode allows your vehicle to be
engine for three minutes while you are parked. driven to a safe place in an emergency. Should an
If you still have the warning, turn off the engine hot engine condition exist, an overheat protection
and get everyone out of the vehicle until it mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders
cools down. helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
you will notice a loss in power and engine
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get
performance. Driving extended miles (km) and/or
service help right away.
towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode
should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine
damage, allow the engine to cool before
attempting any repair. The engine oil will be
severely degraded. Repair the cause of coolant
loss and change the oil. See Engine Oil on
page 346.

363
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is {CAUTION:
what you will see:
An electric engine cooling fan under the
hood can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is

boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
If the engine is warm or hot, the coolant level
should be at or above the FULL COLD/FROID line
on the side of the coolant surge tank. If the
engine is cold, the coolant level should be near
3.6L V6 Engine shown, 2.8L V6 and 6.0L V8
Engines similar the FULL COLD/FROID line on the side of
the coolant surge tank. If it is not, you may have
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses,
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere
else in the cooling system.

364
 Notice: Engine damage from running your
engine without coolant is not covered by your
{CAUTION: warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 363 for information on
Heater and radiator hoses, and other driving to a safe place in an emergency.
engine parts, can be very hot. Do not
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
touch them. If you do, you can be burned.
may cause premature engine, heater core or
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant may require changing sooner, at
coolant. That could cause an engine fire, 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
and you could be burned. Get any leak whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
fixed before you drive the vehicle. be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,
check to see if the electric engine cooling fans
are running. If the engine hot light is on, both fans
should be running. If they are not, your vehicle
needs service.

365
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank {CAUTION:
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see
if coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant Steam and scalding liquids from a hot
is visible but the coolant level is not at the FULL cooling system can blow out and burn
COLD/FROID line on the side of the coolant you badly. They are under pressure, and if
surge tank, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable you turn the coolant surge tank pressure
water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant cap — even a little — they can come out at
surge tank, but be sure the cooling system, high speed. Never turn the cap when the
including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is
cooling system, including the coolant
cool before you do it. See Engine Coolant on
page 357 for more information. surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for
the cooling system and coolant surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.

366
 {CAUTION: {CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling You can be burned if you spill coolant
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or on hot engine parts. Coolant contains
some other liquid such as alcohol, can ethylene glycol and it will burn if the
boil before the proper coolant mixture will. engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is coolant on a hot engine.
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add
engine could get too hot but you would coolant as follows:
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could 1. You can remove the coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the cooling system,
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
including the coolant surge tank pressure cap
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant. and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and about one-quarter turn and then stop.
crack the engine, radiator, heater core and If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
other parts. Use the recommended coolant and means there is still some pressure left.
the proper coolant mixture.

367
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, 3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
and remove it. mixture, to slightly above the FULL
COLD/FROID line on the side of the coolant
surge tank.

368
 4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, Power Steering Fluid
start the engine and let it run until you can
feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. The See Engine
upper radiator hose is the top hose coming Compartment Overview
out of the radiator, on the passenger’s side of on page 342 for the
the vehicle. Watch out for the engine location of the power
cooling fans. steering fluid reservoir.
By this time, the coolant level inside the
coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level is
lower, add more of the proper mixture to the
coolant surge tank until the level reaches
the FULL COLD/FROID line on the side of the
coolant surge tank.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the When to Check Power Steering Fluid
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
It is not necessary to regularly check power
Recheck the coolant level in the bottle, the next
steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in
time you use your vehicle to insure the system is
the system or you hear an unusual noise. A
full when cold. See Engine Coolant on page 357.
fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.

369
How to Check Power Steering Fluid What to Use
To check the power steering fluid, do the following: To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
1. Turn the key off and let the engine Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 474.
compartment cool down. Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the
proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir and seals.
clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a Windshield Washer Fluid
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. What to Use
5. Remove the cap again and look at the When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure
fluid level on the dipstick. to read the manufacturer’s instructions before
use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
where the temperature may fall below freezing,
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level
use a fluid that has sufficient protection against
up to the mark.
freezing.

370
Adding Washer Fluid Notice:
The CHECK WASHER FLUID message will • When using concentrated washer fluid,
appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC) follow the manufacturer’s instructions
when the fluid level is low. See DIC Warnings and for adding water.
Messages on page 228 for more information. • Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to
Open the cap with the freeze and damage your washer fluid tank
washer symbol on it. and other parts of the washer system.
Add washer fluid Also, water does not clean as well
until the tank is full. See as washer fluid.
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 342
• Fill your washer fluid tank only
for reservoir location. three-quarters full when it is very cold.
This allows for expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage the tank if it
is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.

371
Brakes So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add
Brake Fluid fluid when your linings are worn, then you will have
too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You
Your brake master should add or remove brake fluid, as necessary,
cylinder reservoir is only when work is done on the brake hydraulic
filled with DOT-3 brake system.
fluid. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 342 for the {CAUTION:
location of the reservoir.
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill
on the engine. The fluid will burn if the
engine is hot enough. You or others could
be burned, and your vehicle could be
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid damaged. Add brake fluid only when work
level in the reservoir might go down. The first is done on the brake hydraulic system.
is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable
level during normal brake lining wear. When
new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back If the ignition is in ON and the brake fluid is low,
up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the “Check Brake Fluid” message will be displayed
the brake system. If it is, you should have your in the DIC. See “Check Brake Fluid Message”
brake system fixed, since a leak means that under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 228.
sooner or later your brakes will not work well, or When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your
will not work at all. brake warning light will come on. See Brake
System Warning Light on page 197.

372
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, DOT-3 brake fluid {CAUTION:
is recommended for use. DOT-4 brake fluid is
also compatible with your vehicle’s brake system With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
parts. However, if you choose to use DOT-4
system, your brakes may not work well, or
fluid, it is recommended that you flush your brake
hydraulic system and refill it with new DOT-4 they may not even work at all. This could
fluid at a regular maintenance service every cause a crash. Always use the proper
two years. See Additional Required Services on brake fluid.
page 466. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 474. Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
brake system parts. For example, just a
area around the cap before removing it. This
few drops of mineral-based oil, such
will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
as engine oil, in your brake system can
damage brake system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can
be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it
off immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle
on page 439.

373
Brake Wear Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out
brake pads could result in costly brake repair.
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or
make a high-pitched warning sound when the lightly applied. This does not mean something is
brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. wrong with your brakes.
The sound may come and go or be heard all
the time your vehicle is moving, except when you Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
are pushing on the brake pedal firmly. prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten
wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque
{CAUTION: specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as
The brake wear warning sound means that complete axle sets.
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.

374
Brake Pedal Travel Replacing Brake System Parts
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its
to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase many parts have to be of top quality and work
in pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake well together if the vehicle is to have really good
trouble. braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested with
top-quality GM brake parts. When you replace parts
Brake Adjustment of your braking system — for example, when your
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without brake linings wear down and you need new ones
the vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear. put in — be sure you get new approved GM
replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may
no longer work properly. For example, if someone
puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,
the balance between your front and rear brakes can
change — for the worse. The braking performance
you have come to expect can change in many other
ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement
brake parts.

375
Battery After a power loss, such as disconnecting the
battery or removing the maxi fuses in the power
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. distribution fuse block, the following steps must
When it is time for a new battery, get one that has be performed to calibrate the electronic throttle
the replacement number shown on the original control. If this is not done, the engine will not run
battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco® properly.
replacement battery. See Engine Compartment
1. Turn the ignition key to ON. Do not start the
Overview on page 342 for battery location.
engine.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds, 2. Leave the ignition in ON for at least three
chemicals known to the State of California minutes so that the electronic throttle
to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash control will cycle and re-learn its home
hands after handling. position.
3. Turn the ignition to OFF.
4. Start and run the engine for at least
{CAUTION: 30 seconds.

Batteries have acid that can burn you and

gas that can explode. You can be badly
hurt if you are not careful. See Jump
Starting on page 377 for tips on working
around a battery without getting hurt.

376
Jump Starting Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in
costly damage to your vehicle that would
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may not be covered by your warranty.
want to use another vehicle and some jumper Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use pulling it will not work, and it could damage
the following steps to do it safely. your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a
{CAUTION: 12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not
Batteries can hurt you. They can be a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both
dangerous because: vehicles can be damaged. Only use vehicles
with 12-volt systems with negative grounds to
• They contain acid that can burn you. jump start your vehicle.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite. 2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
• They contain enough electricity to cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are
burn you. not touching each other. If they are, it could
cause a ground connection you do not
If you do not follow these steps exactly, want. You would not be able to start your
some or all of these things can hurt you. vehicle and the bad grounding could damage
the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start procedure. Put
an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a
manual transmission in NEUTRAL before
setting the parking brake.
377
Notice: If you leave your radio or other
accessories on during the jump starting
procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always
turn off your radio and other accessories when
jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory power
outlets. Turn off the radio and all lamps that
are not needed. This will avoid sparks
and help save both batteries. And it could
save the radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+)
and negative (−) terminal locations of the
other vehicle, as well as the positive (+)
terminal location on your vehicle’s battery.
See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 342 for more information on the location
of the battery.

378
 Notice: If you connect a negative cable to the
ECM, ECM mounting bracket, or any cables
that attach to the ECM bracket, you may
damage the ECM. Always attach the negative
cable to your vehicle’s remote negative ground
location, instead of the ECM, ECM bracket,
or any cables attached to the ECM bracket.

{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.

Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) ground

location, as shown in the illustration. It is
located between the battery and the underhood
fuse block. You should always use this remote
ground location, instead of the terminal on the
battery.

379
 {CAUTION: {CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause Fans or other moving engine parts can
battery gas to explode. People have been injure you badly. Keep your hands away
hurt doing this, and some have been from moving parts once the engine is
blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more running.
light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You 5. Check that the jumper cables do not have
do not need to add water to the battery loose or missing insulation. If they do, you
installed in your new vehicle. But if a could get a shock. The vehicles could
battery has filler caps, be sure the right be damaged too.
amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add Before you connect the cables, here are some
water to take care of that first. If you do not, basic things you should know. Positive (+)
explosive gas could be present. will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)
you. Do not get it on you. If you will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part
accidentally get it in your eyes or on your or to a remote negative (−) terminal if the
skin, flush the place with water and get vehicle has one.
medical help immediately. Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or
you will get a short that would damage
the battery and maybe other parts too. And do
not connect the negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal on the dead battery
because this can cause sparks.

380
 8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to
the negative terminal of the good battery. Use
a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until
the next step. The other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead battery. It
goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part
or to a remote negative (−) terminal on the
vehicle with the dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable
at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead
battery, but not near engine parts that move.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the The electrical connection is just as good there,
positive (+) terminal of the dead battery. and the chance of sparks getting back to the
Use a remote positive (+) terminal if battery is much less.
the vehicle has one. Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect vehicle has one. Your vehicle’s remote
it to the positive (+) terminal of the good negative (−) ground location is for this purpose.
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if 10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery
the vehicle has one. and run the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead
battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it
probably needs service.

381
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or To disconnect the jumper cables from both
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting vehicles, do the following:
may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs 1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
would not be covered by your warranty. Always the vehicle that had the dead battery.
connect and remove the jumper cables in the
correct order, making sure that the cables do 2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
not touch each other or other metal. the vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or
Remote Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and
Remote Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

382
Rear Axle If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug
hole, located on the rear axle, you’ll need to add
When to Check Lubricant some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise
the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear What to Use
an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
problem. Have it inspected and repaired. what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended
How to Check Lubricant Fluids and Lubricants on page 474.

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be

on a level surface.

383
Headlamp Aiming The vehicle should be properly prepared as
follows:
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming • The vehicle should be placed so the
system. The aim has been preset at the factory headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light
and should need no further adjustment. colored wall.
However, if the vehicle is damaged in an accident, • The vehicle must have all four tires on a level
the headlamp aim may be affected and adjustment surface which is level all the way to the wall.
may be necessary.
• The vehicle should be placed so it is
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at perpendicular to the wall.
you, this may also mean the vertical aim needs to
be adjusted. • The vehicle should not have any snow, ice, or
mud on it.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer for service if the headlamps need to be • The vehicle should be fully assembled and all
re-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aim other work stopped while headlamp aiming is
the headlamps as described in the following being performed.
procedure. • The vehicle should be normally loaded with a
full tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs
(75 kg) sitting on the driver’s seat.
• Tires should be properly inflated.
• The spare tire is in its original location in the
vehicle.

384
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s
low-beam headlamps. The high-beam headlamps
will be correctly aimed if the low-beam headlamps
are aimed properly.
To adjust the vertical aim, do the following:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on
page 341 for more information.

4. At the wall measure from the ground

upward (A) to the recorded distance from
Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) the width of
the vehicle at the wall where it was marked
it Step 4.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve
beam cut-off when aiming. Covering a
headlamp may cause excessive heat build-up
which may cause damage to the headlamp.
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of the 6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
low-beam headlamp. piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of
3. Measure the distance from the ground to the the headlamp not being aimed. This should
aim dot on the low-beam headlamp. Record allow only the beam of light from the headlamp
the distance. being aimed to be seen on the flat surface.

385
 8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the
headlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal tape
line. If you turn it clockwise, it will raise the
beam and if you turn it counterclockwise, it will
lower the beam.
The top edge of the cut-off should be
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line.

Passenger’s Side Shown

7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws,
which are under the hood near each headlamp
assembly.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a
6 mm hex socket. 9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line. The lamp on the left (A) shows
the correct headlamp aim. The lamp on the
right (B) shows the incorrect headlamp aim.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
headlamp.

386
Bulb Replacement Halogen Bulbs
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 390.
{CAUTION:
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer. Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
inside and can burst if you drop or
High Intensity Discharge (HID) scratch the bulb. You or others could be
Lighting injured. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions on the bulb package.

{CAUTION:
The low beam high intensity discharge
lighting system operates at a very high
voltage. If you try to service any of the
system components, you could be
seriously injured. Have your dealer or a
qualified technician service them.

Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After your

vehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced,
you may notice that the beam is a slightly different
shade than it was originally. This is normal.

387
Front Turn Signal and Fog Lamps 4. Remove the electrical connector from the bulb
by lifting the two plastic clips.
A. Turn Signal Lamp
5. Pull the old bulb from the bulb socket keeping
B. Fog Lamp the bulb straight as you pull it out.
6. Install a new bulb.
7. Reverse the steps to reinstall the lamp
assembly.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps

and Sidemarker Lamps
A. Taillamps and
To replace a turn signal or fog lamp bulb, do the Stoplamps
following:
B. Turn Signal Lamp
1. Remove the protection shield located on the C. Sidemarker Lamp
underside of the front of the vehicle by pulling
out the push-pins located on the underside
of the protection shield.
2. Reach up behind the front bumper area from
under the vehicle to access the lamp housing.
3. Remove the bulb socket from the housing by
turning the bulb socket one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.

388
 1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 100 for Back-Up and License Plate Lamps
more information.
2. Remove the compact spare tire cover by
turning the wing nut counterclockwise.
3. Remove the four convenience net wing nuts.
4. Pull the carpet back away from the body
of the vehicle on the side with the burned
out bulb.
5. Remove the two mounting screws from the
lamp assembly.
6. Pull out the lamp assembly to expose the bulb
sockets. A. Back-Up Lamps
7. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter turn B. License Plate Lamps
counterclockwise and pull the bulb socket To replace a back-up or license plate bulb, do the
out of the lamp reflector. following:
8. Pull the old bulb from the bulb socket keeping 1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 100 for
the bulb straight as you pull it out. more information.
9. Install a new bulb. 2. Remove the cloth cover on the trunk lid by
10. Reverse the steps to reinstall the lamp pulling out the three push-pins located on
assembly. the underside of the trunk lid.
3. Remove the eight mounting nuts from the
underside of the trunk lid by turning the
nuts counterclockwise.

389
 4. Pull the lamp assembly away from the vehicle Windshield Wiper Blade
to expose the bulb sockets.
5. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter turn
Replacement
counterclockwise and pull the bulb and socket Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for
out of the lamp reflector. wear or cracking. See Owner Checks and Services
6. Pull the old bulb from the bulb socket keeping on page 469.
the bulb straight as you pull it out. It is a good idea to clean or replace the wiper
7. Install a new bulb. blade assembly on a regular basis or when worn.
For proper windshield wiper blade length and
8. Reverse the steps to reinstall the lamp type, see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
assembly. on page 476.
Replacement Bulbs To replace the wiper blade assembly, do the
following:
Exterior Lamp Bulb Number 1. Turn the ignition to ON with the engine off.
Back-Up, Front/Rear Turn Signal, 3157K
Stoplamp and Taillamp 2. Turn on the windshield wipers and turn them
Fog Lamp 9145 off again when the wipers are in the out-wipe
License Plate Lamp W5WLL position. The driver’s side blade will be
Rear Sidemarker Lamp W5WLL
straight up and down on the windshield.
3. Pull the windshield wiper assembly away from
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact the windshield.
your dealer.

390
 6. Replace the blade with a new one.

4. Lift the wiper blade assembly up so it is in a

T-shaped position. You should be able to 7. Reinstall the wiper blade assembly by sliding
see a tab. it over the wiper arm to engage the J-hooked
5. Squeeze the tab together and pull the wiper end. Pull up on the assembly to lock it into
blade assembly down far enough to release it place.
from the J-hooked end of the wiper arm. 8. Repeat the steps for the other wiper.
Slide the assembly away from the arm.
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the
windshield when no wiper blade is installed
could damage the windshield. Any damage
that occurs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not allow the wiper blade arm to
touch the windshield.
391
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever • Underinflated tires pose the same
have questions about your tire warranty and where danger as overloaded tires. The
to obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet for resulting accident could cause serious
details. For additional information refer to the tire injury. Check all tires frequently to
manufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle. maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
{CAUTION: Pressure on page 402.
• Overinflated tires are more likely
• Poorly maintained and improperly to be cut, punctured, or broken by a
used tires are dangerous. sudden impact — such as when you
• Overloading your tires can cause hit a pothole. Keep tires at the
overheating as a result of too much recommended pressure.
friction. You could have an air-out and • Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
a serious accident. See Loading Your If your tread is badly worn, or if
Vehicle on page 321. your tires have been damaged,
replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
See High-Speed Operation on page 404 for
inflation pressure adjustment for high
speed driving.

392
Notice: If your vehicle has 245/45R18, Winter tires, in general, are designed for increased
P245/45ZR18 or P225/50R18 size tires, they traction on snow and ice covered roads. With winter
are classified as low-profile tires. Low-profile tires, there may be decreased dry road traction,
tires are more susceptible to damage from road increased road noise, and shorter tread life. After
hazards or curb impact than standard profile switching to winter tires, be alert for changes in
tires. Tire and or wheel assembly damage vehicle handling and braking.
can occur when coming into contact with See your dealer for details regarding winter tire
road hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged availability and proper tire selection. Also,
objects or when sliding into a curb. Your see Buying New Tires on page 411.
GM warranty does not cover this type of
damage. Keep tires set to the correct inflation If you choose to use winter tires:
pressure and when possible avoid contact • Use tires of the same brand and tread type on
with curbs, potholes and other road hazards. all four wheel positions.
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load
Winter Tires range, and speed rating as the original
If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered equipment tires.
roads often, you may want to get winter tires for Winter tires with the same speed rating as your
your vehicle. All season tires provide good overall original equipment tires may not be available for H,
performance on most surfaces but they may V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose
not offer the traction you would like or the same winter tires with a lower speed rating, never
level of performance as winter tires on snow or ice exceed the tire’s maximum speed capability.
covered roads.

393
Tire Sidewall Labeling (A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
Useful information about a tire is molded into its tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
sidewall. The examples below show a typical and service description. See the “Tire Size”
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire illustration later in this section for more detail.
sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.

394
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature resistance. For more
information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on
page 414.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load
Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare

tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If
your vehicle has a compact spare tire, see
Compact Spare Tire (CTS Only) on page 434
and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 422.

395
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and (G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
number of plies in the sidewall and under Specification): Original equipment tires designed
the tread. to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
and numbers following the DOT (Department of federal safety guidelines.
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer Tire Size
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both The following illustration shows an example of a
sides of the tire, although only one side may have typical passenger vehicle tire size.
the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load
Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure (A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on States version of a metric tire sizing system. The
page 402. letter P as the first character in the tire size
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim
construction type, and service description. The Association.
letter T as the first character in the tire size means
the tire is for temporary use only.

396
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates Tire Terminology and Definitions
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall. Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements. per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is
60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it would Accessory Weight: This means the combined
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as weight of optional accessories. Some examples
high as it is wide. of optional accessories are, automatic
transmission/transaxle, power steering, power
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to brakes, power windows, power seats, and
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. air conditioning.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias to its width.
ply construction.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in located between the plies and the tread. Cords
inches. may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
tire. The load index represents the load carry by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
load. Speed ratings range from A to Z. to the centerline of the tread.

397
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up when mounted on a vehicle.
heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
on page 402.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicle with standard and optional equipment vehicles.
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and
coolant, but without passengers and cargo. Load Index: An assigned number ranging
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall capacity of a tire.
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), The maximum air pressure is molded onto
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the sidewall.
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
and date of production. at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 321. Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the weight, and production options weight.
front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 321.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
rear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 321. by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 321.

398
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
positions. and the bead.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that to a tire indicating the maximum speed at
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. which a tire can operate.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, Traction: The friction between the tire and the
and/or model name molding that is higher road surface. The amount of grip provided.
or deeper than the same moldings on the other Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
sidewall of the tire. contact with the road.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and called wear bars, that show across the tread of
multipurpose vehicles. a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation page 411.
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 402 and Loading Standards): A tire information system that
Your Vehicle on page 321. provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at are determined by tire manufacturers using
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which Tire Quality Grading on page 414.
the tire beads are seated.

399
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading {CAUTION:
Your Vehicle on page 321.
When the low tire warning light is
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on displayed on the instrument panel cluster,
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory your vehicle’s handling capabilities will be
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight. reduced during severe maneuvers. If you
drive too fast, you could lose control of
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
your vehicle. You or others could be
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
injured. Do not drive over 55 mph
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and (90 km/h) when the low tire warning light
Loading Information Label” under Loading is displayed. Drive cautiously and check
Your Vehicle on page 321. your tire pressures as soon as you can.

Run-Flat Tires (CTS-V) If a tire goes flat, you will not need to stop on the
side of the road to change the tire. You can just
If your vehicle has run-flat tires, there is no spare keep on driving. The tire can operate effectively
tire and no tire changing equipment. Your with no air pressure for up to 65 miles (105 km) at
vehicle also has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) speeds up to 55 mph (90 km/h). The shorter the
which will alert you if there is a loss of tire pressure distance you drive and the slower the speed, the
in any of the tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor greater the chance that the tire will not have to be
System on page 405. replaced. When a tire is filled with air, it provides a
cushion between the road and the wheel. Because
you will not have this cushion when driving on a
deflated run-flat tire, try to avoid potholes that could
damage your wheel and require replacement of it.
400
Some road hazards can damage a tire beyond
repair. This damage could occur even before you
have driven on the tire in a deflated condition. {CAUTION:
When a tire has been damaged, or if you
have driven any distance on a run-flat tire, check Run-flat tires are constructed differently
with an authorized run-flat tire service center than other tires and could explode during
to determine whether the tire can be repaired or improper service. You or others could be
should be replaced. To maintain your vehicle’s injured or killed if you attempt to repair,
run-flat feature, all replacement tires must replace, dismount, or mount a run-flat tire.
be self-supporting tires. As soon as possible, Let only an authorized run-flat service
contact the nearest authorized GM or run-flat center repair, replace, dismount, and
servicing facility for inspection and repair or
mount run-flat tires.
replacement. To locate the nearest GM or run-flat
servicing facility, call Roadside Service. See
Roadside Service on page 488 for details. The valve stems on your run-flat tires have
sensors that are part of the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS). These sensors contain batteries
which are designed to last for 10 years under
normal driving conditions. See your dealer if you
ever need to have a wheel replaced, or if the
sensors ever need replacement.
Notice: Using liquid sealants can damage the
tire valves and tire pressure monitor sensors in
your vehicle’s run-flat tires. This damage would
not be covered by warranty. Do not use liquid
sealants in your vehicle’s run-flat tires.

401
Inflation - Tire Pressure A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to
the vehicle’s center pillar, below the driver’s door
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to latch. This label lists your vehicle’s original
operate effectively. equipment tires and shows the correct inflation
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that pressures for your tires when they are cold. The
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. recommended cold tire inflation pressure, shown on
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air the label, is the minimum amount of air pressure
(under-inflation), you can get the following: needed to support your vehicle’s maximum load
carrying capacity.
• Too much flexing
For additional information regarding how much
• Too much heat weight your vehicle can carry, and an example
• Tire overloading of the tire and loading information label, see
• Premature or irregular wear Loading Your Vehicle on page 321. How you load
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
• Poor handling comfort, never load your vehicle with more weight
• Reduced fuel economy than it was designed to carry.
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards

402
When to Check Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
forget to check the compact spare tire, if your inflation pressure matches the recommended
vehicle has one. The compact spare should be pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
Spare Tire (CTS Only) on page 434. the recommended amount.
How to Check If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
tires may look properly inflated even when they stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
are underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation and moisture.
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

403
High-Speed Operation The CTS-V high-performance tires, size
245/45R18 96V and P245/45ZR18 96W require
inflation pressure adjustment when driving
your vehicle at speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or
{CAUTION: higher. Set the cold tire inflation pressure to
the maximum inflation pressure shown on the tire
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph sidewall, or 41 psi (282 kPa), whichever is
(160 km/h) or higher, puts an additional lower. See the example following.
strain on tires. Sustained high-speed Example:
driving causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure. You You will find the maximum load and inflation
could have a crash and you or others pressure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small
letters, near the rim flange. It will read something
could be killed. Some high-speed rated
like this: Maximum load 710 kg (1565 lbs)
tires require inflation pressure adjustment 350 kPa (51 psi) Max. Press.
for high speed operation. When speed
limits and road conditions are such that For this example, you would set the cold
inflation pressure for high-speed driving at
a vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
41 psi (282 kPa)
make sure the tires are rated for high
speed operation, in excellent condition, When you end high-speed driving, return the tires
and set to the correct cold tire inflation to the cold inflation pressures shown on the
pressure for the vehicle load. tire and loading information label. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 321.

404
The high-performance tires, size P225/55R16, Tire Pressure Monitor System
P225/50R17 or P2225/50R18 require inflation
pressure adjustment when driving your vehicle at Your vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher. Set System (TPMS). This system uses radio and
the cold tire inflation pressure to the maximum sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
inflation pressure shown on the tire sidewall, If your vehicle has this feature, sensors are
or 38 psi (262 kPa), whichever is lower. See the mounted on each the tire and wheel assembly,
example following. except for the spare tire. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires and
Example: transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver
You will find the maximum load and inflation located in the vehicle.
pressure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small If your vehicle has the base audio system, the
letters, near the rim flange. It will read something Driver Information Center (DIC) displays TPMS
like this: Maximum load 710 kg (1565 lbs) warnings and messages on the radio’s display
350 kPa (51 psi) Max. Press. screen. See System Controls on page 218
For this example, you would set the cold and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 228 for
inflation pressure for high-speed driving at additional information and details about the DIC
38 psi (262 kPa) operation and displays. If your vehicle has
When you end high-speed driving, return the tires the Navigation system, TPMS warnings and
to the cold inflation pressures shown on the messages are displayed on the message center
tire and loading information label. See Loading screen, located inside the tachometer. See
Your Vehicle on page 321. Message Center (CTS-V) on page 209 for
information about the message center operation
and displays.

405
If a low tire pressure condition is detected, the Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
TPMS will display the Check Tire Pressure illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
message on the DIC or message center and, at as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
the same time, illuminate the low tire pressure proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
warning symbol on the instrument panel cluster. under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should can lead to the tire failure. Under-inflation also
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
of a different size than the size indicated on responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
you should determine the proper tire inflation trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
pressure for those tires.) telltale.
As an added safety The Tire and Loading Information label shows the
feature, your vehicle size of your vehicle’s original tires and their
has been equipped recommended cold inflation pressures. See
with a tire pressure Loading Your Vehicle on page 321, for the location
monitoring system of the tire and loading information label. Also
(TPMS) that illuminates see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 402.
a low tire pressure The tire pressure warning light may come on in
telltale when one or cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and
more of your tires then turn off as you start to drive. This could
is significantly be an early indicator that the tire pressures are
under-inflated. getting low and need to be inflated to the
proper pressure.

406
Your vehicle’s TPMS can alert you about a low You will have two minutes to match the first tire
tire pressure condition but it does not replace and wheel position, and five minutes overall
normal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and to match all four tire and wheel positions. If it takes
Rotation on page 409 and Tires on page 392. longer than two minutes, to match the first tire
and wheel, or more than five minutes to match
Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your all four tire and wheel positions the matching
vehicle has Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid process stops and you will need to start over.
sealant can damage the tire pressure monitor
sensors. The TPM matching process is outlined below:
Resetting the TPMS Identification 1. Set the parking brake.
Codes 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON with the
engine off.
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification 3. Using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
code. Any time you replace one or more of the transmitter, lock and unlock the vehicle’s
TPMS sensors or rotate the tires, the identification doors.
codes will need to be matched to the new tire and
wheel position. The sensors are matched to the tire 4. Press the lock and unlock buttons, at the same
and wheel positions in the following order: driver’s time, on the RKE transmitter. A single horn
side front tire, passenger’s side front tire, chirp will sound, indicating that the TPMS
passenger’s side rear tire, and driver’s side rear tire system is ready, and the sensor matching
using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your GM dealer process can begin.
for service. 5. Start with the driver’s side front tire.
The TPMS sensors may also be matched to each
tire and wheel position by increasing or decreasing
the tire’s air pressure. When increasing tire
pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation
pressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall.
407
 6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem. The TPMS will not function properly, if one or
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing more of the TPMS sensors are missing or
or decreasing the tire’s air pressure for inoperable. If your vehicle has a compact spare
five seconds, or until a horn chirp sounds. The tire, the spare tire and wheel assembly does
horn chirp, which may take up to 30 seconds, not contain a TPMS sensor. If you replace one of
confirms that the sensor identification code has the road tires with the spare, or if the system
been matched to this tire position. To decrease detects a missing or inoperable sensor, the
the tire’s air-pressure use the pointed end of Service Tire Monitor System message will be
the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure gage, displayed on the DIC. If you have replaced a tire
or a key. and wheel assembly without transferring the
7. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire, and TPMS sensors, the error message will be
repeat the procedure in Step 6. displayed. Once you re-install the TPMS sensors,
the message should go off. See your GM
8. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire, and dealer for service if all TPMS sensors are installed
repeat the procedure in Step 6. and the error message comes on and stays on.
9. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, and Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
repeat the procedure in Step 6. If your vehicle has a message center and the
10. After hearing the confirming double horn system detects a missing or inoperable sensor an
chirp, for the left rear tire, exit the matching error message of several dashes – – – will be
process by turning the ignition switch to OFF. shown on the message center display. If you have
11. Set all four tires to the recommended replaced a tire and wheel assembly without
air pressure level as indicated on the tire transferring the TPMS sensors, the error message
and loading information label. will be displayed. Once you re-install the TPMS
sensors, the error message should go off.
12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems. See your GM dealer for service if all TPMS
sensors are installed and the error message
comes on and stays on.
408
Federal Communications Commission Tire Inspection and Rotation
(FCC) and Industry and Science Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
Canada (8 000 to 13 000 km).
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC If your vehicle has P245/45ZR18 96W size tires,
Rules. Operation is subject to the following GM recommends rotating these tires at 3,000 mile
two conditions: (4 800 km) intervals. These tires are optimized
1. This device may not cause harmful for dry traction and handling performance. Tread
interference. life may be 15,000 miles (24 140 km) or less
for these tires, depending on how and where
2. This device must accept any interference you drive.
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation. Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
vehicle’s tires as soon as possible and check
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or
Canada. Operation is subject to the following wheels. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
two conditions: page 411 and Wheel Replacement on page 416 for
1. This device may not cause interference. more information.
2. This device must accept any interference The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
received, including interference that may uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The
cause undesired operation of the device. first rotation is the most important. See Scheduled
Changes or modifications to this system by other Maintenance on page 463.
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.

409
 Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 457.

{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel
When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always use the could come off and cause an accident.
correct rotation pattern shown here. When you change a wheel, remove any
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, do not rust or dirt from places where the wheel
include it in the tire rotation. attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading brush later, if needed, to get all the rust
Your Vehicle on page 321, for an example of or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire
the tire and loading information label and (CTS Only) on page 424.
its location on your vehicle.
If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) the TPMS sensors will need to be
reset and matched to the tire/wheel position. A
special TPMS diagnostic tool is used to reset the
sensor identification codes. See your dealer
for service.

410
When It Is Time for New Tires • The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage
that cannot be repaired well because of the
One way to tell when it size or location of the damage.
is time for new tires is Buying New Tires
to check the treadwear
indicators, which will GM has developed and matched specific tires
appear when your tires for your vehicle. The original equipment tires
have only 1/16 inch installed on your vehicle, when it was new,
(1.6 mm) or less of tread were designed to meet General Motors Tire
remaining. Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
system rating. If you need replacement tires, GM
strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to
give the same performance and vehicle safety,
You need a new tire if any of the following during normal use, as the original tires.
statements are true: GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
• You can see the indicators at three or more a dozen critical specifications that impact the
places around the tire. overall performance of your vehicle, including
brake system performance, ride and handling,
• You can see cord or fabric showing through traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
the tire’s rubber. performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or onto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.
snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. If the tires have an all-season tread design,
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split. the TPC Spec number will be followed by a MS
for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on
page 394 for additional information.

411
The 18-inch performance tires, size
245/45R18 96V, used on some vehicles, meet
the General Motors Tire Performance Criteria {CAUTION:
Specification (TPC Spec) rating but the TPC Spec
code has not been molded onto the tire’s Mixing tires could cause you to lose
sidewall. If your vehicle has these tires, and you control of your vehicle while driving. If
need to replace them, you can still get these TPC you mix tires of different sizes, brands,
Spec rated tires by asking your GM dealer. or types (radial and bias-belted tires) the
Your GM dealer can order these tires by part vehicle may not handle properly, and
number. This way, your vehicle will continue to you could have a crash. Using tires of
give the proper endurance, handling, traction, and different sizes, brands, or types may also
ride as the original tires.
cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your use the correct size, brand, and type of
vehicle’s original equipment tires may not be tires on all wheels.
available for H, V, W, and ZR speed rated tires.
If you choose snow tires with a lower speed rating, Your vehicle may have a compact spare
never exceed the tire’s maximum speed capability. tire and wheel assembly. It is all right to
drive with your vehicle’s compact spare
tire temporarily. It was developed for use
on your vehicle. See Compact Spare Tire
(CTS Only) on page 434.

412
 Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
system may give an inaccurate low-pressure
{CAUTION: warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed
on your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, may give a low-pressure warning that is higher or
the wheel rim flanges could develop lower than the proper warning level you would
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing Monitor System on page 405.
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
wheels on your vehicle. on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 321,
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those for more information about the Tire and Loading
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make Information Label and its location on your vehicle.
sure they are the same size, load range, speed
rating, and construction type (radial and
bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

413
Different Size Tires and Wheels See Buying New Tires on page 411 and
Accessories and Modifications on page 332 for
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size additional information.
than your original equipment wheels and tires,
this may affect the way your vehicle performs, Uniform Tire Quality Grading
including its braking, ride and handling
characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover. Quality grades can be found where applicable on
Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
systems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control, maximum section width. For example:
and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected. Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
{CAUTION: Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
If you add different sized wheels, your temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicle may not provide an acceptable vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
level of performance and safety if tires molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
not recommended for those wheels are
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
selected. You may increase the chance snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
that you will crash and suffer serious spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
injury. Only use GM specific wheel and 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
tire systems developed for your vehicle, limited-production tires.
and have them properly installed by a GM
certified technician.

414
While the tires available on General Motors Traction – AA, A, B, C
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
respect to these grades, they must also conform
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the
to federal safety requirements and additional
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
under controlled conditions on specified
standards.
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
Treadwear A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested Warning: The traction grade assigned to this
under controlled conditions on a specified tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction
government test course. For example, a tire tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.

415
Temperature – A, B, C Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to and balanced carefully at the factory to give you
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate the longest tire life and best overall performance.
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.
high temperature can cause the material of the tire However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. alignment may need to be checked. If you notice
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth
which all passenger car tires must meet under road, your tires and wheels may need to be
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law. Wheel Replacement
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
established for a tire that is properly inflated rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
and not overloaded. Excessive speed, loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
underinflation, or excessive loading, either nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,
separately or in combination, can cause heat replace it (except some aluminum wheels,
buildup and possible tire failure. which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and
be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.
416
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause
bolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only with problems with bearing life, brake cooling,
new GM original equipment parts. This way, speedometer or odometer calibration,
you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground
bolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle. clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance
to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire (CTS Only) on page 424
{CAUTION: for more information.

Using the wrong replacement wheels, Used Replacement Wheels

wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle
can be dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your vehicle, {CAUTION:
make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
which you or others could be injured. dangerous. You cannot know how it has
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts, been used or how far it has been driven. It
and wheel nuts for replacement. could fail suddenly and cause a crash. If
you have to replace a wheel, use a new
GM original equipment wheel.

417
Tire Chains Lifting Your Vehicle (CTS-V)

{CAUTION: {CAUTION:
Do not use tire chains. There is not Lifting a vehicle can cause an injury. The
enough clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over
vehicle without the proper amount of you or other people. You and they could
clearance can cause damage to the be badly injured. Find a level place to lift
brakes, suspension, or other vehicle your vehicle. To help prevent the vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the tire from moving:
chains could cause you to lose control of 1. Place the shift lever in REVERSE (R)
your vehicle and you or others may be and firmly apply the parking brake.
injured in a crash. Use another type of
2. Turn off the engine.
traction device only if its manufacturer
recommends it for use on your vehicle To be even more certain the vehicle will
and tire size combination and road not move, you can put blocks in front of
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s and behind the wheels. Also see Parking
instructions. To help avoid damage to Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission) on
your vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust or page 128 and Parking Brake on page 124
remove the device if it is contacting your for additional information.
vehicle, and do not spin your wheels. If
you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the rear tires.

418
 Notice: Lifting your vehicle improperly can
damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs
{CAUTION: not covered by your warranty. To lift your
vehicle properly, follow the advice in this part.
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked
To help prevent vehicle damage:
up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off
the jack, you could be badly injured or • Be sure the jack you are using meets the
killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is weight standards for your vehicle and is
in good working order.
supported only by a jack.
• Be sure to place a block or pad between
the jack and the vehicle.
• Make sure the jack you are using only
{CAUTION: contacts the jacking location lift points
and is not leaning on any other vehicle
Raising your vehicle with the jack components such as the rocker panels, the
floor pan, or the stone guard moldings.
improperly positioned can damage the
vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To • Lift only in the areas shown in the following
help avoid personal injury and vehicle pictures.
damage, be sure to place the jack in the
proper location before raising the vehicle.

If you ever use a jack to lift your vehicle, follow

the instructions that came with the jack, and
be sure to use the correct lifting points to avoid
damaging your vehicle.

419
Lifting From the Front 1. Locate the front lifting points using the
diagram shown above and corresponding
The front lifting points can be accessed from triangular-shaped hoisting notches located in
either side of your vehicle, behind the front tires. the plastic molding. The front lifting location
is about 14 inches (35.6 cm) from the
rear edge of the front wheel well.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the
jack and the vehicle.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the
jack is centered on the front lifting point.

420
Lifting From the Rear 1. Locate the rear lifting points using the
diagram shown above and corresponding
The rear lifting points can be accessed from either triangular-shaped hoisting notches located in
side of your vehicle, in front of the rear tires. the plastic molding. The rear lifting location
is about 7 inches (17.8 cm) from the
front edge of the rear wheel well.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the
jack and the vehicle.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the
jack is centered on the rear lifting point.
See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 333
for additional information.

421
If a Tire Goes Flat If a tire goes flat, and your vehicle has a spare
tire, see Changing a Flat Tire (CTS Only) on
It is unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you are page 424. This information shows you how to
driving, especially if you maintain your tires use your vehicle’s tire changing equipment
properly. See Tires on page 392. If air goes out of and how to change a flat tire safely.
a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout”,
here are a few tips about what to expect and {CAUTION:
what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take maintenance or repairs is dangerous
your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the without the appropriate safety equipment
steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane and training. The jack provided with your
position, and then gently brake to a stop well out vehicle is designed only for changing a
of the traffic lane.
flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much or others could be badly injured or killed
like a skid and may require the same correction if the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the
you’d use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove jack provided with your vehicle only for
your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the
changing a flat tire.
vehicle under control by steering the way you want
the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and
noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a Run-Flat Tires (CTS-V)
stop — well off the road if possible.
If your vehicle has run-flat tires, there is no spare
tire and no tire changing equipment. Run-flat
tires can operate effectively with no air pressure
for a limited distance and speed.
422
Your vehicle also has a Tire Pressure Monitor
(TPM) which will alert you if there is a loss of tire
pressure in any of the tires. These tires perform {CAUTION:
so well without any air pressure that a Tire
Pressure Monitor (TPM) is used to alert you when Special tools and procedures are required
there is a low tire condition. to service a run-flat tire. If these special
tools and procedures are not used you or
others could be injured and your vehicle
{CAUTION: could be damaged. Always be sure the
proper tools and procedures, as described
When the low tire warning light is in the service manual, are used.
displayed on the instrument panel cluster,
your vehicle’s handling capabilities will be To order a service manual see Service
reduced during severe maneuvers. If you Publications Ordering Information on page 501.
drive too fast, you could lose control of
your vehicle. You or others could be
injured. Do not drive over 55 mph
(90 km/h) when the low tire warning light
is displayed. Drive cautiously and check
your tire pressures as soon as you can.

See Run-Flat Tires (CTS-V) on page 400 and

Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 405,
for additional information.

423
Changing a Flat Tire (CTS Only)
CAUTION: (Continued)
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel
damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on
your hazard warning flashers. 3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
{CAUTION: the vehicle.
Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The of the tire farthest away from the one
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over being changed. That would be the tire on
or fall on you or other people. You and the other side, at the opposite end of the
they could be badly injured or even killed.
vehicle.
Find a level place to change your tire. To
help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly. When you have a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
2. Put an automatic transmission shift of wheel blocks.
lever in PARK (P), or shift a manual
transmission to FIRST (1) or
REVERSE (R).
CAUTION: (Continued)

424
 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
(CTS Only)
The equipment you will need is in the trunk.
To gain access to the spare tire and jacking
equipment, do the following:
1. Turn the center nut
on the compact
spare tire cover
counterclockwise to
remove it. Then
remove the cover.
The following information will tell you next how to
use the jack and change a tire.

425
2. Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwise 4. The tools you will be using next include the
and remove it. Then remove the jack and jack (A) and the wheel wrench (B).
wheel wrench.
3. Remove the compact spare tire. See Compact
Spare Tire (CTS Only) on page 434 for more
information about the compact spare tire.

426
Removing the Flat Tire and 1. Loosen the wheel nuts, but do not remove
them yet, using the wheel wrench. Turn the
Installing the Spare Tire (CTS Only) handle about 180 degrees, then flip the handle
back to the starting position. This avoids
taking the wrench off the lug nut for each turn.

427
 {CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked
up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off
the jack you could be badly injured or
killed. Never get under a vehicle when it
is supported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:
2. Find the jacking location using the diagram
above and corresponding triangular-shaped Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to
hoisting notches located in the plastic molding. do maintenance or repairs is dangerous
The front location (A) is about 14 inches without the appropriate safety equipment
(35.6 cm) from the rear edge of the front and training. The jack provided with your
wheel well, and the rear location (B) is about vehicle is designed only for changing a
7 inches (17.8 cm) from the front edge of flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you
the rear wheel well. or others could be badly injured or killed
3. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack. if the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the
jack provided with your vehicle only for
changing a flat tire.

428
 {CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can damage the
vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To
help avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head
into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.

Notice: If you position the jack under the

rocker molding and attempt to raise the 5. Raise the jack by turning the wheel wrench
vehicle, you could break the molding and/or clockwise until the slots in the jack head fit
cause other damage to your vehicle. Always into the metal flange located behind the
position the jack so that when the jack head is triangle on the plastic molding as shown.
raised, it will fit firmly in the notch located 6. Put the compact spare tire near you.
inboard from the rocker molding.
4. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to
lower the jack lift head until the jack fits
under the vehicle.

429
 8. Remove all the
wheel nuts and take
off the flat tire.

7. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench

clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off
the ground for the compact spare tire to
fit under the vehicle.

430
 9. Remove any rust or
dirt from the wheel
{CAUTION: bolts, mounting
surfaces, and spare
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts wheel.
to which it is fastened, can make the
wheel nuts become loose after a time.
The wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When you change a wheel,
remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, you can use a cloth or a 10. Install the spare tire.
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to 11. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded
get all the rust or dirt off. end of the nuts toward the wheel.
12. Tighten each wheel nut by turning it clockwise
with your hand until the wheel is held against
the hub.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
If you do, the nuts might come loose.
Your wheel could fall off, causing a
serious accident.

431
 {CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel
to come loose and even come off. This
could lead to an accident. Be sure to use
the correct wheel nuts. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new GM
original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench
13. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel to the proper torque specification. See
wrench counterclockwise. Lower the jack Capacities and Specifications on page 457
completely. for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can

lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly
tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence
and to the proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on page 457 for
the wheel nut torque specification.

432
 14. Tighten the wheel Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
nuts firmly in a
crisscross sequence Tools (CTS Only)
as shown.

{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment
in the passenger compartment of the
vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment could
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your strike someone. Store all these in the
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover proper place.
on the compact spare, you could damage
the cover or the spare.
After you have put the compact spare tire on your
Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact
vehicle, you will need to store the flat tire in
spare tire. It will note fit. Store the wheel cover
your trunk.
in the trunk until you have the flat tire repaired or
replaced. Remove the foam support so that the flat tire will
fit in the storage area. Place the flat tire with
the appearance-side face down and store the
jack container in the center of the tire. See
the diagram for more information.
The compact spare is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire
as soon as you can.

433
Use the following diagram as a guide for storing Compact Spare Tire (CTS Only)
the compact spare tire in the trunk:
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after
a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It
should be 60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,
stop as soon as possible and make sure the
spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles
(5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have
the full-size tire repaired or replaced at your
convenience. Of course, it is best to replace the
spare with a full-size tire as soon as possible. The
spare tire will last longer and be in good shape
A. Compact Spare F. Flat Road Tire in case it is needed again.
Tire Cover G. Compact
Notice: When the compact spare is installed,
Wing Nut Spare Tire
do not take your vehicle through an automatic
B. Compact Spare H. Foam Insert car wash with guide rails. The compact
Tire Cover I. Bolt spare can get caught on the rails. That can
C. Plastic Wing Nut J. Wheel Wrench damage the tire and wheel, and maybe
D. Retainer K. Jack other parts of your vehicle.
E. Jack Container L. Jack Container Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
with Wheel
Wrench and Jack

434
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel Lighter colored interiors may require more
with other wheels or tires. They will not fit. frequent cleaning. Use care because newspapers
Keep the spare tire and its wheel together. and garments that transfer color to your home
furnishings may also transfer color to your
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact vehicle’s interior.
spare. Using them can damage your vehicle
and can damage the chains too. Do not use tire When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use
chains on your compact spare. cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces
being cleaned. Permanent damage may result
Appearance Care from using cleaners on surfaces for which
they were not intended. Use glass cleaner only on
glass. Remove any accidental over-spray from
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its
best if it is cleaned often. Although not always Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when
visible, dust and dirt can accumulate on your cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you
upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather, could scratch the glass and/or cause damage
and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming is to the integrated radio antenna and the
recommended to remove particles from your rear window defogger. When cleaning the
upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery glass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth and
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. glass cleaner.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.
Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of
heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

435
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become • Never apply heavy pressure or rub
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. aggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use of
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to heavy pressure can damage your interior and
all safety instructions on the label. While cleaning does not improve the effectiveness of soil
your vehicle’s interior, maintain adequate removal.
ventilation by opening your vehicle’s doors and • Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid
windows. laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
Dust may be removed from small buttons and degreasers. Using too much soap will leave a
knobs using a small brush with soft bristles. residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per gallon
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
you can also obtain a product from your GM dealer • Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
to remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery. cleaning.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following • Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result
cleaners or techniques: from the use of many organic solvents such as
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to naptha, alcohol, etc.
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage
to your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

436
Fabric/Carpet To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush
water or club soda.
attachment frequently to remove dust and loose
dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in 2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and 3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently
carpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to remove rub toward the center. Continue cleaning,
them first with plain water or club soda. Before using a clean area of the cloth each time it
cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil becomes soiled.
as possible using one of the following techniques:
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil cleaning cloth remains clean.
with a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb
into the paper towel until no more can 5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a
be removed. mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning
process that was used with plain water.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as
possible and then vacuum. If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric
cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When a
commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be
used, test a small hidden area for colorfastness
first. If the locally cleaned area gives any
impression that a ring formation may result, clean
the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a
paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture
from the fabric or carpet.

437
Leather Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to Plastic Surfaces
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
solution can be used. Allow the leather to dry necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a
naturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steam mild soap solution can be used to gently remove
to clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spot dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers
removers on leather. Many commercial leather on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve coatings that are sold to preserve and protect
and protect leather may permanently change soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the
the appearance and feel of your leather and are appearance and feel of your interior and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never use the gloss in a non-uniform manner.
shoe polish on your leather.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on
your instrument panel. The increase in gloss
may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.

438
Wood Panels Weatherstrips
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them
(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
immediately with a clean cloth. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During
very cold, damp weather frequent application
Speaker Covers may be required. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 474.
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that
the speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with Washing Your Vehicle
just water and mild soap.
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,
Care of Safety Belts depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to
Keep belts clean and dry.
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm
or cold water.
{CAUTION: Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of
the sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong
soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you
vehicle well, removing all soap residue completely.
do, it may severely weaken them. In a
crash, they might not be able to provide
adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.

439
GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint
Materials on page 444. Do not use cleaning agents finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive
that are petroleum based, or that contain acid or waxes and polishes that are made for a
abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.
promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, or The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint
they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss
chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes
scratches and water spotting. and polishes that are non-abrasive and made
High pressure car washes may cause water to for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
enter the vehicle. Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and
other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’s
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash
a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use
and lenses. Follow instructions under Washing non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for
Your Vehicle on page 439. painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Finish Care Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,

weather, and chemical fallout that can take their
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle toll over a period of years. To help keep the
by hand may be necessary to remove residue paint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in a
from the paint finish. GM-approved cleaning garage or covered whenever possible.
products can be obtained from your dealer. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 444.

440
Windshield and Wiper Blades Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or
If the windshield is not clear after using the cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or
windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters chrome-plated wheels, you could damage the
when running, wax, sap, or other material may surface of the wheel(s). The repairs would
be on the blade or windshield. not be covered by your warranty. Use
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass only GM-approved cleaners on aluminum or
cleaning liquid or powder and water solution. chrome-plated wheels.
The windshield is clean if beads do not form when The surface of these wheels is similar to the
it is rinsed with water. painted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive
blades and affect their performance. Clean cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning
the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked brushes on them because you could damage
in full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then the surface. Do not use chrome polish on
rinse the blade with water. aluminum wheels.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum
necessary; replace blades that look worn. wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,
Your vehicle may have either aluminum or but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and
chrome-plated wheels. buff off immediately after application.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean
towel. A wax may then be applied.
441
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an Sheet Metal Damage
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes, you could damage If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet
the aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. metal repair or replacement, make sure the body
The repairs would not be covered by your repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to
warranty. Never drive a vehicle equipped with parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through protection.
an automatic car wash that uses silicone Original manufacturer replacement parts will
carbide tire cleaning brushes. provide the corrosion protection while maintaining
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic the warranty.
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes. These brushes can also damage Finish Damage
the surface of these wheels.
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in
Tires the finish should be repaired right away. Bare
metal will corrode quickly and may develop into
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire major repair expense.
cleaner. Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing touch-up materials available from your GM dealer.
products on your vehicle may damage the Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire in your GM dealer’s body and paint shop.
dressing, always wipe off any overspray
from all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

442
Underbody Maintenance Chemical Paint Spotting
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and Some weather and atmospheric conditions can
dust control can collect on the underbody. If these create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can
are not removed, corrosion and rust can develop fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the
on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,
frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even though ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular
they have corrosion protection. dark spots etched into the paint surface.
At least every spring, flush these materials from Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM
the underbody with plain water. Clean any will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces
areas where mud and debris can collect. Dirt of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition
packed in close areas of the frame should within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of
be loosened before being flushed. Your dealer or purchase, whichever occurs first.
an underbody car washing system can do this
for you.

443
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials Description Usage
Description Usage Removes swirl marks, fine
Swirl Remover Polish scratches, and other light
Polishing Cloth Interior and exterior surface contamination.
Wax-Treated polishing cloth.
Cleaner Wax Removes light scratches
Tar and Road Oil Removes tar, road oil, and protects finish.
Remover and asphalt.
Cleans, shines, and
Chrome Cleaner and Use on chrome or Foaming Tire Shine protects in one step. No
Polish stainless steel. Low Gloss
wiping necessary.
White Sidewall Tire Removes soil and black Medium foaming
Cleaner marks from whitewalls. shampoo. Cleans and
Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl. Wash Wax Concentrate lightly waxes.
Removes dirt, grime, Biodegradable and
Glass Cleaner phosphate free.
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime Quickly removes spots
Chrome and Wire Wheel and stains from carpets,
Cleaner from chrome wheels and Spot Lifter
wire wheel covers. vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface Odorless spray odor
Finish Enhancer Odor Eliminator eliminator used on fabrics,
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off. vinyl, leather and carpet.

444
Vehicle Identification Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) code. This code will help you identify your vehicle’s
engine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification Label

You will find this label on your spare tire cover.
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
On this label, you will find the following:
• VIN
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It • Model designation
appears on a plate in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can see
• Paint information
it if you look through the windshield from outside • Production options and special equipment
your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
Certification and Service Parts labels and the
certificates of title and registration.

445
Electrical System Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an
Add-On Electrical Equipment internal circuit breaker. If the wiper motor
overheats due to heavy snow, the wipers will stop
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your until the motor cools and will then restart.
vehicle unless you check with your dealer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
your vehicle and the damage would not
Power Windows and Other Power
be covered by your warranty. Some add-on Options
electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should. Circuit breakers protect the power windows and
power seats. When the current load is too
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery, heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,
even if your vehicle is not operating. protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before goes away.
attempting to add anything electrical to your
vehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 84.

446
Fuses and Circuit Breakers Underhood Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected
from short circuits by a combination of fuses
and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces
the chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.
If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.
Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new
one of the identical size and rating. If a fuse blows,
see your dealer for service immediately.
If you ever have a problem on the road and
don’t have a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one
that has the same amperage. Pick some
feature of your vehicle that you can get along
without – like the radio or cigarette lighter – and The underhood fuse block is located in the engine
use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage. Replace compartment on the passenger’s side of the
it as soon as you can. vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on
The fuses are located in three fuse blocks, one page 342 for more information on location.
located in the engine compartment on the To access the fuses, push in the two tabs located
passenger’s side and the other two under the on each side of the fuse block cover. Then lift
rear seat. the cover off.

447
 Relays Usage
HI BEAM High-Beam Headlamps
RELAY MICRO
DRL RELAY
MICRO-OPT Daytime Running Lamps
LO BEAM
RELAY/HID Low-Beam Headlamps
MINI-OPT
HDLP WASH
RELAY Headlamp Washer Motor
MINI-OPT
SPARE Not Used
BLOWER Front Blower
RELAY MINI
Relays Usage FOG LAMP Fog Lamps
RELAY MICRO
LO SPEED
FAN Low Speed Fan Motor MAIN RELAY Powertrain/Engine Control
RELAY MINI MICRO Module (ECM)
HI SPEED FAN STARTER
High Speed Fan Motor RELAY MINI Starter Solenoid
RELAY MINI
ACCESSORY CMP CLU
Wipe-Wash Compressor Clutch
RELAY MINI RELAY MICRO
S/P FAN IGN-1 RELAY Ignition Switch (ON)
RELAY MINI Series/Parallel Fan MICRO
PARK LAMP Parking Lamps
RELAY MICRO
HORN RELAY Horn
MICRO

448
 Wiring Usage Fuses Usage
Harnesses Passenger’s Side Taillamp
BODY W/H Wiring Harness Connection RT PARK Assembly, Front Sidemarker and
BODY W/H Wiring Harness Connection Front Parking Lamp Assembly
ENG W/H Engine Wiring Harness Connection HORN Dual Horn Assembly
LT HI BEAM Driver’s Side High-Beam Headlamp
LT LOW BEAM Driver’s Side Low-Beam Headlamp
J Cases Usage Passenger’s Side Low-Beam
RRPDB (Passenger’s Side Rear RT LOW BEAM Headlamp
R REAR
Power Distribution Box)
RRPDB (Passenger’s Side Rear RT HI BEAM Passenger’s
Headlamp
Side High-Beam
R REAR
Power Distribution Box) Manual Transmission Output Speed
LRPDB (Driver’s Side Rear Power TOS Sensor
L REAR
Distribution Box) SPARE Not Used
LRPDB (Driver’s Side Rear Power ECM (Engine Control Module), TCM
L REAR
Distribution Box) THEFT (Transmission Control Module),
HI FAN High Cooling Fan Motor PASS-Key® III+ Module
LO FAN Low Cooling Fan Motor Driver’s Side Taillamp Assembly,
BLOWER PWM Fan Motor Assembly LT PARK Front Sidemarker and Front Parking
Lamp Assembly
STARTER Starter Solenoid
DIMMING Rear License Plate Assembly, Dash
ABS Anti-Lock Brake System Integrated Module (DIM)
DIM/ALDL DIM, ALDL (Assembly Line
Data Link)
FLASHER Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Module
ECM Electronic Control Module

449
 Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
Turn
STRG CTLS SwitchSignal Switch, Cruise Control ODD INJ/COIL Odd Injection Coils Fuel Injectors,
Odd Ignition Coils,

Clutch Switch (Normal Closed), COMP CLUTCH Compressor Clutch

HTR VLV/ Clutch Switch (Normal Open), WPR SW Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
CLTCH Jumper to Start Relay Coil for
Automatic Transmission FOG LAMP Fog Lamps
Driver’s and Passenger’s Side OUTLET Center Console Accessory Power
WASH NOZ Outlet
Heated Washer Nozzles
Driver’s & Passenger’s Side Oxygen Driver’s and Passenger’s Side
PRE O2/CAM Sensors, CAM Phaser, Canister POST 02 Oxygen Sensors, LRPDB (Pusher
Purge Cooling Fan Relay)
Transmission Control Module, Instrument Panel Accessory Power
I/P OUTLET Outlet
TCM/IPC Engine Control Module, Instrument
Panel Cluster CCP Climate Control
SPARE Not Used EVEN INJ/COIL Even Injection Coils
IGN MOD/MAF Mass Airflow Sensor SPARE Not Used
ELEC PRNDL Electronic PRNDL (Export) SPARE Not Used
SPARE Not Used SPARE Not Used
SPARE Not Used
IGN SW Ignition Switch (Power to IGN-3 and Circuit
CRANK) Breakers Usage
VOLT CHECK DIM (Dash Integration Module) HDLP WASH Headlamp Washer Motor
TCM (Transmission Control Module), C/B-OPT
ECM/TCM ECM (Engine Control Module), IPC
(Instrument Panel Cluster),
PASS-Key® III+ Module Misc. Usage
WPR MOD Windshield Wiper Module Assembly FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller

450
Rear Underseat Fuse Block To remove the rear seat cushion, do the following:
1. Pull up on the front of the cushion to release
To access the rear underseat fuse blocks, you will
the front hooks.
have to first remove the rear seat cushion.
2. Pull the cushion up and out toward the front
Removing the Rear Seat Cushion of the vehicle.
Notice: If, when removing or reinstalling the 3. Slide the cushion out one of the rear doors
rear seat, you do not do it carefully, you and set it aside.
could damage the fuse center. Avoid contact
between the rear seat and the fuse center
whenever you remove or reinstall the rear seat.

Rear Pass-Through Seat

451
 {CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly routed
through the seat cushion or is twisted will
not provide the protection needed in a
crash. If the safety belt has not been
routed through the seat cushion at all, it
will not be there to work for the next
passenger. The person sitting in that
position could be badly injured. After
reinstalling the seat cushion, always
check to be sure that the safety belts are
properly routed and are not twisted.
Split-Folding Rear Seat
To reinstall the rear seat cushion, do the following:
1. Position the seat cushion so that you can
route the safety belts through the proper
slots in the seat cushion.
2. Slide the rear of the cushion up and under the
seatback so the rear-locating guides hook into
the wire loops on the back frame.

452
 3. With the seat cushion lowered, push rearward To access the fuse block, push in the two tabs
and then press down on the seat cushion until located at each end of the fuse block cover. Then
the seat cushion snaps into place. lift the cover off.
4. Push and pull on the seat cushion to make
sure it is locked into place.
5. Check to make sure the safety belts are
properly routed and that no portion of any
safety belt is trapped under the seat cushion.
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
(Driver’s Side) Fuses Usage
SPARE Not Used
SPARE Not Used
AUDIO Radio, OnStar Module
SPARE Not Used
REAR DR MOD Rear Door Modules
SPARE Not Used
DRIVER
DR MOD Driver’s Door Module
The driver’s side rear fuse block is located under
the rear seat on the driver’s side of the vehicle. Taillamps, Center High-Mounted
BAS Stoplamp, Flasher Module, ABS
The rear seat cushion must be removed to access Module, Trailer Lamps
the rear fuse block. See “Removing the Rear Headlamp Leveling System Chassis
Seat Cushion” listed previously. HDLP LEVELING Sensors (Export Only)
SPARE Not Used
CCP CCP (Climate Control Panel)

453
 Fuses Usage Relays Usage
IGN 3 Heated Seat Modules, Air Inlet PUSHER FAN Pusher Fan (Export Only)
Motor, Shifter Assembly L POSITION Driver’s Side Position Lamp
SPARE Not Used RELAY MICRO (Export Only)
SPARE Not Used TRK DR REL
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller SOL RELAY Trunk Release Motor
MICRO
L FRT HTD Driver’s Heated Seat Module
SEAT MOD REV LAMP ISRVM (Inside Rearview Mirror),
RELAY MICRO License Plate Lamp Assembly
MEM/ADAPT Driver’s Power Seat Switch, Memory
SEAT Seat Module R POSITION Passenger’s Side Position Lamp
RELAY MICRO (Export Only)
TRUNK
DR RELEASE Trunk Release Motor IGN 3 RELAY Heated Seat Modules, Air Inlet
MICRO Motor, Shifter Assembly
REVERSE ISRVM (Inside Rearview Mirror),
LAMP License Plate Lamp Assembly STANDING Control for Position Lamp Relays
LAMP (Export Only)
SPARE Not Used RLY MICRO
POSITION Taillamp Assemblies, Front Position
LAMP Lamp Assemblies (Export Only)
Circuit
Breakers Usage
J Cases Usage Power Seat Switches, Memory Seat
AMP Audio Amplifier SEAT C/B Module
PUSHER FAN Pusher Fan (Export Only)
Misc. Usage
Relays Usage JOINT Joint Connector
BAS RELAY CONNECTOR
MINI Brake Apply Sensor

454
Rear Underseat Fuse Block Fuses Usage
(Passenger’s Side) TRUNK DIODE Trunk Lamp
POWER Power Sounder, Inclination Sensor
SOUNDER (Export Only)
SPARE Not Used
CANISTER Canister Vent Solenoid
VENT
FUEL
PUMP MTR Fuel Pump Motor
SPARE Not Used
The passenger’s side rear fuse block is located R FRT HTD Passenger’s Side Heated Seat
under the rear seat on the passenger’s side of the SEAT MOD Module
vehicle. The rear seat cushion must be removed SPARE Not Used
to access the rear fuse block. See “Removing AIR BAG SDM (Sensing Diagnostic Module)
the Rear Seat Cushion” listed previously. RIM ISRVM (Inside Rearview Mirror),
Power Sounder, RIM
To access the fuse block, push in the two tabs
ABS Anti-Lock Brake System
located at each end of the fuse block cover. Then
lift the cover off. SPARE Not Used
SPARE Not Used
SPARE Not Used
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller

455
 Fuses Usage Relays Usage
INTERIOR Hush Panel Lamps, Puddle Lamps, FUEL PUMP
LAMP Overhead Courtesy Lamp Assembly MOTOR Fuel Pump Motor
PSGR DR MOD Right Front Passenger Door Module RLY MICRO
RIM (Rear Integration Module), INT LAMP Hush Panel Lamps, Puddle Lamps,
RIM/IGN SW Ignition Switch, Key Lock Cylinder RELAY MICRO Overhead Courtesy Lamp Assembly
REAR FOG IGN 1 RELAY
Rear Fog Lamps (Export Only) MICRO Ignition Switch
LAMP
SPARE Not Used SPARE Not Used
TV Tuner Assembly (Export Only),
TV/VICS VICS (Vehicle Information
Communication System) Module Circuit
Breakers Usage
DR MOD Door Modules
J Cases Usage PWR C/B
REAR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger Element
SUNROOF Misc. Usage
Power Sunroof Module
MOD
JOINT Joint Connector
CONNECTOR
Relays Usage
SPARE Not Used
REAR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger
RELAY MINI
SPARE Not Used
REAR FOG
LAMP Rear Fog Lamps (Export Only)
RLY MICRO

456
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 474 for more information.

Capacities
Application
English Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
under the hood. See your dealer for more
information.
Cooling System
2.8L HFV6 Engine 11.7 qt 11.1 L
3.6L HFV6 Engine 12.1 qt 11.8 L
6.0L V8 Engine 13.4 qt 12.7 L
Engine Oil with Filter
2.8L HFV6 Engine 6.0 qt 5.7 L
3.6L HFV6 Engine 6.0 qt 5.7 L
6.0L V8 Engine 6.0 qt 5.7 L
Fuel Tank 17.5 gal 66.2 L

457
 Capacities
Application
English Metric
Transmission (Pan Removal and Replacement)
Automatic 7.4 qt 7.0 L
6-Speed Manual – CTS 1.9 qt 1.8 L
6-Speed Manual – CTS-V 3.7 qt 3.5 L
Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft (140 Y)
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
2.8L HFV6 T Automatic Manual 0.043 inches (1.1 mm)
Automatic
3.6L HFV6 7 0.043 inches (1.1 mm)
Manual
6.0L V8 U Manual 0.040 inches (1.02 mm)

CTS-V Engine Data

Engine Horsepower Torque Displacement Compression Ratio
400 hp (298 kW) @ 395 ft lb (536 Nm) @
6.0L V8 (LS2) 6.0 L 10.9:1
6000 rpm 4400 rpm

458
 Section 6 Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 460 Owner Checks and Services ..................... 469
Introduction ............................................... 460 At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 470
Maintenance Requirements ........................ 460 At Least Once a Month ............................. 470
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 461 At Least Once a Year ............................... 471
Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 461 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 474
Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 463 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 476
Additional Required Services ..................... 466 Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 477
Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 467 Maintenance Record .................................. 478

459
Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,
Introduction inspections, replacement parts, and
recommended fluids and lubricants as
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level
prescribed in this manual are necessary to
and change as recommended.
keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered
by warranty.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The

Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties.
See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet
or your dealer for details.

460
Your Vehicle and the Environment Using the Maintenance Schedule
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep We at General Motors want to help you keep your
your vehicle in good working condition, but also vehicle in good working condition. But we do
helps the environment. All recommended not know exactly how you will drive it. You may
maintenance is important. Improper vehicle drive very short distances only a few times a week.
maintenance can even affect the quality of the air Or you may drive long distances all the time in
we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle
tire inflation can increase the level of emissions in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
and to keep your vehicle in good condition, be Because of all the different ways people use their
sure to maintain your vehicle properly. vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may
need more frequent checks and replacements.
So please read the following and note how
you drive. If you have any questions on how to
keep your vehicle in good condition, see your
GM Goodwrench® dealer.

461
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within {CAUTION:
recommended limits. You will find these limits
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
Performing maintenance work on a
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 321.
vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within some jobs, you can be seriously injured.
legal driving limits. Do your own maintenance work only if
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline you have the required know-how and the
Octane on page 334. proper tools and equipment for the job.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on If you have any doubt, see your GM
page 463 should be performed when indicated. Goodwrench® dealer to have a qualified
See Additional Required Services on page 466 and technician do the work.
Maintenance Footnotes on page 467 for further
information.
Some maintenance services can be complex.
So, unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, you should have
your GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for
your service needs, you will know that GM-trained
and supported service technicians will perform
the work using genuine GM parts.

462
If you want to purchase service information, see Scheduled Maintenance
Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 501. When the Change Engine Oil message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on,
Owner Checks and Services on page 469 tells you it means that service is required for your vehicle.
what should be checked, when to check it, and Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible
good condition. that, if you are driving under the best conditions,
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and the engine oil life system may not indicate
lubricants to use are listed in Recommended that vehicle service is necessary for over a year.
Fluids and Lubricants on page 474 and Normal However, your engine oil and filter must be
Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 476. changed at least once a year and at this time the
When your vehicle is serviced, make sure these system must be reset. Your GM Goodwrench®
are used. All parts should be replaced and all dealer has GM-trained service technicians who will
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else perform this work using genuine GM parts and
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of reset the system.
genuine GM parts.

463
If the engine oil life system is ever reset Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the
accidentally, you must service your vehicle within change engine oil message comes on within
3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service. 10 months since the vehicle was purchased or
Remember to reset the oil life system whenever Maintenance II was performed.
the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System on Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the
page 350 for information on the Engine Oil Life previous service performed was Maintenance I.
System and resetting the system. Always use Maintenance II whenever the message
When the Change Engine Oil message appears, comes on 10 months or more since the last
certain services, checks, and inspections are service or if the message has not come on at all
required. Required services are described in the for one year.
following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”
Generally, it is recommended that your first
service be Maintenance I, your second service
be Maintenance II, and that you alternate
Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.
However, in some cases, Maintenance II may be
required more often.

464
 Scheduled Maintenance
Service Maintenance I Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 346. Reset oil life system.
• •
See Engine Oil Life System on page 350. An Emission Control Service.
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k). • •
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
•
Cleaner/Filter on page 352. See footnote (n).
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 409 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month • •
on page 470.
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid
• •
as needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
• •
in this section.
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g). •

465
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000 125,000 150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(40 000) (80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
• • • • • •
or leaks.
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
• • • • • •
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
• •
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 352.
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (severe service only). • • •
See footnote (h).
CTS-V Only: Change 6-speed manual
transmission fluid (severe service only). • • •
See footnotes (l) and (m).
CTS-V Only: Change hydraulic clutch
fluid (severe service only). • • • • • •
See footnote (l).
CTS-V Only: Change rear axle fluid
(severe service only). • • •
See footnotes (l) and (m).

466
 Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000 125,000 150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(40 000) (80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
CTS-V Only: Change brake fluid
• • • • • •
(severe service only). See footnote (l).
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
•
Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
•
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. •
See footnote (p).
If using DOT-4 brake fluid, change
brake fluid at a regular maintenance
service every two years.
See footnote (j).

Maintenance Footnotes (b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for parts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines
proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors cracks, chafing, etc.
for surface condition. Inspect other brake
parts, including calipers, parking brake, etc.

467
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced (f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all
if they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. body door hinges. Lubricate all hinges and latches,
Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with including those for the hood, rear compartment,
genuine GM parts as needed. To help ensure console door, and any folding seat hardware.
proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling More frequent lubrication may be required when
system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth
recommended at least once a year. will make them last longer, seal better, and not
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or stick or squeak.
cracking. Replace wiper blades that appear worn (g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the filter may require replacement more often.
the windshield. (h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and more of these conditions:
anchorages are working properly. Look for − In heavy city traffic where the outside
any other loose or damaged safety belt system temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety or higher.
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.
Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Also − In hilly or mountainous terrain.
look for any opened or broken airbag coverings, − When doing frequent trailer towing.
and have them repaired or replaced. The − Uses such as high performance operation.
airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require
changing.

468
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This (n) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
service can be complex; you should have inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
your dealer perform this service. See Engine (p) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive
Coolant on page 357 for what to use. Inspect cracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt if
hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure necessary.
cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling
system and pressure cap.
Owner Checks and Services
(j) If using DOT-4 brake fluid only: Drain, flush,
and refill brake hydraulic system at a regular These owner checks and services should be
maintenance service (I or II) every two years. performed at the intervals specified to help ensure
This service can be complex; you should the safety, dependability, and emission control
have your dealer perform this service. See performance of your vehicle. Your GM
Brakes on page 372. Goodwrench® dealer can assist you with these
checks and services.
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could
indicate a problem. Have the system inspected Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at
and repaired and the fluid level checked. Add once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added
fluid if needed. to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper
ones, as shown in Recommended Fluids and
(l) Change fluid if the vehicle is used for high
Lubricants on page 474.
performance operation.
(m) Change fluid whenever the vehicle has been
driven for 3,000 miles (5 000 km) with the
transmission temperature at 290°F (143°C) or
higher without using an auxiliary fluid cooler. See
Message Center (CTS-V) on page 209 and
Transmission Fluid Hot Message on page 214.

469
At Each Fuel Fill At Least Once a Month
It is important to perform these underhood checks Tire Inflation Check
at each fuel fill.
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make
Engine Oil Level Check sure they are inflated to the correct pressures.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil Do not forget to check the spare tire. See Tires on
if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 346 for page 392 for further details. Check to make
further details. sure the spare tire is stored securely. See
Changing a Flat Tire (CTS Only) on page 424.
Notice: It is important to check your oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure Tire Wear Inspection
to keep your engine oil at the proper level Tire rotation may be required for high mileage
can cause damage to your engine not covered highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System
by your warranty. service notification. Check the tires for wear
and, if necessary, rotate the tires. See Tire
Engine Coolant Level Check
Inspection and Rotation on page 409.
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See
Engine Coolant on page 357 for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in
the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add
the proper fluid if necessary.

470
At Least Once a Year 3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start
the engine in each gear. The vehicle should
Starter Switch Check start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
{CAUTION: On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedal
When you are doing this inspection, the down halfway, and try to start the engine.
vehicle could move suddenly. If the The vehicle should start only when the clutch
vehicle moves, you or others could be pedal is pushed down all the way to the
injured. floor. If the vehicle starts when the clutch pedal
is not pushed all the way down, contact your
GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the
regular brake. See Parking Brake on
page 124.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if
it starts.

471
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Ignition Transmission Lock Check
Control System Check While parked, and with the parking brake set,
try to turn the ignition to OFF in each shift lever
position.
{CAUTION: • With an automatic transmission, the ignition
should turn to OFF only when the shift lever
When you are doing this inspection, the is in PARK (P). The ignition key should
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle come out only in OFF.
moves, you or others could be injured.
• With a manual transmission, the ignition
should turn to OFF only when the key release
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough button is pressed. The ignition key should
room around the vehicle. It should be parked come out only in OFF.
on a level surface. Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking is required.
Brake on page 124.
Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON,
but do not start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the
shift lever moves out of PARK (P), contact
your GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

472
Parking Brake and Automatic Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular
brake, set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
{CAUTION: With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
When you are doing this check, your from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle could begin to move. You or vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
others could be injured and property • To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
could be damaged. Make sure there is ability: With the engine running, shift to
room in front of your vehicle in case it PARK (P). Then release the parking brake
begins to roll. Be ready to apply the followed by the regular brake.
regular brake at once should the vehicle Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service
begin to move. is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush
any corrosive materials from the underbody.
Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where
mud and other debris can collect.

473
Recommended Fluids and Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Lubricants ®
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification may be obtained Windshield GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
from your dealer. Washer
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid. Use only
Usage Fluid/Lubricant Hydraulic GM Part No. U.S. 88958860,
The engine requires a special Clutch System in Canada 88901244, Super DOT-4
engine oil meeting GM Standard brake fluid.
GM4718M. Oils meeting this Chassis Lubricant
standard may be identified as (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
synthetic, and should also be Parking Brake Canada 88901242) or lubricant
identified with the American Cable Guides
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Petroleum Institute Certified for Category LB or GC-LB.
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
Engine Oil However, not all synthetic API oils
Power Steering GM
Power Steering Fluid
with the starburst symbol will meet (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
this GM standard. You should System in Canada 89021186).
look for and use only an oil that
meets GM Standard GM4718M. Manual SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all Transmission (GM Part No. U.S. 89021806,
the requirements for your vehicle. (CTS) in Canada 89021807).
For the proper viscosity, see
Engine Oil on page 346. Manual DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable (CTS-V)
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant Coolant. See Engine Coolant Automatic DEXRON®-VI Automatic
on page 357. Transmission Transmission Fluid.

474
 Usage Fluid/Lubricant Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Key Lock Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube Hood Latch

Cylinders (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, Assembly, Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
in Canada 10953474). Secondary (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol Spring meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Floor Shift (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, Anchor, and Category LB or GC-LB.
in Canada 992723) or lubricant Release Pawl
Linkage meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB. Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hood and Door (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Hinges
in Canada 10953474).
Axle Lubricant
Rear Axle (GM Part No. U.S. 12378261, Weatherstrip Lubricant
in Canada 10953455) meeting (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
GM Specification 9986115. Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Conditioning Dielectric Silicone Grease
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
Axle Lubricant in Canada 992887).
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,
in Canada 10953455) meeting
Rear Axle GM Specification 9986115.
(Limited-Slip With a complete drain and refill
Differential) add 4 ounces (118 ml) of
Limited-Slip Axle Lubricant Additive
(GM Part No. U.S. 1052358,
in Canada 992694) where required.
See Rear Axle on page 383

475
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Numbers ACDelco® Part

Numbers
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
2.8L V6 and 3.6L V6 Engines 25728874 A2029C
6.0L V8 Engine 25750701 A1623C
Engine Oil Filter
2.8L V6 and 3.6L V6 Engines 25177917 PF2129
6.0L V8 Engine 89017524 PF48
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 25740404 CF133
Spark Plugs
2.8L and 3.6L HFV6 Engines 12597464 41-990
6.0L V8 Engine 12571164 41-985
Wiper Blades (Hook Type)
Driver’s Side – 22 inches (56.5 cm) 12487636 —
Passenger’s Side – 21 inches (53.3 cm) 12487638 —

476
Engine Drive Belt Routing

6.0L V8 Engine

2.8L V6 and 3.6L V6 Engines

477
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,
and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 460.
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 469 can be added on the following
record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II

478
 Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II

479
 Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II

480
 Section 7 Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ....... 482 Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 500
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 482 Reporting Safety Defects to the
Online Owner Center ................................. 485 United States Government ..................... 500
Customer Assistance for Text Reporting Safety Defects to the
Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 486 Canadian Government ............................ 500
Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 486 Reporting Safety Defects to
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 487 General Motors ...................................... 500
Roadside Service ...................................... 488 Service Publications Ordering
Courtesy Transportation ............................. 491 Information ............................................. 501
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders .............................................. 494
Collision Damage Repair ........................... 495

481
Customer Assistance and STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern
Information cannot be resolved by the dealership without
further help, in the United States, contact the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure Cadillac Customer Assistance Center, 24 hours
a day, by calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada,
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important contact the Canadian Cadillac Customer
to your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any Communication Centre by calling 1-888-446-2000.
concerns with the sales transaction or the
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in
operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please
dealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,
have the following information available to give the
however, despite the best intentions of all
Customer Assistance Representative:
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your
concern has not been resolved to your • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken: This is available from the vehicle registration
or title, or the plate at the top left of the
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member instrument panel and visible through the
of dealership management. Normally, concerns windshield.
can be quickly resolved at that level. If the
matter has already been reviewed with the sales,
• Dealership name and location.
service or parts manager, contact the owner • Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
of the dealership or the general manager. When contacting Cadillac, please remember
that your concern will likely be resolved at
a dealer’s facility. That is why we suggest you
follow Step One first if you have a concern.

482
STEP THREE (United States Owners): Both You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using
General Motors and your dealer are committed the toll-free telephone number or write them at the
to making sure you are completely satisfied following address:
with your new vehicle. However, if you continue BBB Auto Line Program
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file 4200 Wilson Boulevard
with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Suite 800
Program to enforce your rights. Arlington, VA 22203-1838
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
program administered by the Council of Better This program is available in all 50 states and
Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited
regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation by vehicle age, mileage and other factors.
of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you General Motors reserves the right to change
may be required to resort to this informal dispute eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its
resolution program prior to filing a court action, participation in this program.
use of the program is free of charge and your case
will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do
not agree with the decision given in your case, you
may reject it and proceed with any other venue
for relief available to you.

483
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners): For further information concerning eligibility in
General Motors Participation in the the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
Mediation/Arbitration Program (CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.
Alternatively you may call the General Motors
In the event that you do not feel your concerns Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
have been addressed after the following the (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you may
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two. write to the Mediation/Arbitration Program at
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you the following address. Your inquiry should
to be aware of its participation in a no-charge be accompanied by your Vehicle Identification
mediation/Arbitration program. General Motors Number (VIN).
of Canada Limited has committed to binding
arbitration of owner disputes involving Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
factory-related vehicle service claims. The
General Motors of Canada Limited
program provides for the review of the facts Mail Code: CA1–163–005
involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
may include an informal hearing before the arbiter. Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
The program is designed so that the entire
dispute settlement process, from the time you file
your complaint to the final decision, should be
completed in approximately 70 days. We believe
our impartial program offers advantages over
courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal,
quick, and free of charge.

484
Online Owner Center Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for
updated information and to register your vehicle.
Online Owner Center My GM Canada (Canada only)
(United States only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM of gmcanada.com where you can save information
ownership needs. Specific vehicle information on GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and
can be found in one place. use handy tools and forms with greater ease.
The Online Owner Center allows you to: Here are a few of the valuable tools and services
• Get e-mail service reminders. you will have access to:
• Access information about your specific − My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicle, including tips and videos and vehicles and current offers in your area.
an electronic version of this owner manual. − My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history address and phone number for each of
and maintenance schedule. your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide. − My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
• Receive special promotions and privileges your vehicle.
only available to members.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile,
subscribe to E-News and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM
Canada section within www.gmcanada.com.

485
Customer Assistance for Text www.Cadillac.com
1-800-458-8006
Telephone (TTY) Users 1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Text Telephones (TTYs), Cadillac has TTY
equipment available at its Customer Assistance From Puerto Rico:
Center. Any TTY user can communicate with 1-800-496-9992 (English)
Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622). 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
Customer Assistance Offices 1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer
Canada — Customer Assistance
wishes to write or e-mail Cadillac, the letter should General Motors of Canada Limited
be addressed to: Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre, CA1-163-005
United States — Customer Assistance 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Cadillac Motor Car Division www.gmcanada.com
P.O. Box 33169 1-888-446-2000
Detroit, MI 48232-5169 1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112

486
Overseas — Customer Assistance GM Mobility Reimbursement
Please contact the local General Motors Program
Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center This program, available to qualified applicants,
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost
Col. Lomas de Bezares of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F. for your vehicle, such as hand controls or a
01-800-508-0000 wheelchair/scooter lift.
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
The offer is available for a very limited period of
time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GM
Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility
Program. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

487
Roadside Service Who Is Covered?
In the United States or Canada, call Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
1-800-882-1112 operator, regardless of ownership. A person driving
this vehicle without the consent of the owner is
Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year not eligible for coverage.
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more The following services are provided in the United
than an auto club or towing service. It provides States during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty
every Cadillac owner with the advantage of period and in Canada, during the Base Warranty
contacting a Cadillac advisor and, in the United coverage period of the New Vehicle Limited
States, where available, a Cadillac trained dealer Warranty, up to a maximum coverage of $100.
technician who can provide on-site service. These services are provided at a nominal charge
Each United States technician travels with a if the Cadillac is no longer covered by the
specially equipped service vehicle complete with warranties listed previously. Roadside Service is
the necessary Cadillac parts and tools required to available only in the United States and Canada.
handle most roadside repairs.
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
Roadside Service provides several Cadillac
Owner Privileges™ at “no charge,” throughout
your Cadillac Warranty Period — 48 months/
50,000 miles (80 000 km).

488
Emergency Road Service is performed on site for • Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
the following situations: customer to get to the nearest service station
• Towing Service: Emergency towing from a (approximately $5 in the United States and
public roadway or highway to the nearest 10 litres in Canada). Service to provide diesel
dealership for warranty service or in the event may be restricted. For safety reasons,
of a vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-out propane and other alternative fuels will not be
assistance when the vehicle is mired in sand, provided through this service.
mud, or snow. • Flat Tire Change (Covers change only):
• Battery Jump Starting: No-start occurrences Installation of your spare tire, in good
which require a battery jump start will be condition, will be covered at no charge. The
covered at no charge. customer is responsible for the repair or
replacement of the tire if not covered by a
• Lock Out Assistance: To ensure security, warrantable failure.
the driver must present the vehicle registration
and personal ID before lock-out service is • Trip Interruption: If your trip is interrupted
provided. Lock-out service will be covered at due to a warranty failure, incidental expenses
no charge if you are unable to gain entry may be reimbursed during the
into your vehicle. If your vehicle will not 48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km) warranty
start, Roadside Service will arrange to have period. Items covered are hotel, meals,
your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized and rental car.
dealership. In the United States, replacement
keys made at the customer’s expense will
be delivered within 10 miles.

489
Additional Services for Canadian Roadside Service Availability
Customers Wherever you drive in the United States or
• Trip Routing Service: Upon request, Cadillac Canada, an advisor is available to assist you over
Roadside Service will send you detailed, the phone. A dealer technician, if available, can
computer-personalized maps, highlighting travel to your location within a 30 mile (50 km)
your choice of either the most direct route or radius of a participating Cadillac dealership.
the most scenic route to your destination, If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have your
anywhere in North America, along with any car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership.
helpful travel information we may have For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,
pertaining to your trip. To request this service, please provide the following to the Roadside
please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800. Service Representative:
We will make every attempt to send your
• A description of the problem
personalized trip routing as quickly as possible,
but it is best to allow three weeks before your • Name, home address, home
planned departure date. Trip routing requests telephone number
will be limited to six per calendar year. • Location of your Cadillac and number you
• Alternative Service: There may be times are calling from
when Roadside Service cannot provide timely • The model year, Vehicle Identification Number
assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to (VIN), odometer reading, and date of delivery
secure local emergency road service, and you
will be reimbursed up to $100 upon submission While we hope you never have the occasion to use
of the original receipt to Cadillac Roadside our service, it is added security while traveling
Service®. for you and your family. Remember, we are only a
phone call away. In the United States or Canada,
customers call Roadside Service: 1-800-882-1112.

490
Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or a Courtesy Transportation
conventional teletypewriter can communicate with
Cadillac by dialing from the United States or To enhance your ownership experience, we and
Canada 1-888-889-2438 — daily, 24 hours. our participating dealers are proud to offer
Courtesy Transportation, a customer support
Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited program for new vehicles.
reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement
to an owner or driver when, in their sole For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper
discretion, the claims become excessive in (United States) or Base Warranty Coverage
frequency or type of occurrence. period (Canada), provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, interim transportation may
Roadside Service is not part of or included in the be available under the courtesy transportation
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited program. Several courtesy transportation options
Warranty. Cadillac and General Motors of Canada are available when warranty repairs are required
Limited reserve the right to make any changes to assist in reducing your inconvenience.
or discontinue the Roadside Service program
at any time without notification. Courtesy Transportation is not part of the new
Vehicle Limited Warranty and is available only at
Towing and Road Service Exclusions participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled
Specifically excluded from Roadside Service “Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”
coverage are towing or services for vehicles furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed
operated on a non-public roadway or highway, warranty coverage information.
fines, impound towing caused by a violation
of local, Municipal, State, Provincial or Federal
law, and mounting, dismounting or changing
of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

491
Scheduling Service Appointments Transportation Options
When your vehicle requires warranty service, Warranty service can generally be completed
you should contact your dealer and request an while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,
appointment. By scheduling a service appointment GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by
and advising your service consultant of your providing several transportation options.
transportation needs, your dealer can help Depending on the circumstances, your dealer
minimize your inconvenience. can offer you one of the following:
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the Shuttle Service
service department immediately, keep driving it
until it can be scheduled for service, unless, Shuttle Service is the preferred means of offering
of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is, Courtesy Transportation and participating
please call your dealership, let them know this, dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get
and ask for instructions. you to your destination with minimal interruption
of your daily schedule. This includes one-way
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as and distance parameters for the dealer’s area.
early in the work day as possible to allow for
the same day repair.

492
Public Transportation or Fuel This requires that you sign and complete a rental
Reimbursement agreement and meet state/provincial, local and
rental vehicle provider requirements. Requirements
If your vehicle requires warranty repairs, and vary and may include minimum age requirements,
public transportation is used as “shuttle service,” insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You are
the reimbursement is limited to the associated responsible for fuel usage charges and may also
shuttle allowance (contact your dealer) and must be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,
be supported by original receipts. In addition, excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the
in the United States, should you arrange completion of the repair.
transportation through a friend or relative, limited
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle
may be available. Claim amounts should reflect as a courtesy rental.
actual costs and be supported by original receipts.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Rental Vehicle All program options, such as shuttle service,
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a may not be available at every dealer. Please
courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for contact your dealer for specific information
a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is about availability. All Courtesy Transportation
kept for a warranty repair. Taxi reimbursement arrangements will be administered by appropriate
may also be available if you meet the eligibility for dealer personnel.
a courtesy rental and a rental vehicle is not Cadillac and General Motors of Canada reserve
practical for your requirements. Rental and taxi the right to unilaterally modify, change or
reimbursement will be limited (contact your dealer) discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time
and must be supported by original receipts. and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at their sole discretion.

493
Vehicle Data Collection and Event This information has been used to improve vehicle
crash performance and may be used to improve
Data Recorders crash performance of future vehicles and
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, driving safety. Unlike the data recorders on many
has a number of sophisticated computer systems airplanes, these on-board systems do not
that monitor and control several aspects of the record sounds, such as conversation of vehicle
vehicle’s performance. Your vehicle uses on-board occupants.
vehicle computers to monitor emission control To read this information, special equipment is
components to optimize fuel economy, to monitor needed and access to the vehicle or the device
conditions for airbag deployment and, if the that stores the data is required. GM will not access
vehicle has the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS), information about a crash event or share it with
to provide anti-lock braking and to help the driver others other than:
control the vehicle in difficult driving situations. • with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
Some information may be stored during regular vehicle is leased, with the consent of the
operations to facilitate repair of detected lessee,
malfunctions; other information is stored only in a
crash event by computer systems, such as those • in response to an official request of police or
commonly called Event Data Recorders (EDR). similar government office,
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the • as part of GM’s defense of litigation through
airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) the discovery process, or
in your vehicle may record information about the • as required by law.
condition of the vehicle and how it was operated,
such as data related to engine speed, brake
application, throttle position, vehicle speed, safety
belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,
and the severity of a collision.

494
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, Collision Damage Repair
GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs, If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
• make it available for research where technician using the proper equipment and
appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained quality replacement parts. Poorly performed
and need is shown, or collision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resale
• share summary data which is not tied to a value, and safety performance can be
specific vehicle with non-GM organizations compromised in subsequent collisions.
for research purposes. Collision Parts
Others, such as law enforcement, may have
access to the special equipment that can read the Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made
information if they have access to the vehicle with the same materials and construction methods
or the device that stores the data. as the parts with which your vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are
If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check the your best choice to assure that your vehicle’s
OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual designed appearance, durability and safety are
for information on its operations and data preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
collection. maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

495
Recycled original equipment parts may also Repair Facility
be used for repair. These parts are typically
removed from vehicles that were total losses in GM also recommends that you choose a collision
prior accidents. In most cases, the parts being repair facility that meets your needs before you
recycled are from undamaged sections of ever need collision repairs. Your GM dealer
the vehicle. A recycled original equipment may have a collision repair center with GM-trained
GM part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain technicians and state of the art equipment, or
your vehicle’s originally designed appearance be able to recommend a collision repair center that
and safety performance, however, the history of has GM-trained technicians and comparable
these parts is not known. Such parts are not equipment.
covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Insuring Your Vehicle
Warranty, and any related failures are not
covered by that warranty. Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available.
There are significant differences in the quality
These are made by companies other than GM
of coverage afforded by various insurance policy
and may not have been tested for your vehicle.
terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced
As a result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit
protection to your GM vehicle by limiting
premature durability/corrosion problems, and may
compensation for damage repairs by using
not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend
failure related to such parts are not covered by
that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
that warranty.
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such
insurance coverage is not available from your
current insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.

496
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company • Give only the necessary and requested
may require you to have insurance that assures information to police and other parties involved
repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment in the accident. Do not discuss your personal
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine condition, mental frame of mind, or anything
Manufacturer replacement parts. Read your unrelated to the accident. This will help guard
lease carefully, as you may be charged at the against post-accident legal action.
end of your lease for poor quality repairs. • If you need roadside assistance, call
If an Accident Occurs GM Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
Service on page 488 for more information.
Here is what to do if you are involved in an
accident.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where
the towing service will be taking it. Get a
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you card from the tow truck operator or write down
are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure the driver’s name, the service’s name, and
that no one else in your vehicle, or the the phone number.
other vehicle, is injured.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help. before it is towed away. Make sure this
Do not leave the scene of an accident until includes your insurance information and
all matters have been taken care of. Move registration if you keep these items in your
your vehicle only if its position puts you vehicle.
in danger or you are instructed to move it by a
police officer.

497
 • Gather the important information you will • Choose a reputable collision repair facility for
need from the other driver. Things like name, your vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer
address, phone number, driver’s license or a private collision repair facility to fix the
number, vehicle license plate, vehicle make, damage, make sure you are comfortable with
model and model year, Vehicle Identification them. Remember, you will have to feel
Number (VIN), insurance company and comfortable with their work for a long time.
policy number, and a general description of • Once you have an estimate, read it carefully
the damage to the other vehicle. and make sure you understand what work will
• If possible, call your insurance company from be performed on your vehicle. If you have a
the scene of the accident. They will walk you question, ask for an explanation. Reputable
through the information they will need. If shops welcome this opportunity.
they ask for a police report, phone or go to
the police department headquarters the
next day and you can get a copy of the report
for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not
be necessary. This is especially true if there
are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.

498
Managing the Vehicle Damage Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
Repair Process obligated to have the vehicle repaired with
Genuine GM parts, even if your insurance
In the event that your vehicle requires damage coverage does not pay the full cost.
repairs, GM recommends that you take an active
If another party’s insurance company is paying for
role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a
repair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, or
repair valuation based on that insurance
have it towed there. Specify to the facility that
company’s collision policy repair limits, as you
any required replacement collision parts be original
have no contractual limits with that company. In
equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts such cases, you can have control of the repair and
or recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts choices as long as cost stays within
parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle reasonable limits.
warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy
limits, your insurance company may initially value
the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this
with your repair professional, and insist on
Genuine GM parts.

499
Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
United States Government vehicle has a safety defect, you should
immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.
could cause a crash or could cause injury or You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), Transport Canada
in addition to notifying General Motors. Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a Reporting Safety Defects to
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems General Motors
between you, your dealer, or General Motors.
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: you will notify us. Please call us at
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or 1-800-458-8006, or write:
write to:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Administrator, NHTSA Cadillac Motor Car Division
400 Seventh Street, SW. P.O. Box 33169
Washington, D.C. 20590 Detroit, MI 48232-5169
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
500
In Canada, please call us at 1-888-446-2000. Or, Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
write: Case Unit Repair Manual
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre, CA1-163-005 This manual provides information on unit repair
General Motors of Canada Limited service procedures, adjustments, and
1908 Colonel Sam Drive specifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 and transfer cases.
Service Bulletins
Service Publications Ordering
Service Bulletins give technical service information
Information needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
Service Manuals instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair of your vehicle.
information on engines, transmission, axle In Canada, the service bulletin reference number
suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc. can be obtained by contacting your GM dealer
or by calling 1-800-GMDRIVE (1-800-463-7483).
This reference number is needed to order the
service bulletin from Helm, Inc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee

501
Owner Information ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Owner publications are written specifically for Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
owners and intended to provide basic operational Eastern Time
information about the vehicle. The owner For Credit Card Orders Only
manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on
all models. the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, Or you can write to:
and Warranty Booklet.
Helm, Incorporated
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 US + P.O. Box 07130
Processing Fee Detroit, MI 48207
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
Prices are subject to change without notice and
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 US + without incurring obligation. Allow ample time
Processing Fee for delivery.
Current and Past Model Order Forms Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are
to make checks payable in U.S. funds.
available for current and past model GM vehicles.
To request an order form, please specify year
and model name of the vehicle.

502
 A Airbag System (cont.)
When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 75
Accessories and Modifications ..................... 332 Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 71
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 178 Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
Additives, Fuel ............................................ 336 System .................................................... 286
Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 446 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 293
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 352 Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 198
Air Conditioning ........................................... 180 Appearance Care
Airbag Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 441
Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 194 Care of Safety Belts ................................ 439
Readiness Light ....................................... 192 Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 443
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 440
Module (SDM) .......................................... 494 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 435
Airbag System ............................................... 68 Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 437
Adding Equipment to Your Finish Care .............................................. 440
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 85 Finish Damage ......................................... 442
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 76 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Passenger Sensing System ....................... 79 Other Plastic Surfaces .......................... 438
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 84 Leather .................................................... 438
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 76 Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 442
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? ....................................... 77

503
Appearance Care (cont.)
Speaker Covers ....................................... 439
B
Tires ........................................................ 442 Battery ........................................................ 376
Underbody Maintenance ........................... 443 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ................. 175
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 444 Run-Down Protection ............................... 177
Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 439 Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 312
Weatherstrips ........................................... 439 Brake
Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 441 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 293
Wood Panels ........................................... 439 Emergencies ............................................ 295
Ashtray(s) .................................................... 179 Panic Assist ............................................. 300
Audio System(s) .......................................... 258 Parking .................................................... 124
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ........ 281, 282 System Warning Light .............................. 197
Care of Your CD Player ........................... 285 Brakes ........................................................ 372
Care of Your CDs .................................... 285 Braking ....................................................... 292
Diversity Antenna System ......................... 286 Braking in Emergencies ............................... 295
Navigation/Radio System, Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 111
see Navigation Manual ......................... 281 Bulb Replacement ....................................... 387
Radio with CD ......................................... 260 Back-Up and License Plate Lamps .......... 389
Setting the Time ...................................... 260 Front Turn Signal and Fog Lamps ............ 388
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 281 Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 387
Understanding Radio Reception ............... 284 Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 384
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 286 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting .... 387
Automatic Transmission Replacement Bulbs .................................. 390
Fluid ........................................................ 353 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Operation ................................................. 118 Sidemarker Lamps ................................ 388
Buying New Tires ........................................ 411

504
 C Child Restraints (cont.)
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Calibration ................................................... 133 Right Front Seat Position ........................ 63
California Fuel ............................................. 336 Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 54
California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 333 Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 179
Canadian Owners ........................................... 3 Cleaning
Capacities and Specifications ...................... 457 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 441
Carbon Monoxide .............. 100, 130, 316, 328 Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 440
Care of Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 437
Safety Belts ............................................. 439 Finish Care .............................................. 440
Your CD Player ........................................ 285 Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 435
Your CDs ................................................. 285 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Center Console Storage Area ...................... 151 Plastic Surfaces .................................... 438
Chains, Tire ................................................. 418 Leather .................................................... 438
Charging System Light ................................ 196 Speaker Covers ....................................... 439
Check Tires ........................................................ 442
Engine Light ............................................ 202 Underbody Maintenance ........................... 443
Engine Oil Pressure Message .................. 215 Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 439
Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 340 Weatherstrips ........................................... 439
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 443 Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 441
Child Restraints Wood Panels ........................................... 439
Child Restraint Systems ............................. 49 Climate Control System
Infants and Young Children ........................ 45 Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ........... 186
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 55 Dual ......................................................... 180
Older Children ........................................... 42 Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 185
Securing a Child Restraint in a Steering Wheel Controls .......................... 187
Rear Seat Position ................................. 61 Clutch, Hydraulic ......................................... 356

505
Collision Damage Repair ............................. 495 Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 38 Reporting Safety Defects to the
Compact Spare Tire .................................... 434 Canadian Government .......................... 500
Compass ..................................................... 133 Reporting Safety Defects to the
Competitive Driving ..................................... 306 United States Government .................... 500
Competitive Driving Mode ............................ 298 Roadside Service ..................................... 488
Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 292 Service Publications Ordering
Convenience Net ......................................... 152 Information ........................................... 501
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 200
Engine Temperature Warning Light ........... 200 D
Heater, Engine ......................................... 116 Daytime Running Lamps ............................. 173
Hot Temperature Warning Message .......... 215 Diversity Antenna System ............................ 286
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ........................ 360 Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 333
Cooling System ........................................... 364 Door
Cruise Control ............................................. 168 Central Door Unlocking System ................. 97
Cruise Control Light .................................... 208 Delayed Locking ........................................ 98
Cupholder(s) ................................................ 151 Locks ......................................................... 96
Customer Assistance Information Power Door Locks ..................................... 97
Courtesy Transportation ........................... 491 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ......... 98
Customer Assistance for Text Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 99
Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 486 Driver
Customer Assistance Offices .................... 486 Position, Safety Belt ................................... 26
Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 482 Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 218
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 487 DIC Main Menu ....................................... 224
Reporting Safety Defects to DIC Vehicle Personalization ..................... 239
General Motors ..................................... 500 DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 228

506
Driver Information Center (DIC) (cont.) Engine
Status of Vehicle Systems ........................ 219 Air Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 352
System Controls ....................................... 218 Battery ..................................................... 376
Driving Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 202
At Night ................................................... 306 Check Oil Pressure Message ................... 215
City .......................................................... 310 Coolant .................................................... 357
Defensive ................................................. 288 Coolant Heater ......................................... 116
Drunken ................................................... 289 Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 200
Freeway ................................................... 311 Coolant Temperature Warning Light .......... 200
Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 314 Drive Belt Routing .................................... 477
In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 308 Engine Compartment Overview ................ 342
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 321 Exhaust ................................................... 130
Winter ...................................................... 316 Oil ........................................................... 346
Dual Climate Control System ....................... 180 Oil Life System ........................................ 350
Oil Temperature Warning Message ........... 216
Overheated Protection Operating Mode .... 363
E Overheating ............................................. 360
Electrical System Speed Limiter .......................................... 191
Add-On Equipment ................................... 446 Starting .................................................... 114
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 447 Entry Lighting .............................................. 176
Power Windows and Other Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 494
Power Options ...................................... 446 Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 41
Rear Underseat Fuse Block ..................... 451 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .................... 175
Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 447
Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 446

507
 F Fuel (cont.)
Gage ....................................................... 208
Filter Gasoline Octane ...................................... 334
Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 352 Gasoline Specifications ............................ 335
Finish Damage ............................................ 442 Fuses
Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 160 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 447
Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 164 Rear Underseat Fuse Block ..................... 451
Flat Tire ...................................................... 422 Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 447
Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 424 Windshield Wiper ..................................... 446
Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 433
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ............................ 353
Manual Transmission ................................ 355
G
Gage
Power Steering ........................................ 369 Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 200
Windshield Washer .................................. 370 Fuel ......................................................... 208
Fog Lamp Light ........................................... 207 Speedometer ........................................... 190
Fog Lamps .................................................. 175 Tachometer .............................................. 191
Folding Rear Seat ......................................... 18 Garage Door Opener .......................... 139, 140
Fuel ............................................................ 334 Gasoline
Additives .................................................. 336 Octane ..................................................... 334
California Fuel .......................................... 336 Specifications ........................................... 335
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 340 Glove Box ................................................... 151
Filling Your Tank ...................................... 338 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 487
Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 337

508
 H Horn ............................................................ 160
Hot Coolant Temperature Warning
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................ 160 Message .................................................. 215
Head Restraints ............................................ 17 How to Use This Manual ................................ 4
Headlamp How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 26
Aiming ..................................................... 384 Hydraulic Clutch .......................................... 356
Headlamps .................................................. 172
Bulb Replacement .................................... 387
Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 173
Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 164
I
Ignition Positions ......................................... 112
Front Turn Signal and Fog Lamps ............ 388 Immobilizer .................................................. 109
Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 387 Immobilizer Operation .................................. 109
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting .... 387 Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 45
High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 164 Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 402
On Reminder ........................................... 173 Instrument Panel
Washer .................................................... 167 Overview .................................................. 158
Wiper Activated ........................................ 172 Instrument Panel (I/P)
Heated Seats ................................................ 10 Brightness ................................................ 176
Heater ......................................................... 180 Cluster ..................................................... 189
Highbeam On Light ..................................... 208
High-Speed Operation, Tires ........................ 404
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 313
Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 314
J
Hood Jump Starting .............................................. 377
Checking Things Under ............................ 340
Release ................................................... 341

509
 K Light (cont.)
Malfunction Indicator ................................ 202
Keyless Entry System ................................... 92 Oil Pressure ............................................. 206
Keys ............................................................. 91 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 194
Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 192
Security ................................................... 207
L Sport Mode .............................................. 207
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 394 TCS Warning Light .................................. 199
Lamps Tire Pressure ........................................... 201
Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 177 Traction Control System (TCS) Warning ..... 199
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ................. 175 Lighting
Fog .......................................................... 175 Entry ........................................................ 176
Reading ................................................... 177 Parade Dimming ...................................... 177
LATCH System Limited-Slip Rear Axle ................................. 299
Child Restraints ......................................... 55 Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 321
Lifting Your Vehicle, Tires ............................ 418 Locks
Light Central Door Unlocking System ................. 97
Airbag Readiness ..................................... 192 Delayed Locking ........................................ 98
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 198 Door .......................................................... 96
Brake System Warning ............................. 197 Lockout Protection ................................... 100
Charging System ..................................... 196 Power Door ............................................... 97
Cruise Control .......................................... 208 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ......... 98
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ....... 200 Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 99
Fog Lamp ................................................ 207 Loss of Control ........................................... 305
Highbeam On .......................................... 208 Lumbar
Lights On Reminder ................................. 207 Power Controls .......................................... 10

510
 M Message
Center ..................................................... 209
Maintenance Schedule Check Engine Oil Pressure ...................... 215
Additional Required Services .................... 466 DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 228
At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 470 Hot Coolant Temperature Warning ............ 215
At Least Once a Month ............................ 470 Oil Temperature Warning .......................... 216
At Least Once a Year .............................. 471 One-to-Four Shift ..................................... 217
Introduction .............................................. 460 Tire Pressure Warning ............................. 216
Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 467 Transmission Fluid Hot ............................. 214
Maintenance Record ................................ 478 Mirrors
Maintenance Requirements ...................... 460 Automatic Dimming Rearview
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 476 with OnStar® ........................................ 132
Owner Checks and Services .................... 469 Automatic Dimming Rearview
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 474 with OnStar® and Compass .................. 133
Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 463 Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 137
Using ....................................................... 461 Outside Curb View Assist Mirror ............... 136
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 461 Outside Heated Mirrors ............................ 137
Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 202 Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 135
Manual Seats .................................................. 8 MyGMLink.com ............................................ 485
Manual Transmission
Fluid ........................................................ 355
Operation ................................................. 122
Map Pocket ................................................. 151
N
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Memory Seat and Mirrors .............................. 11 Manual ..................................................... 281
New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 111
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 476

511
 O P
Odometer .................................................... 190 Paint, Damage ............................................ 442
Odometers, Trip .......................................... 191 Panic Brake Assist ...................................... 300
Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 303 Parade Dimming .......................................... 177
Oil Park (P)
Engine ..................................................... 346 Shifting Into ............................................. 126
Pressure Light .......................................... 206 Shifting Out of ......................................... 128
Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 350 Parking
Oil Temperature Warning Message .............. 216 Brake ....................................................... 124
Older Children, Restraints ............................. 42 Over Things That Burn ............................ 129
One-to-Four Shift Message .......................... 217 Parking Your Vehicle ................................... 128
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 194
Online Owner Center ................................... 485
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............... 186
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 137 Passenger Sensing System ........................... 79
Other Warning Devices ................................ 160 Passing ....................................................... 303
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 185 Power
Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 178 Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 178
Outside Door Locks ................................................ 97
Convex Mirror .......................................... 137 Electrical System ..................................... 446
Curb View Assist Mirror ........................... 136 Lumbar Controls ........................................ 10
Heated Mirrors ......................................... 137 Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 114
Power Mirrors .......................................... 135 Seat ............................................................ 9
Overheated Engine Protection Steering Fluid .......................................... 369
Operating Mode ....................................... 363 Windows .................................................. 104
Owner Checks and Services ....................... 469 Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 41
Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............ 98

512
 Q Reconfigurable Steering Wheel Controls ...... 161
Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 326
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ...... 25 Remote Keyless Entry System ...................... 92
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ..... 93
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
R the Spare Tire .......................................... 427
Radios ........................................................ 258 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 425
Care of Your CD Player ........................... 285 Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 390
Care of Your CDs .................................... 285 Reporting Safety Defects
Navigation/Radio System, Canadian Government ............................. 500
see Navigation Manual ......................... 281 General Motors ........................................ 500
Radio with CD ......................................... 260 United States Government ....................... 500
Setting the Time ...................................... 260 Restraint System Check
Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 281 Checking the Restraint Systems ................. 86
Understanding Reception ......................... 284 Replacing Restraint System Parts
Reading Lamps ........................................... 177 After a Crash ......................................... 87
Rear Axle .................................................... 383 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 114
Limited-Slip .............................................. 299 Right Front Passenger Position,
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 99 Safety Belts ............................................... 34
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 38 Roadside
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 34 Service .................................................... 488
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 321
with OnStar® ............................................ 132 Roof Rack Provisions .................................. 152
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 477
with OnStar® and Compass ..................... 133 Run-Flat Tires ............................................. 400
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 14 Running the Engine While Parked ............... 131
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 474

513
 S Seats (cont.)
Power Lumbar ........................................... 10
Safety Belt Power Seats ................................................ 9
Pretensioners ............................................. 41 Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 14
Reminder Light ........................................ 192 Split Folding Rear Seat .............................. 18
Safety Belts Securing a Child Restraint
Care of .................................................... 439 Rear Seat Position ..................................... 61
Driver Position ........................................... 26 Right Front Seat Position ........................... 63
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 26 Security Light .............................................. 207
Questions and Answers Service ........................................................ 332
About Safety Belts .................................. 25 Accessories and Modifications .................. 332
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 38 Adding Equipment to the Outside
Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 34 of Your Vehicle ..................................... 334
Right Front Passenger Position .................. 34 California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 333
Safety Belt Extender .................................. 41 Doing Your Own Work ............................. 333
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 33 Engine Soon Light ................................... 202
Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 20 Publications Ordering Information ............. 501
Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 84
Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 463 Setting the Time .......................................... 260
Seats Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 442
Head Restraints ......................................... 17 Shift, One-to-Four Message ......................... 217
Heated Seats ............................................. 10 Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 126
Manual ........................................................ 8 Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 128
Memory, Mirrors ......................................... 11 Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 163

514
Spare Tire
Compact .................................................. 434
T
Installing .................................................. 427 Tachometer ................................................. 191
Remving .................................................. 425 Taillamps
String ....................................................... 433 Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Specifications, Capacities ............................ 457 Sidemarker Lamps ................................ 388
Speedometer ............................................... 190 TCS Warning Light ...................................... 199
Sport Mode Light ........................................ 207 Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 281
StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 299 Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 107
Starting Your Engine ................................... 114 Immobilizer .............................................. 109
Status of Vehicle Systems, DIC ................... 219 Immobilizer Operation .............................. 109
Steering ...................................................... 300 Tilt Wheel .................................................... 161
Steering Wheel Comfort Controls ................. 187
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ............ 281, 282 Tire
Steering Wheel, Reconfigurable Pressure Light .......................................... 201
Steering Wheel Controls .......................... 161 Pressure Warning Message ...................... 216
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 161 Tires ........................................................... 392
Storage Areas Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Center Console Storage Area ................... 151 Cleaning ............................................... 441
Convenience Net ..................................... 152 Buying New Tires ..................................... 411
Cupholder(s) ............................................ 151 Chains ..................................................... 418
Glove Box ................................................ 151 Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 424
Map Pocket ............................................. 151 Cleaning .................................................. 442
Roof Rack Provisions ............................... 152 Compact Spare Tire ................................. 434
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 320 Different Size ........................................... 414
Sun Visors .................................................. 106 High-Speed Operation .............................. 404
Sunroof ....................................................... 153 If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 422
System Controls, DIC .................................. 218 Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 402

515
Tires (cont.) Traction (cont.)
Inspection and Rotation ............................ 409 Limited-Slip Rear Axle .............................. 299
Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 427 StabiliTrak® System ................................. 299
Lifting Your Vehicle .................................. 418 Transmission
Pressure Monitor System ......................... 405 Fluid, Automatic ....................................... 353
Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 427 Fluid Hot Message ................................... 214
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 425 Fluid, Manual ........................................... 355
Run-Flat ................................................... 400 Transmission Operation, Automatic .............. 118
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 433 Transmission Operation, Manual .................. 122
Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 394 Trip Odometers ........................................... 191
Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 397 Trunk .......................................................... 100
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 414 Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 163
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 416 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 163
Wheel Replacement ................................. 416
When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 411
Winter Tires ............................................. 393 U
Towing Understanding Radio Reception ................... 284
Recreational Vehicle ................................. 326 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 414
Towing a Trailer ....................................... 328 Universal Home Remote System ........ 139, 140
Your Vehicle ............................................. 326 Operation ........................................ 141, 147
Traction
Control System (TCS) ..................... 295, 297
Control System Warning Light .................. 199

516
 V W
Vehicle Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 188
Control ..................................................... 292 Warnings
Damage Warnings ....................................... 5 DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 228
Loading .................................................... 321 Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 160
Parking Your ............................................ 128 Other Warning Devices ............................ 160
Symbols ...................................................... 5 Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4
Vehicle Data Collection and Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5
Event Data Recorders .............................. 494 Wheels
Vehicle Identification Alignment and Tire Balance ..................... 416
Number (VIN) .......................................... 445 Different Size ........................................... 414
Service Parts Identification Label .............. 445 Replacement ............................................ 416
Vehicle Personalization Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 54
DIC .......................................................... 239 Windows ..................................................... 103
Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 185 Power ...................................................... 104
Visors .......................................................... 106

517
Windshield
Washer .................................................... 166
X
Washer Fluid ........................................... 370 XM Radio Messages ................................... 279
Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 390 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 286
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 441
Wiper Fuses ............................................ 446
Wipers ..................................................... 165 Y
Winter Driving ............................................. 316 Your Vehicle and the Environment ............... 461
Winter Tires ................................................. 393
Wiper Activated Headlamps ......................... 172

518